Upload
others
View
6
Download
0
Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Table of Contents Page i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 2 - SITE WORK
SECTION NO. TITLE
02072 Demolition, Cutting, and Patching
02200 Earthwork
02223 Trenching, Backfilling, and Compacting
02242 Stability of Excavations
02260 Finished Grading and Soil Treatment
02445 Chain Link Fence and Gate
DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE
SECTION NO. TITLE
03100 Concrete Work
03200 Concrete Reinforcement
03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete
03301 Epoxies
03302 Epoxy Resin Portland Cement Bonding Agent
03356 Tooled Concrete Finishes
03600 Grout
03605 Epoxy Bonding Reinforcing Bars and Rods in Concrete
DIVISION 4 – MASONRY
SECTION NO. TITLE
04810 Unit Masonry Assemblies
DIVISION 5 – METALS
SECTION NO. TITLE
05052 Anchor Bolts, Toggle Bolts, and Concrete Inserts
05501 Miscellaneous Metals
DIVISION 6 - WOOD & PLASTICS (NOT USED)
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION NO. TITLE
07900 Joint Sealers
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Table of Contents Page ii
DIVISION 8 - DOORS & WINDOWS (NOT USED)
DIVISION 9 – FINISHES
SECTION NO. TITLE
09800 Special Coatings
09900 Paint
09970 Concrete Coating System
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES
SECTION NO. TITLE
10400 Process Identification Devices, Stenciling and Tagging Systems
DIVISION 11 –EQUIPMENT
SECTION NO. TITLE
11005 Equipment General Requirements
11330 Vertically Mounted Headworks Screenings
DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS (NOT USED)
DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
SECTION NO. TITLE
13120 Fiberglass Plant Covers
13126 Odor Control System
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEM (NOT USED)
DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL
SECTION NO. TITLE
15050 Basic Process Piping Materials and Methods
15075 Plastic Piping and Tubing
15110 Valves
15141 Mechanical Process Pipe Supports
DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL
SECTION NO. TITLE
16050 General
16051 Utility Work
16061 Grounding Systems
16100 Demolition
16121 Instrumentation Cable
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Table of Contents Page iii
16122 600 Volt Cable
16131 Rigid Conduit
16132 Flexible Conduits
16135 Pull Boxes
16143 Disconnect Switches
16231 Diesel Engine Generator System
16401 Existing Service Meter and Power Distribution Equipment
16412 Automatic Transfer Switches
16442 Lighting Panelboards
16970 Panels and Enclosures
16980 Startup Commissioning and Testing
DIVISION 17 – INSTRUMENTATION (NOT USED)
APPENDIX A: MARICOPA ASSOCIATION OF GOVERNMENT DETAILS
DIVISION 2
SITEWORK
Division 2 - Sitework
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 2: Sitework Section 02072-1
SECTION 02072
DEMOLITION, CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. All demolition, cutting and patching.
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 1 - General Requirements.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use only firms or individual trades qualified to perform work required
under this Section.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Not Used.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General:
1. Salvage items, designated for OWNER's salvage, as a unit. Clean,
list, and tag for storage. Protect from damage and store on site
where designated by OWNER. Salvage each item with auxiliary or
associated equipment required for operation.
1.5 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Perform preliminary investigations as required to ascertain extent of
work. Conditions which would be apparent by such investigation will
not be allowed as cause for claims for extra costs.
1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate and reschedule work as required to preclude interference
with other operations.
1.7 PERMITS
A. Obtain and pay for all permits required by all authorities having jurisdiction
and notify all involved utility companies.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 2: Sitework Section 02072-2
B. Obtain approval of authorities having jurisdiction for any work which
affects access to or exit from such areas. Obtain approval of authorities for
any temporary construction which affects such areas.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following
manufacturers are acceptable:
1. Nonshrink grout:
a. Masterflow 713 by Master Builders.
b. Approved equal.
2. Epoxy bonding adhesive:
a. Euco No. 452 MV by Euclid Chemical Co.
b. Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod by Sika Corporation.
c. Or approved equal.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Nonshrink Grout:
1. Nonmetallic, noncorrosive and nonstaining.
2. Premixed with only water to be added in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions at jobsite.
3. Grout to produce a positive but controlled expansion. Mass
expansion not to be created by gas liberation or by other means.
4. Minimum compressive strength at 28 days to be 6500 psi.
5. Coat exposed edges of grout with a cure/seal compound
recommended by grout manufacturer.
B. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive:
1. Two component, moisture insensitive adhesive manufactured for
the purpose of bonding fresh concrete to hardened concrete.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Provide substantial barricades and safety lights as required.
B. Provide temporary weather protection as necessary.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Cutting and Removal:
1. Remove existing work indicated to be removed, or as necessary for
installation of new work.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 2: Sitework Section 02072-3
2. Neatly cut and remove materials, and prepare all openings to
receive new work.
3. Remove masonry or concrete in small sections.
B. Modification of Existing Concrete:
1. Where indicated, remove existing concrete and finish remaining
surfaces as specified in Division 3:
a. Protect remaining concrete from damage.
b. Make openings by sawing through the existing concrete.
c. Concrete maybe broken out after initial saw cuts in the event
concrete thickness prevents cutting through.
d. Where sawing is not possible, make openings bydrilling
holes around perimeter of opening and then chipping out
the concrete:
1) Holes shall be sufficient in number to prevent
damage to remaining concrete.
2. Oversize required openings in existing concrete 1 IN on all sides
and build back to required opening size by means of nonshrink
grout epoxy bonded to the existing concrete.
3. Where oversized openings cannot be made, remove the
concrete to the required opening size and cut back exposed
reinforcing 1 IN from face of concrete and fill resulting holes
with nonshrink grout.
C. Matching and Patching:
1. Methods and materials:
a. Similar in appearance, and equal in quality to adjacent areas
for areas or surfaces being repaired.
b. Subject to review of ENGINEER.
D. Salvaged Items:
1. Thoroughly dry and clean all metal surfaces.
2. Prime all bare metal in accordance with Section 09800.
3. Dispose of items or materials not designated for OWNER's salvage
or reuse. Promptly remove from site.
4. Do not store or sell CONTRACTOR salvaged items or materials on
site.
E. Clean up:
1. Transport debris and legally dispose of off site.
END OF SECTION
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance Systems and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 2: Sitework Section 02100-1
SECTION 02100
SITE PREPARATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: clearing, grubbing, and stripping project site.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Clearing: Consists of removal of natural obstructions and existing foundations, fences, lumber, walls, stumps, brush, weeds, rubbish, trees, boulders, utility lines, and any other items which shall interfere with construction operations or are designated for removal.
B. Grubbing: Grubbing shall consist of the removal and disposal of wood or root matter below the ground surface remaining after clearing and shall include stumps, trunks, roots, or root systems.
C. Stripping: Stripping shall include the removal and disposal of all organic sod, topsoil, grass and grass roots, and other objectionable material remaining after clearing and grubbing from the areas designated to be stripped.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Verify and comply with applicable regulations regarding those governing noise, dust, nuisance, drainage and runoff, fire protection, and disposal.
B. Pre-Construction Conference: Meet with OWNER to discuss order and method of work.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements: 1. For suspected hazardous materials found, comply with current applicable
laws and consult OWNER for direction.
B. Existing Conditions: 1. Verify character and amount of clay, sand, gravel, quicksand, water, rock,
hardpan, and other material involved and work to be performed.
1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Clearing and Grubbing: Perform clearing and grubbing in advance of grading
operations.
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance Systems and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 2: Sitework Section 02100-2
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine site and verify existing conditions before beginning work.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect existing improvements from damage by site preparation work.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Clearing: 1. Strip and remove existing vegetation, organize topsoils, debris, and any other
deleterious materials from the building and paved areas. All exposed surfaces should be free of mounds and depressions which could prevent uniform compaction.
2. Do not incorporate organic material from clearing and grubbing operations in fills and backfills.
3. Contractor’s Construction Facilities: Fill or remove pits, fill, and other earthwork required for erection of facilities, upon completion of the work, and level to meet existing contours of adjacent ground.
B. Grubbing: 1. Totally remove stumps and roots within area impacted by construction. 2. Backfill and compact cavities left below subgrade elevation by removal of
stumps or roots to density of adjacent undisturbed soil.
C. Stripping: 1. Remove soil material containing sod, grass, or other vegetation to depth of
6 inches from areas to receive fill or pavement and from area within 5 feet outside foundation walls.
2. Deposit stripped material in accordance with following requirements: a. At locations as requested by ENGINEER.
END OF SECTION
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 2: Sitework Section 02200-1
SECTION 02200
EARTHWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Loosening, excavating, filling, grading, borrow, hauling, preparing subgrade,
compacting in final location, wetting and drying, and operations pertaining
to structures and earthwork.
2. Backfilling and compacting around structures.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Associated General Contractors (AGC):
1. Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction (Section 9).
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. ASTM C 117 - Test Method for Material Finer than Number 200 Sieve in
Mineral Aggregate by Washing.
2. C 131 - Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Course
Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine.
3. C 136 - Method for Sieve analysis of Fine and Course Aggregates.
4. D 698 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics
of Soil Using Standard Effort.
5. D1556-Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand Cone Method.
6. D 2419 - Standard Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine
Aggregate.
7. D 2922 - Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by
Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).
8. D 3017 - Standard Test Method for Moisture Content of Soil and Rock in
Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).
9. D 4318 - Standard Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit and Plasticity
Index of Soils.
C. Institute of Makers of Explosives (IOMOE).
D. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).
E. American Association of State Highway & Transportation Officials (AASHTO).
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 2: Sitework Section 02200-2
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Excavation: Consists of satisfactory loosening, removing, loading, transporting,
depositing, and compacting in final location materials, wet and dry, necessary to be
removed for purposes of construction, or as required for ditches, grading,
embankments, roads, structures, and such other purposes as are indicated on the
Drawings.
B. Backfill Adjacent to Structures: Backfill within volume delimited by exterior
surfaces of structures, surface of undisturbed soil in excavation around structures,
and finish grade around structure.
C. In-Place Density of Compacted Backfill: Density determined in accordance with
ASTM D 698, and with ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017.
D. Maximum Density: Is density obtained in laboratory when tested in accordance with
ASTM D 698.
E. Definitions Related to Compaction of Coarse Fill:
1. One Pass: Defined as one movement of roller over area being compacted.
2. Measurement Of Pass Width: Measure width of pass between centers of
outside tires or outside edge of roller wheel.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements:
1. Where mud or other soft or unstable material is encountered, remove such
material and refill and compact space with approved backfill material which
shall be compacted with no perceptible movement under roller.
2. Embankments and Roadway Fills:
a. Material For Fills: Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the
Drawings, material may be surplus material from excavation for
structures or other construction or, if accepted by the OWNER,
borrow material excavated from source within Project site.
b. Whatever source is used, provide fill material conforming with
specified requirements.
c. Obtain acceptable material from other sources if surplus or borrow
materials obtained within Project site do not conform to specified
requirements or are not sufficient in quantity for construction of
embankments and roadway fills.
d. No extra compensation will be made for hauling of fill materials nor
for water required to compact fills.
3. Responsibility for Compacted Fills:
a. Assume responsibility for accomplishing specified compaction for
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 2: Sitework Section 02200-3
backfill, fill, and other earthwork.
b. Perform confirmation tests to verify and confirm that work has
complied, and is complying at all times, with requirements specified
in this Section concerning initial compaction demonstration, and field
quality control testing.
4. Borrow Area:
a. No borrow area has been indicated on the Drawings.
b. Where borrow material is required, provide such material from source
selected by the CONTRACTOR, but not necessarily from within
project site.
c. Use of imported borrow shall not cause additional cost to the
Contract.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Property owner’s Permission Agreements: Submit copy of property owner’s
agreements to allow dumping surplus material on their private property.
B. Product Data: Submit material source, gradation, proctor, and testing data for all
imported materials and on site materials proposed to be used.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Initial Compaction Demonstration:
1. Adequacy of Compaction Equipment and Procedures: Demonstrate
adequacy of compaction equipment and procedures before exceeding any
of following amounts of earthwork quantities:
a. 200 linear feet of trench backfill.
b. 10 cubic yards of structural backfill.
c. 100 cubic yards of embankment work.
d. 50 cubic yards of base material.
2. Compaction Sequence Requirements: Until specified degree of compaction
on previously specified amounts of earthwork is achieved, do not perform
additional earthwork of the same kind.
1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Schedule earthwork operations to meet requirements as provided in this Section for
excavation and uses of excavated material.
B. If necessary, stockpile excavated material in order to use it in specified locations.
C. Excavation and Filling: Perform excavation and filling, during construction, in
manner and sequence that provides drainage at all times.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 2: Sitework Section 02200-4
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Water For Compacting Fills: Use water from source acceptable to OWNER.
B. Fill and Backfill Materials:
1. General:
a. Provide sand, aggregate base course, gravel, Class 2 permeable, drain
rock, select material, and native material, where required for fill and
backfill.
b. Obtain material for fills from cut sections or from borrow source.
c. Provide material having maximum particle size not exceeding 4
inches and that is free from frozen material, leaves, grass, roots,
stumps, and other vegetable matter.
d. Materials derived from processing demolished or removed asphalt
concrete are not acceptable.
2. Aggregate Base Course: As specified in Section 02235.
3. Class 2 Permeable:
a. Consist of hard, durable particles of stone or gravel, screened or
crushed to the specified size and gradation.
b. Provide free from frozen material, organic matter, lumps or balls of
clay, and other deleterious matter.
c. Durability Index: Percentage of wear not greater than 40 percent
when tested in accordance with ASTM C 131.
d. Sand Equivalent: Not less than 75 when tested in accordance with
ASTM D 2419.
e. Conform to size and grade within the limits as follow when tested in
accordance with ASTM C 136:
Sieve Size
(Square Openings)
Percent by Weight
Passing Sieve
1 inch 100
3/4 inch 90-100
3/8 inch 40-100
Number 4 25-40
Number 8 18-33
Number 30 5-15
Number 50 0-7
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 2: Sitework Section 02200-5
Number 200 0-3
4. Drain Rock:
a. Consist of hard, durable particles of stone or gravel, screened or
crushed to specified size and gradation.
b. Free from frozen material vegetable matter, lumps or balls of clay, or
other deleterious matter.
c. Crush or waste coarse material and waste fine material as required to
meet gradation requirements.
d. Durability Index: Percentage of wear not greater than 40 percent
when tested in accordance with ASTM C 131.
e. Conform to size and grade within the limits as follows when tested in
accordance with AASHTO T-27 or ASTM C 136:
Sieve Size
(Square Openings)
Percent By Weight
Passing Sieve
2 inch 100
1-1/2 inch 95-100
3/4 inch 50-100
3/8 inch 15-55
Number 4 0-25
Number 8 0-5
Number 200 0-2
5. Gravel:
a. Consist of hard, durable particles or fragments of stone or gravel,
screened or crushed to specified sizes and gradations.
b. Free from frozen material vegetable matter, lumps or balls of clay,
alkali, adobe, or other deleterious matter.
c. When sampled and tested in accordance with specified test methods,
material shall comply with following requirements:
1) Durability Index: Percentage of wear not greater than 40
percent after 500 revolutions when tested in accordance with
ASTM C 131.
2) Plasticity Index: Not greater than 5 when tested in accordance
with ASTM D 4318.
3) Liquid Limit: Not greater than 25 percent when tested in
accordance with ASTM D 4318.
d. Conform to sizes and grade within the limits as follows when tested
in accordance with ASTM C 136 and ASTM C 117.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 2: Sitework Section 02200-6
Percent By Weight Sieve Size
(Square Openings) Type A Type B
3 inch 100 –
1-1/2 inch – 100
Number 4 30 - 75 30 - 70
Number 8 20 - 60 20 - 60
Number 30 10 - 40 10 - 40
Number 200 0 - 12 0 - 12
6. Native Material:
a. Clean onsite native soil with a maximum dimension of 4 inches, and
passing 1 inch sieve.
b. Percent of material by weight passing Number 200 sieve shall not
exceed 30 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 136.
7. Sand:
a. Clean, coarse, natural sand.
b. Nonplastic when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318.
c. 100 percent shall pass a ½ inch screen.
d. No more than 20 percent shall pass a Number 200 screen.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions:
1. Character and Amount of Material:
a. Verify character and amount of rock, gravel, sand, silt, water, and
other inorganic or organic materials to be encountered in work to be
performed.
b. Determine gradation and shrinkage of excavation and fill material,
and suitability of material for use intended in work to be
performed.
c. Determine quantity of material, and cost thereof, required for
construction of excavations and fills, whether from on site
excavations, borrow areas, or imported materials.
d. Include wasting of excess material, if required, in cost of work to
be performed under this Contract.
3.2 PREPARATION
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 2: Sitework Section 02200-7
A. Surface Preparation:
1. Preparing Ground Surfaces for Fill or Concrete:
a. After clearing is completed, scarify entire areas which underlie fill
sections or structures to a depth of 8 inches and until surface is free
of ruts, hummocks, wet zones, and other features which would
prevent uniform compaction by equipment to be used.
b. Recompact areas to density specified in Sub-paragraph 3.03.C.1,
titled “Compacted Fills” before placing of fill material or concrete.
c. Where cemented rock, cobbles, or boulders compose a large portion
of foundation material underlying structures, slabs, or paved areas, it
may not be advisable to scarify the top 8 inches prior to compaction.
If the CONTRACTOR deems it advisable not to scarify existing
natural ground, then moisten the native soil and compact it as
specified in Sub-paragraph 3.03.C.2, titled “Compaction of Coarse
Fill.”
3.3 APPLICATION
A. General:
1. The CONTRACTOR shall assume responsibility and expense of disposing
of excavated materials which are not required or unsuitable for fill and
backfill in lawful manner.
2. Do not dump surplus material on private property unless written permission
agreement is furnished by owner of property. Submit copies of such
agreements.
3. Obtain material required for fills in excess of that produced by excavation
from borrow areas as specified herein.
4. Rocks, Broken Concrete, or Other Solid Materials Larger Than 4 Inches in
Greatest Dimension: Do not place in fill areas but remove from project site
at no additional cost to the Contract.
5. Stabilization of Subgrade: Provide materials used or perform work to
stabilize subgrade so it can withstand loads which may be placed upon it by
CONTRACTOR’s equipment at no additional cost to Contract.
6. Engineered fill under structure foundations and slabs on grade shall consist
of native material that is conditioned and compacted as specified in this
Section.
7. Backfill around all structures that require hydrostatic testing shall not be
completed until after hydrostatic testing is completed, and the structures
have passed the hydrostatic test.
8. Undermining footings/slabs after they have been cast-in place is prohibited.
B. Excavation:
1. Excavations for Structures:
a. The building and slabs on grade shall be over excavated to a uniform
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 2: Sitework Section 02200-8
depth of two feet below the foundation or two feet below the existing
ground surface, which ever depth is greater. The over excavation shall
extend five feet beyond the footprint of the building and slab on
grade. The over excavated areas shall be filled with engineered fill.
Include trenching for adjacent piping and all work incidental thereto.
b. Where soil of Unsuitable Bearing Value is Encountered: The
CONTRACTOR may direct in writing that excavation be carried to
elevations above or below those indicated on the Drawings.
c. Unless directed by the ENGINEER, excavations shall not be carried
below elevations indicated on the Drawings.
d. Where excavations are made below elevations required for the
foundation, adjust elevations of excavations in accordance with
requirements following:
1) Under Slabs: Restore to proper elevation in accordance with
procedure specified for backfill in this Section.
2) Under Footings: Select one of the following:
a) Increase heights of walls or footings.
b) Refill space with Class C concrete, as specified in
Section 03300, at no additional cost to the Contract.
c) Excavation Width: Extend excavations at least 24
inches clear from walls and footings to allow for
placing and removal of forms, installation of services,
and inspection. Undercutting of slopes will not be
permitted.
e. Bottom of Excavations For Structures: Consist of native material with
top 8 inches compacted to 95 percent of maximum density and graded
to conform to outside limits of structures as indicated on the
Drawings, except where otherwise indicated on the Drawings or
specified.
f. Difficulty of Excavation: No extra compensation will be made for
removal of rock or any other material due to difficulty of excavation.
g. Location of Structures on Different Substrates: Where structure will
be located partially on fill and partially on undisturbed or natural
material, over-excavate entire area to depth of 12 inches below the
structure and re-compact to 95 percent maximum density.
2. Excavation of Ditches and Gutters:
a. Cutting: Cut ditches and gutters accurately to cross sections and
grades indicated on the Drawings.
b. Excavation: Take care not to excavate ditches and gutters below
grades indicated on the Drawings.
c. Over Excavation: Back fill excessive ditch and gutter excavation to
grade with suitable thoroughly compacted material to form adequate
gutter paving.
d. Depositing Of Material Adjacent To Ditches: Do not deposit any
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 2: Sitework Section 02200-9
material within three feet of edge of ditch unless otherwise indicated
on the Drawings.
3. Necessary Over Excavation:
a. General:
1) Where it becomes necessary to excavate beyond normal lines
of excavation in order to remove boulders or other interfering
objects, backfill voids remaining after removal as specified
below in “Backfilling Of Voids”, or as acceptable to the
ENGINEER.
2) With ENGINEER’s approval, perform necessary excavation
beyond normal lines as specified in Subparagraph above and
backfill such voids. Cost of such work shall be considered as
included in price bid for the work.
3) Backfilling of Voids:
a) Fill voids with suitable material acceptable to the
OWNER, placed in manner and to same uniform
density as surrounding material.
C. Compaction:
1. Compacted Fills:
a. Lines and Grades:
1) Construct fills, embankments, and backfills, designated herein
as fills, at locations and to lines and grades indicated on the
Drawings.
2) Borrow sources are not available within project site. Where
required, CONTRACTOR shall provide necessary imported
fill material from outside sources.
b. Compacted Fill Shape and Sections: Provide completed fill that
corresponds to shape of typical sections indicated on the Drawings or
that meets requirements for particular case.
c. Preparation of Areas Designated to Receive Fill Material: Scarify to
minimum depth of 8 inches, unless otherwise indicated on the
Drawings, and recompact to density of fill material as specified in
following Article.
d. Fills and Backfills and Upper 6 Inches in Cuts: Compact to
percentage of maximum density as follows:
1) Backfill Adjacent to Structures: 95 percent.
2) Under Present and Future Structures: 98 percent.
3) Under Roadways (aggregate base course, and dirt), Parking,
Curbs and Sidewalks: 95 percent.
4) Aggregate Base Below Pavement 100 percent.
5) Onsite or Imported Fill Below Exterior Slabs on Grade: 95
percent.
6) Aggregate Base other than Below Pavement: 95 percent.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 2: Sitework Section 02200-10
7) Landscaped Areas: 90 percent unless otherwise noted.
8) Compacted Embankments: 95 percent.
9) Spoil Areas Indicated on the Drawings: No minimum
required.
e. Placing Compacted Fills:
1) Placement: Place loose material in successive layers that do
not exceed 8 inches before compaction.
2) Moisture Content: Bring each layer to optimum moisture
content for maximum density before compaction by rolling.
3) Defective Compacted Fills:
a) Remove and replace any placed material that does not
have correct moisture content.
b) Remove and replace fills with suitable material when
any one of the following 2 conditions exist as they
shall serve as sufficient evidence, without further
testing, that moisture content is not correct:
(1) Soft, spongy or stringy material causing areas
that “pump” when heavy loads pass over.
(2) Dry material that will not “ball”.
f. Mechanical Spreading and Rolling Layers of Fills:
1) Spreading: Spread each layer uniformly by use of road
machine or other accepted device.
2) Rolling: Roll with acceptable tamping roller, heavy
pneumatic roller, or power roller until thoroughly
compacted to not less than specified density.
3) Fill Required to be Compacted That is Inaccessible to Rollers:
Compact with pneumatic, vibrating, or other tamping
equipment.
4) Use of Other Equipment: Use of trucks, carryalls, scrapers,
tractors, or other heaving hauling equipment is not considered
as rolling in lieu of rollers, but distributed traffic of such
hauling equipment over fill in such manner as to make use of
compaction by use of rollers.
2. Compaction of Coarse Fill:
a. When Materials Are Coarsely Graded Such That Performance of
Field Density Tests Are Impossible:
1) Placement and Compaction: Place material in lifts so as to
obtain compacted thickness of 6 inches and roll with pneumatic
roller or power roller.
2) Moisture Content: Provide moisture content of fraction of
material passing 3/4 inch sieve within plus or minus 2.0
percent of optimum moisture as determined in accordance
with ASTM D 1557.
3. Compaction of Embankments and Roadway Fills:
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 2: Sitework Section 02200-11
a. Construction and Compaction of Fills:
1) Construct in layers of depths specified above.
2) Compact by rolling with power rollers, tamping rollers,
vibrating rollers or pneumatic tire rollers.
3) Moisture Content:
a) While and as each layer is deposited, apply water in
sufficient amount to ensure optimum moisture to
secure compaction specified.
b) Uniformly incorporate water with fill material in
amount sufficient to assure required density after
rolling.
c) If excess moisture is encountered in fill, manipulate
each layer so as to dry out excess moisture.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests:
1. Confirmation Tests:
a. CONTRACTOR’s Responsibilities:
1) Accomplish specified compaction for backfill, fill, and other
earthwork.
2) Control operations by confirmation tests to verify and
confirm that compaction work complies, and is complying
at all times, with requirements specified in this Section
concerning compaction, control, and testing.
3) Copies of Confirmation Test Reports: Submit promptly to the
OWNER and ENGINEER.
b. Frequency of Confirmation Testing:
1) Perform testing not less than as follows:
a) For Structural Fill and Backfill: One every 30 cubic
yards, or each day’s production which ever is more
frequent.
b) In Embankment or Fill: One every 200 cubic yards.
c) Base Material: One every 50 cubic yards.
d) Subgrade of Structures, Footings, Structural Slabs
in cut situation: once per foundation area.
c. Cost: CONTRACTOR shall include cost of testing in his bid.
2. Retesting:
a. Costs of Retesting: Costs of retesting required to confirm and verify
that remedial work has brought compaction within specified
requirements shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR.
b. CONTRACTOR’s Confirmation Tests During Performance of
Remedial Work:
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 2: Sitework Section 02200-12
1) Performance: Perform tests in manner acceptable to the
ENGINEER.
2) Frequency: Double amount specified for initial confirmation
tests.
B. Tolerances:
1. Finish Grading of Excavations, Backfill and Fills:
a. Perform fine grading under concrete structures such that finished
surfaces are never above established grade or approved cross section
and are never more than 0.10 feet below.
b. Provide finish surface areas outside of structures that are not more
than 0.10 feet above or below established grade or accepted cross
section.
2. Of Areas Which are not Under Structures, Concrete, Asphalt, Roads,
Pavements, Walks, Dikes and Similar Type Items:
a. Provide finish graded surfaces of either undisturbed natural soil, or
cohesive material not less than 6 inches deep.
b. Intent of preceding is to avoid sandy or gravelly areas.
3. Finished Grading Surfaces:
a. Reasonably smooth, compacted, and free from irregular surface
changes.
b. Provide degree of finish that is ordinarily obtainable from blade
grader operations, except as otherwise specified.
c. Uniformly grade areas which are not under concrete.
d. Finish gutters and ditches so that they drain readily.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Finish Grades of Excavations, Backfilling and Fill:
1. Repair and reestablish grades to required elevations and slopes due to any
settlement or washing way that may occur from action of the elements prior
to final acceptance.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Finish Grades of Excavations, Backfilling and Fill:
1. Protect newly graded areas from action of the elements.
B. Ditches and Gutters:
1. Keep ditches and gutters excavated under this Contract free from detrimental
quantities of debris that may inhibit drainage until final acceptance.
3.7 DISPOSAL OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 2: Sitework Section 02200-13
A. Unusable material or excavated material in excess of that needed for backfill or fill
offsite shall become the property of the CONTRACTOR and shall be removed from
the project site and legally disposed of at no cost to the OWNER.
END OF SECTION
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 2: Sitework Section 02072-1
SECTION 02223
TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Trench excavation, fine grading, pipe bedding, backfilling, and
compaction for the following, including requirements for ditch crossings: 1. Pipe and electrical conduits.
2. Manholes, valves, or other accessories.
3. Piping and appurtenances.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. C 117 - Standard Test Method for Material Finer Than Number 200 Sieve in
Mineral Aggregate by Washing.
2. C 131 - Standard Test method for resistance to degradation of small size
coarse aggregate by abrasion and impact in the Los Angeles machine. 3. C 136 - Standard Test Method for Sieve analysis of fine and coarse aggregate.
4. D 1556 - Standard Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand-
Cone Method.
5. D 698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics
of Soil Using Standard Effort.
6. D 2922 - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in
Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth).
7. D 4318 - Standard Test Method for liquid limit, plastic limit, and plasticity
index of soils.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Products Data: For all proposed bedding and backfill materials.
1. Material source.
2. Gradation.
3. Proctor.
4. Testing data.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General:
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 2: Sitework Section 02072-2
1. Provide material having maximum particle size not exceeding 4 inches and
that is free of frozen material, leaves, grass, roots, stumps, and other
vegetable matter.
2. Materials derived from processing demolished or removed asphalt concrete
are not acceptable.
B. Aggregate Base Course: As specified in Section 02235.
C. Gravel: MAG Specification Section 701.2.2.
D. Native Material:
1. Sound, earthen material passing the 1 inch sieve and free from organic
material.
2. Percent of material passing the Number 200 sieve by weight shall not exceed
30 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 136.
E. Sand: MAG Specification Section 701.3.2.
F. Select Material: Sound earthen material for which the sum of the plasticity index
when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318 and the percent of material by weight
passing the Number 200 sieve shall not exceed 23 when tested in accordance with
ASTM C 136.
G. Native Fill Soils: Native soils can be used as engineered fill if the remolded swell is
less than 2 percent (2%), but must be screened prior to placement. Trash,
construction debris, and oversized aggregate must be removed.
H. Engineered Backfill: Engineered fill shall consist of native soils and/or import
material that is predominantly sand with clay or silt, low in plasticity, and with a
remolded swell less than 2.0%.
I. Corrosive Soils: Soils considered to be subject to concrete corrosion are based on
Table 1904.3 of the 2003 International Building Code.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. General:
1. Before laying pipes or electrical conduits in fill, place fill and compact it to
not less than 2 feet above top of pipe or conduit.
2. After placing and compacting fill, excavate through fill and fine grade as
required in this Section.
B. Protection: Stabilize excavation.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 2: Sitework Section 02072-3
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Trench Excavation:
1. General Requirements:
a. If, because of soil conditions, safety requirements or other reasons,
trench width at top of pipe is increased beyond width specified in this
Section, upgrade laying conditions or install stronger pipe designed
in conformance with Specifications for increased trench width,
without additional cost. b. Pipe And Electrical Conduits:
1) Lay pipe in open trench.
2) Where shown on Drawings, lay electric conduits in concrete
encased duct banks with a warning ribbon located 1'-0" above
the top of the duct bank. Do not use any rebar and dye. NEC
approved chairs shall be placed every 5' throughout the length
of the duct bank to provide support and separation of
conduits.
3) If bottom of excavation is found to consist of rock or any
material that by reason of its hardness cannot be excavated to
provide uniform bearing surface, as determined by
ENGINEER, remove such rock or other material to a depth
of not less than 4 inches below bottom of pipe and refill to
grade with aggregate base course material or sand placed at
uniform density, with minimum possible compaction, at no
additional cost.
4) If bottom of excavation is found to consist of soft or unstable
material which is incapable of properly supporting pipe,
remove such material to a depth and for the length required,
as determined by the OWNER, and then refill trench to grade
with aggregate base course or sand, compacted to 95 percent
of maximum density.
5) Where indicated on the Drawings, and where fill conditions
dictate, cradle pipe in concrete.
6) Minimum Clear Width of Trench for Pipe 4 Inches in
Diameter and Over (Measured At Top Of Pipe): Not less than
outside diameter of pipe plus 18 inches.
7) Maximum Clear Width of Trench for Pipe (Measured at Top
of Pipe):
a) For Pipe Sizes up to and Including 24 Inches: Not
exceed outside diameter of pipe plus 24 inches.
b) For Pipe Sizes Over 24 Inches: Not exceed outside
diameter of pipe plus 36 inches. c. For Manholes, Valves, or Other Accessories:
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 2: Sitework Section 02072-4
1) Provide excavations sufficient to leave at least 12 inches clear
between their outer surfaces and embankment or shoring
which may be used to hold banks and protect them.
2) Do not backfill with earth under manholes, vaults, tanks, or
valves.
3) Fill any unauthorized excess excavation below elevation
indicated on the Drawings for foundation of any structure
with aggregate base material or concrete at no additional
cost.
4) Backfilling of Manhole Excavation: Conform to backfilling
requirements as specified for trenches in this Section. d. Potable Water Pipe and Appurtenances:
1) Lay in trench separate from those used for sewers.
2) Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, lay
in trenches having cover of not less than 4 feet below surface
of ground and located at distance of not less than 10 feet from
any parallel sewer trench. e. At Road Crossings or Existing Driveways:
1) Make provision for trench crossing at these points, either by
means of backfills or tunnels.
B. Trench Fine Grading:
1. For Pipes 16 Inches in Nominal Diameter and Under:
a. Unless otherwise specified, accurately grade bottom of trench to
provide uniform bearing and support for each section of pipe, on
undisturbed soil at every point along pipe’s entire length, except for
portions of pipe where it is necessary to excavate for bells and for
proper sealing of pipe joints. 2. Bell or Coupling Holes:
a. Dig holes after trench bottom has been graded.
b. Provide holes of sufficient width to provide ample room for grouting,
banding, or welding.
c. Excavate holes only as necessary in making joints and to ensure that
pipe rests upon prepared trench bottom and not supported by any
portion of the joint.
3. Depressions for Joints, Other Than Bell-and-Spigot:
a. Make in accordance with recommendations of joint manufacturer for
particular joint used.
C. Pipe Bedding:
1. After Pipe Laid:
a. Place bedding material under and around pipe to level even with
spring line of pipe, and compact to 90 percent of maximum density.
Depth of bedding under pipe shall be 4 inches.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 2: Sitework Section 02072-5
b. Fill section of trench from spring line to 12 inches above top of pipe
with bedding material and mechanically compact to 90 percent of
maximum density.
2. Pipe Displacement:
a. Take necessary precautions in placement and compaction of bedding
material to prevent displacement of piping.
b. In event there is movement, re-excavate, re-lay, and backfill the pipe.
3. Consolidation:
a. Use mechanical means.
D. Trench Backfill:
1. Place and compact backfill in accordance with following requirements:
a. From 12 inches above top of pipe to natural surface level.
b. Finish grade indicated on the Drawings as follows:
1) Backfill For Trench Cuts Across Roadways, Paved Streets,
Site Access Roads, and Site Road: Backfill trench to
underside of specified pavement replacement with aggregate
base course material compacted to 95 percent of maximum
density.
c. Trench Backfill for Trench Cuts in Areas Outside the Improved
Section of Roadways and within open spaces: Backfill trench from 12
inches above top of pipe to finish grade with native material
compacted to 90 percent of maximum density.
d. Trench Backfill through Earth Slopes or Embankments Supporting
Structures, through Structural Fill, or Adjacent to and/or Under
Structures: Backfill trench from 12 inches above top of pipe to finish
grade with ABC material or approved select material compacted to 95
percent of maximum density.
E. Compacting Native Material:
1. Assure that native material, when used as previously specified, is capable of
being compacted to degree specified.
2. If native material cannot be compacted to density as previously specified,
remove and dispose of material whether it has been placed in trench as
backfill or not, and utilize other backfill material from another source
acceptable to the ENGINEER.
F. Excess Material:
1. Remove excess excavated material from the project site.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests:
1. Confirmation Tests:
a. CONTRACTOR’s Responsibilities:
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 2: Sitework Section 02072-6
1) Accomplish specified compaction of trench backfill.
2) Control operations by confirmation tests to verify and
confirm that compaction work complies, and is complying at
all times, with requirements specified in this Section
concerning compaction, control, and testing.
3) Copies of Confirmation Test Reports: Submit promptly to the
OWNER and ENGINEER. b. Frequency of Confirmation Testing:
1) Perform testing not less than as follows:
a) For Trenches: At each test location include tests for
each type or class of backfill from bedding to finish
grade. b) In Open Fields: Two every 500 linear feet.
c) Along Dirt or Gravel Road or off Traveled Right-of-
Way: Two every 500 linear feet.
d) Crossing Paved Roads: Two locations along each
crossing.
e) Under Pavement Cuts or Within 2 Feet of Pavement
Edges: One location every 200 linear feet.
f) Under structures and slabs: minimum of one, and one
every 50 linear feet.
c. Contractor shall include cost of testing in his bid.
2. Retesting:
a. Costs of Retesting: Costs of retesting required to confirm and verify
that remedial work has brought compaction within specified
requirements shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR.
b. CONTRACTOR’s Confirmation Tests During Performance of
Remedial Work.
1. Performance: Perform tests in manner acceptable to the
ENGINEER.
2. Frequency: Double amount specified for initial confirmation
tests. 3. Water Testing Pipe:
a. After bedding the pipe, contractor shall water pressure and leak test
pipe.
b. If pipe does not pass test, locate leaks, repair and retest, repeating
until pipe section under test passes, then backfill.
B. As-builts:
1. CONTRACTOR shall survey the entire line prior to backfill.
3.4 SCHEDULES
A. Bedding Materials:
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 2: Sitework Section 02072-7
1. For Pipe Less Than 16 Inch Nominal Size: Other than plastic pipe, except as
otherwise specified, use sand, aggregate base course, or gravel. 2. For Polyvinyl Chloride or Other Plastic Pipe Less Than 2 Inches in Diameter:
Sand or gravel.
3. For polyvinyl chloride pipe larger than 2 inches in diameter: aggregate base
course.
END OF SECTION
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 WWTP Wastwater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 2: Sitework Section 02235‐1
SECTION 02235
AGGREGATE BASE COURSE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Aggregate base course for applications as specified and shown on
Drawings.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. C 117 - Standard Test Method for Material Finer than 75 µM (Number 200)
Sieve in Mineral Aggregate by Washing.
2. C 136 - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse
Aggregates.
3. D 4318 - Standard Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity
Index of Soils.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Source, gradation, proctor, and testing data for aggregate base course.
B. Quality Control:
2. Test Reports.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage and Protection: Protect from segregation and excessive moisture during
delivery, storage, and handling.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Aggregate Base Course:
1. Consist of hard, durable particles or fragments of stone or gravel, screened
or crushed to required size and grading and free from frozen material,
vegetable matter, lumps or balls of clay, alkali, adobe, or other deleterious
matter.
2. Materials derived from processing demolished, removed asphalt concrete, or
Portland cement aggregate are not acceptable.
3. When sampled and tested in accordance with specified test methods, material
shall comply with following requirement:
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 WWTP Wastwater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 2: Sitework Section 02235‐2
a. Plasticity Index: Not be more than 5 when tested in accordance with
ASTM D 4318.
b. Liquid Limit: Not be more than 25 percent when tested in accordance
with ASTM D 4318.
4. Aggregate Base Course for Structures:
a. Consist of crushed or fragmented particles.
5. The following limits when tested in accordance with ASTM C 136 and
ASTM C 117:
Sieve Sizes1
(Square Openings)
Percent by Weight
Passing Sieve
1-1/8 inch 100
Number 4 38-65
Number 8 25-60
Number 30 10-40
Number 200 3-12
6. Aggregate shall have a percentage of fifty or less at 500 revolutions when
tested in accordance with AASTHO T96.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine conditions upon which the work specified in
this Section depends for defects that may influence installation and performance.
B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Subgrade Preparation: Prepare as specified in Section 02200, “Earthwork”,
paragraph 3.02 A.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Furnish, spread, and compact aggregate base course material to the lines, grades, and
dimensions indicated on the Drawings per Section 02200, unless specified otherwise.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests: CONTRACTOR to perform compaction tests every 50 cubic yards or each
days placement, whichever is more frequent.
B. CONTRACTOR shall include cost of testing in his Bid.
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 WWTP Wastwater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 2: Sitework Section 02235‐3
END OF SECTION
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 WWTP Wastwater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 2: Sitework Section 02242-1
SECTION 02242
STABILITY OF EXCAVATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Stability of excavations.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc., (AISC):
1. Manual of Steel Construction (MSC).
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. General Engineering Design Practice: General engineering design practice in area of
the Project, performed in accordance with recent engineering literature on subject of shoring and stability of mass excavations.
1. Where general engineering design practice is specified, provide drawings and
signed calculations and have design performed by civil or structural engineer registered in State where the Project is located:
a. Provide design calculations that clearly disclose assumptions made,
criteria followed, and stress valued used for various materials. b. Furnish acceptable references substantiating appropriateness of
design assumptions, criteria, and stress values.
B. Shoring: A temporary structural system designed to support vertical faces of soil or
rock for purposes of excavation. Shoring includes cantilevered sheet piling, internally braced sheet piling, slurry walls, soldier piles and lagging, and other similar shoring
systems. Sloping of the soil is not shoring.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Requirements:
1. Design means for safe and stable excavations in accordance with general engineering design practice.
2. Design steel members in accordance with AISC MSC.
3. Design shoring involving materials other than steel in accordance with International Building Code.
4. Perform design in accordance with soil characteristics and design recommendations contained in a written geotechnical report issued and
signed by a geotechnical engineer registered in the State where the Project
is located:
a. Make copy of geotechnical report available at project site for
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 WWTP Wastwater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 2: Sitework Section 02242-2
ENGINEER’s review. b. Retain and pay for geotechnical engineer’s services.
c. Obtain report based on soil samples, field and laboratory tests, and borings performed for the geotechnical report for the design of
stability of excavations by the geotechnical engineer.
5. When electing to design with material stresses for temporary construction higher than allowable stresses prescribed in the reference publications,
increase in such stresses shall not exceed 10 percent of value of prescribed
stresses.
B. Performance Requirements: 1. General:
a. Support faces of excavations and protect structures and improvements in vicinity of excavations from damage and loss of function due to
settlement or movement of soils and alterations in ground water level
caused by such excavations, and related operations. b. Herein Specified Provision:
1) Complement, but do not substitute or diminish, obligations of CONTRACTOR for the furnishing of a safe place of work
pursuant to provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health
Act of 1970 and its subsequent amendments and regulations and for protection of the Work, structures, and other
improvements. 2) Represent minimum requirement for:
a. Number and types of means needed to maintain soil
stability. b. Strength of such required means.
c. Methods and frequency of maintenance and observation of means used for maintaining soil
stability. 2. Provide safe and stable excavations by means of sheeting, shoring, bracing,
sloping, and other means and procedures, such as draining and recharging
groundwater and routing and disposing of surface runoff, required to maintain the stability of soils.
3. Provide support for trench excavations for protection of workers from hazard
of caving ground. 4. Provide Shoring:
a. Where, as result of excavation work and analysis performed pursuant to general engineering design practice, as defined in this Section:
1) Excavated face or surrounding soil mass may be subject to
slides, caving, or other types of failures. 2) Stability and integrity of structures and other improvements
may be compromised by settlement or movement of soils. b. For trenches 5 feet and deeper. c. For trenches less than 5 feet in depth, when there is a potential for
cave-in. d. Where indicated on the Drawings.
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 WWTP Wastwater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 2: Sitework Section 02242-3
5. For safe and stable excavations, use appropriate design and procedures for
construction and maintenance to minimize settlement of supported ground and to prevent damage to existing structures and other improvements,
including: a. Using stiff support systems. b. Following appropriate construction sequence. c. Preventing soil loss through or under support system:
1) Provide support system that is tight enough to prevent loss of soil and extend deep enough to prevent heave or flow of soils
from supported soil mass into the excavation.
2) Where sheet piling is used, drive sheet piles in interlock.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings and Calculations: 1. Perform design pursuant to general engineering design practice.
2. For excavations other than trenches, submit, in advance of excavation work, design calculations as performed pursuant to general engineering design
practice, as specified in this Section, and detail drawing showing means for
safe and stable excavations. In design calculations and detail drawing, cover, and as a minimum: a. Excavations adjacent to structures, and
b. Excavations 5 feet or more in depth, or less than 5 feet in depth when
there is potential for cave-in, at other locations.
B. Control Points and Schedule of Measurements:
1. Submit location and details of control points and method and schedule of measurements in accordance with requirements of this section.
2. Promptly upon constructing control points and making measurements and such control points, as specified in this Section, submit copy of field report
with such measurements.
C. Detailed Sequence of Installation and Removal of Shoring:
1. Address the sequence of installation and removal of shoring in design
calculations.
2. Consider effects of ground settlement in the sequence of installation and removal of shoring.
1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. For excavation, including trenchings, do not begin until excavation submittals have
been accepted by Engineer and until materials necessary for installation are on site.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 WWTP Wastwater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 2: Sitework Section 02242-4
3.1 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL
A. Install means for providing safe and stable excavations as indicated in the submittals.
B. Remove shoring by completion of the Work. Pressure preservative treated wood
lagging may be left in place when acceptable to the ENGINEER.
3.2 MAINTENANCE
A. Where loss of soil occurs, plug gap in shoring and replace lost soil with fill material acceptable to ENGINEER.
B. Where measurements and observations indicate possibility of failure of excavation
support, determined in accordance with general engineering design practice, take
appropriate action immediately.
3.3 CONTROL POINTS
A. Establish control points on shoring and on structures and other improvement in vicinity of excavation for measurement of horizontal and vertical movement: 1. Set Control Points on Support System:
a. Set points at distances not exceeding 25 feet at each support level.
b. Support levels shall be levels of tie-backs, whales, bottom of excavation, and other types of supports.
2. Set control points in corners of structures and on curbs, manholes, and other
locations indicated on the Drawings.
B. Provide plumb bobs with horizontal targets indicating original position of plumb bobs in relation to shoring at control points and at locations indicated on the
Drawings.
C. Perform horizontal and vertical measurements of control points at least once every
week.
END OF SECTION
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance Systems and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 2: Sitework Section 02260-1
SECTION 02260
FINISHED GRADING AND SOIL TREATMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. General work included in this Section:
1. All finished grading and soil treatment as indicated in the Contract
Documents.
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 1.
2. Section 02100 - Site Preparation.
3. Section 02200 - Earthwork.
C. Location of Work: All areas within limits of grading and all areas outside limits of
grading which are disturbed in the course of the work. Soil treatment shall be limited
to areas under slabs, sidewalks, perimeter of structures, pavement, and areas to
receive ABC.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Soil Treatment:
1. Soil sterilization for vegetation control shall be Karmex 80W manufactured
by DuPont; Diuron 4L manufactured by Drexel chemical Corporation; or pre-
approved equal.
2.2 TOLERANCES
A. Finish Grading Tolerance: 0.1 ft plus/minus from required elevations.
PART 3 PREPARATION
A. Correct, adjust and/or repair graded areas:
1. Cut off mounds and ridges.
2. Fill gullies and depressions.
3. Perform other necessary repairs.
4. Bring all sub-grades to specified contours, even and properly compacted.
5. Loosen surface to depth of 2 in., minimum.
6. Remove all stone and debris over 2 in. in any dimension.
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance Systems and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 2: Sitework Section 02260-2
B. Prepare areas for soil treatment per manufacturer's recommendations.
3.2 ROUGH GRADE REVIEW
A. Reviewed by ENGINEER in Section 02100, Site Preparation.
3.3 TREATING SOIL
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, material, equipment, and services
necessary to complete all work involved in soil sterilization for unwanted plant life.
The weed killer shall be applied according to the manufacturer's published
instructions.
END OF SECTION
Division 2: Chain Link Fence and Gate Section 02445‐1
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
SECTION 02445
CHAIN LINK FENCE AND GATE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies chain link fence comprising fencing, gates, and appurtenances.
1.2 FACTORY TESTING
A. Wire fabric and barbed wire shall be tested for zinc coating weight by the method
specified in ASTM A90. Ferrous metal, except the fabric, shall be tested for zinc
coating uniformity by the method specified in ASTM A239; zinc coating shall
withstand six 1-minute dips.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. A90 - Standard Test Method for Weight of Coating on Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles.
2. A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc-
Coated, Welded and Seamless.
3. A121 - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Barbed
Wire.
4. A123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on
Iron and Steel Products.
5. A153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware.
6. A239 - Standard Practice for Locating the Thinnest Spot in a Zinc
(Galvanized) Coating on Iron or Steel Articles by the Preece Test (Copper
Sulfate Dip).
7. F567 Standard Practice for Installation of Chain Link Fence.
8. F668 - Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride Coated Steel Chain Link Fences.
B. UL325.
1.4 SUBMITTAL
A. Manufacturer's product information designating specific materials provided.
B. The layout of the chain link fence as it is to be provided illustrating fence height,
post sizes, bracing configurations, and accessories.
C. The layout and operation of the gates.
Division 2: Chain Link Fence and Gate Section 02445‐2
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
D. Weight of gates.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Chain Link Fabric:
1. Fabric to have 75,000 psi tensile strength. Chain link fabric shall be 2-inch
mesh 9-gauge core wire. Height of fabric shall be 8 feet 0 inch (plus or
minus 3/4 inch).
2. Fabric shall conform with the requirements of ASTM F668, Class 2b and
shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication, and then covered with a
thermally fused and bonded vinyl coating. The vinyl coated fabric shall be 8-
gauge, finish.
B. Slates for Chain Link Fence and Gate:
1. Provide plastic slats that insert vertically through chain link fence and gate
with a bottom lock.
2. Provide wooden slates for 80% privacy factor.
3. Slat length shall be sufficient for secure bolting to the frame.
C. Bottom Tension Wire:
1. Bottom tension wire shall be at least 7-gage galvanized coil spring steel.
D. Barbed Wire:
1. Barbed wire shall be double strand 12 1/2-gage galvanized steel with 14-
gage barbs in 4-point pattern on 5-inch centers and shall have a Class 1
galvanized coating per ASTM A121.
E. Posts, Top Rail, and Braces:
1. Pipe used shall be ASTM A53, Schedule 40 steel pipe. Posts, rails, braces
and frames shall be hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A53, A123 or A153,
whichever is applicable. Galvanizing shall apply at least 2.0 ounces of zinc
per square foot of surface.
2. Line posts shall be 2-3/8-inch outside diameter pipe weighing 3.65 pounds
per foot. Corner and end posts shall be minimum 2-7/8-inch outside diameter
pipe weighing a minimum of 5.79 pounds per foot. Braces and top rails
where specified, shall be 1 5/8-inch outside diameter pipe weighing 2.27
pounds per foot.
3. Provide galvanized rampart.
4. End post at receiving end of gate leading edge shall have a catch bracket
both near the bottom and top to receive and stabilize the gate.
5. Truss Rods and Miscellaneous Fittings:
6. Truss rods shall be fabricated of 3/8-inch diameter steel rods and shall have
Division 2: Chain Link Fence and Gate Section 02445‐3
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
turnbuckles or similar means of adjustment. Extension arms for barbed wire
shall be steel or malleable iron. Fittings used shall be hot-dip galvanized iron
or steel with a minimum coating of at least 2.0 ounces of zinc per square foot
of surface in accordance with ASTM A123 or A153, whichever is
applicable.
F. Concrete:
1. Concrete for post foundations shall be Class C as specified in Section 03300.
G. Manually Operated Slide Gate:
1. The widths of any gates to be installed shall be indicated on the plans or the
special provisions.
2. The redwood slats on the gate shall be as shown on the Drawings. Slats shall
be attached to the gate frame by the use of bolts as indicated on the
Drawings.
3. The corners of gate frames shall be fastened together and reinforced with a
fitting, designed for that purpose, or by welding. All welds shall be ground
smooth.
4. The slide gate shall be supported by wheels that are suitable for use in non-
paved areas.
5. Slide gate shall be provided with a combination steel or malleable iron catch
and locking attachment of design approved by the Engineer.
H. The chain link fence Supplier shall design and provide the fence to meet the wind
load requirements due to addition of the plastic slats as described in Section 2.01B.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 FENCE
A. Line posts shall be provided as shown on the Drawings. The base top shall be at
least 1 inch above grade and sloped for drainage. Posts shall be set vertical, shall be
accurately aligned, and shall have their tops level or at a constant slope between
changes in grade. Tubular posts shall be fitted with extension arms for barbed wire,
post top to permit passage of top rail or rainproof malleable iron caps as applicable.
B. Corner and end posts shall be braced to the nearest line post. Corner and end posts
shall be diagonally braced. Line posts shall be braced horizontally and trussed in
both directions with truss rods at 1000-foot minimum intervals. Top rails, where
specified, shall be in lengths not less than 18 feet and shall be fitted with couplings
for connecting lengths into continuous runs. Couplings shall be not less than 6
inches long and allow for expansion and contraction of the rail.
C. Chain link fabric shall be taut and shall be attached to posts, rails, and wires with
galvanized fabric bands or tie wires at a maximum spacing of 12 inches on posts and
Division 2: Chain Link Fence and Gate Section 02445‐4
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
18 inches on the rails and tension wires. Stretcher bars shall be provided at ends of
fabric. The bottom tension wire shall be stretched tight and shall be located 2 inches
maximum above finished grade and on a straight grade between posts by excavating
the high points of ground, and in no case shall depressions be filled.
D. Unless otherwise specified, three strands of barbed wire attached to extension arms
shall be provided along the fence top. Extension arms shall overhang the outside of
the fence at a 45-degree angle. The topmost strand of barbed wire shall be 12 inches
above the top of the fabric.
E. Provide top rail.
F. CONTRACTOR shall provide additional fence posts as necessary to install gates.
G. Install chain link fence in accordance with ASTM F567.
H. Repair of Damaged Coating: Welds made after galvanizing shall be ground smooth,
then wire brushed to remove loose or burned zinc coating, after which the cleaned
areas shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Owner. Repairs to abraded or
otherwise damaged zinc coating shall be made in a similar manner.
END OF SECTION
DIVISION 3
CONCRETE
Division 3 - Concrete
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 3: Concrete Section 03100-1
SECTION 03100
CONCRETE WORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Concrete formwork.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
2. Section 03600 - Grout.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
1. 117 - Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Requirements:
1. Design concrete forms, falsework, and shoring in accordance with local,
state, and federal regulations.
2. Design forms and ties to withstand concrete pressures without bulging,
spreading, or lifting of forms.
B. Performance Requirements:
1. Construct forms so that finished concrete conforms to shapes, lines, grades,
and dimensions indicated on the Drawings.
2. It is intended that surface of concrete after stripping presents smooth, hard,
and dense finish that requires minimum amount of finishing.
3. Provide sufficient number of forms so that the work may be performed
rapidly and present uniform appearance in form patterns and finish.
4. Use forms that are clean and free from dirt, debris, concrete, and similar type
items. Coat with acceptable form release oil if required, prior to use or reuse.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of Formwork Manufacturers: Use only forming systems
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 3: Concrete Section 03100-2
manufactured by manufacturers having minimum 5 years experience, except as
otherwise specified.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Install work of this Section in accordance with local,
state, and federal regulations.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Requirements Due to Weather Condition:
1. Removal of Formwork: Do not remove forms from concrete which has been
placed when outside ambient air temperature is below 50 degrees Fahrenheit
until concrete has attained specified strength as determined by test cylinders
stored in field under equivalent conditions as concrete structure.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Form Ties:
1. General:
a. Provide form ties for forming system selected that are manufactured
by recognized manufacturer of concrete forming equipment. b. Do not use wire ties or wood spreaders of any form.
c. Provide ties of type that accurately tie, lock, and spread forms.
d. Provide form ties of such design that when forms are removed they
locate no metal or other material within 1-1/2 inches of the surface of
the concrete.
e. Do not allow holes in forms for ties to allow leakage during
placement of concrete. 2. ConSnap or Flat Bar Form Ties:
a. Cone-snap ties shall form a cone shaped depression in the concrete
with a minimum diameter of 1 inch at the surface of the concrete and
1-1/2 inches deep.
b. Provide neoprene waterseal washer which is located near the center
of the concrete. 3. Taper Ties:
a. Neoprene Plugs for Taper Tie Holes: Size so that after they are
driven, plugs are located in center third of wall thickeners. b. Drypack Mortar for Filling Taper Tie Holes:
1) Consist of mix of one part of Portland Cement to one part of
plaster sand.
2) Amount of water to be added to cement-sand mix is to be
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 3: Concrete Section 03100-3
such that mortar can be driven into holes and be properly
compacted. 3) Admixtures or additives: Are not to be used in drypack
mortar.
B. Built-Up Plywood Forms:
1. Built-up plywood forms may be substituted for prefabricated forming
system following minimum requirements:
a. Size and Material:
1) Full size 4 by 8 feet plywood sheets, except where smaller
pieces are able to cover entire area.
2) Sheet Construction: 5-ply plywood sheets, 3/4 inch nominal,
made with 100 percent waterproof adhesive, and having finish
surface that is coated or overlaid with surface which is
impervious to water and alkaline calcium and sodium
hydroxide of cement.
b. Wales: Minimum 2 by 4 inch lumber.
c. Studding And Wales: Contain no loose knots and be free of warps,
cups, and bows.
C. Steel or Steel Framed Forms:
1. Steel Forms: Provide forms that are:
a. Rigidly constructed and capable of being braced for minimum
deflection of finish surface.
b. Capable of providing finish surfaces that are flat without bows, cups,
or dents.
2. Steel Framed Plywood Forms:
a. Provide forms that are rigidly constructed and capable of being
braced.
b. Plywood Paneling: 5-ply, 5/8 inch nominal or 3/4 inch nominal, made
with 100 percent waterproof adhesive, and having finish surface that
is coated or overlaid with surface which is impervious to water and
alkaline calcium and sodium hydroxide of cement.
D. Incidentals:
1. External Angles:
a. Where not otherwise indicated on the Drawings, provide with 3/4
inch bevel, formed by utilizing true dimensioned wood or solid
plastic chamfer strip on walkways, slabs, walls, beams, columns, and
openings.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 3: Concrete Section 03100-4
b. Provide 1/4 inch bevel formed by utilizing true dimensioned wood or
solid plastic chamfer strip on walkways, walls, and slabs at
expansion, contraction, and construction joints.
2. Keyways: Steel, plastic, or lumber treated with form coating, applied
according to label directions.
3. Inserts: Dovetail Anchors or Ties.
4. Pipe Sleeves: Refer to Drawings for type, location, and sizes. All sleeves
shall be made of cast iron, unless noted otherwise.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions:
1. Do not place any concrete until all forms have been thoroughly checked for
alignment, level, strength, and to assure accurate location of all mechanical
and electrical inserts or other embedded items.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Forms and Accessories:
1. Vertical Forms:
a. Remain in place minimum of 24 hours after concrete is placed.
b. If, after 24 hours, concrete has sufficient strength and hardness to
resist surface or other damage, forms may be removed.
2. Other Forms Supporting Concrete And Shoring: Remain in place as follows:
a. Sides of Footings: 24 hours minimum.
b. Vertical Sides of Beams, Girders, And Similar Members: 48 hours
minimum.
c. Slabs, Beams, and Girders: Until concrete strength reaches specified
strength or until shoring is installed.
d. Shoring for Slabs, Beams, and Girders: Shore until concrete strength
reaches specified strength.
e. Wall Bracing: Until concrete strength of beams and slabs laterally
supporting wall reaches specified strength.
B. Form Ties:
1. Cone-Snap Rod and Bar Ties: Tie forms together at not more than 2 foot
centers vertically and horizontally. After forms are removed from wall, fill
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 3: Concrete Section 03100-5
tie holes as follows:
a. Remove form ties from surfaces.
b. Roughen cone shaped tie holes by heavy sandblasting before repair.
c. Dry pack cone shaped tie holes with drypack mortar as specified in
Section 03600.
2. Taper Ties:
a. Neoprene Plug in Taper Tie Holes: After forms and taper ties are
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 3: Concrete Section 03100-6
removed from wall, plug tie holes with neoprene plug as follows:
1) Heavy sandblast and then clean tie holes.
2) After cleaning, drive neoprene plug into each of taper tie
holes with steel rod. Final location of neoprene plug shall be
in center third of wall thickness. Bond neoprene plug to
concrete with epoxy.
3) Locate steel rod in cylindrical recess, made in plug, during
driving:
a) At no time are plugs to be driven on flat area outside
cylindrical recess.
b. Dry Pack of Taper Tie Holes: After installing plugs in tie holes:
1) Coat tie hole surface with epoxy bonding agent and fill with
drypack mortar as specified in Section 03600. a) Drypack Mortar: Place in holes in layers with
thickness no exceeding tie hole diameter and heavily
compact each layer. b) Drypack the outside of the hole no sooner than 7 days
after the inside of the hole has been dry packed.
c) Wall surfaces in area of drypacked tie holes: On the water side of water containing structures and the
outside of below grade walls: (1) Cover with minimum of 10 mils of epoxy gel.
(2) Provide epoxy gel coating on wall surfaces
that extend minimum of 2 inches past drypack mortar filled tie holes.
(3) Provide finish surfaces that are free from sand
streaks or other voids. 3. For water retaining structures, use taper ties. No other type of tie will be
allowed.
C. Built-Up Plywood Forms: 1. Studding:
a. Spaced at 16 inches or 24 inches on center.
b. Closer spacing may be required depending upon strength requirements of the forms, in order to prevent any bulging surfaces on
faces of finished concrete work. c. Install studs perpendicular to grain of exterior plys of plywood sheets.
2. Wales: Form wales of double lumber material minimum size as specified in this Section.
3. Number of Form Reuses: Depends upon durability of surface coating of
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 3: Concrete Section 03100-7
overlay used, and ability to maintain forms in condition such that they are
capable of producing flat, smooth, hard, dense finish on concrete when
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 3: Concrete Section 03100-8
stripped.
D. Steel or Steel Framed Forms: 1. Steel Forms:
a. Adequately brace forms for minimum deflection of finish surface. 2. Steel Framed Plywood Forms:
a. Rigidly construct and brace with joints fitting closely and smoothly.
b. Number of Form Reuses: Depends upon durability of surface coating or overlay used.
3. Built-Up Plywood Forms: As specified in this Section may be used in
conjunction with steel forms or steel framed plywood forms for special forming conditions such as corbels and forming around items which will
project through forms.
E. Bracing and Alignment of Forms:
1. Line and Grade: Limit deviations to tolerances which will permit proper installation of structural embedded items or mechanical and electrical
equipment and piping.
2. Formwork:
a. Securely brace, support, tie down, or otherwise hold in place to
prevent any movement.
b. Make adequate provisions for uplift pressure, lateral pressure on
forms, and defection of forms.
3. When Second Lift is Placed on Hardened Concrete: Take special precautions
in formwork at top of old lift and bottom of new lift to prevent:
a. Spreading and vertical or horizontal displacement of forms.
b. Grout “bleeding” on finish concrete surfaces.
4. Pipe Stubs, Anchor Bolts, and Other Embedded Items: Set in forms where
required.
5. Cracks, Openings, or Offsets At Joints in Formwork: Close those that are
1/16 inch or larger by tightening forms of by filling with acceptable crack
filler.
F. Incidentals:
1. Keyways: Construct keyways as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Reentrant Angles: May be left square.
3. Level Strips: Install level strips at top of wall concrete placements to maintain
true line at horizontal construction joints.
4. Inserts:
a. Encase pipes, anchor bolts, steps, reglets, castings, and other inserts,
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 3: Concrete Section 03100-9
as indicated on the Drawings or as required, in concrete.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 3: Concrete Section 03100-10
b. Use dovetail anchors or ties in conjunction with slots or inserts for
various materials as specified under other sections of these
Specifications and as may be necessary for required work.
G. Pipe and Conduit:
1. Install pipe and conduit in structures as indicated on the Drawings, and seal
with materials as specified in Section 07900, unless otherwise specified.
H. Tolerances:
1. Finish concrete shall conform to shapes, lines, grades, and dimensions
indicated on the Drawings.
2. The maximum deviation from true line and grade shall not exceed tolerances
listed below at time of acceptance of project.
3. General: Comply with ACI 117, paragraphs 2.0 through 2.2 and paragraphs
4.0 through 4.5, except as modified in following:
a. Slabs:
1) Slope: Uniformly sloped to drain when slope is indicated on
the Drawings.
2) Slabs Indicated to be Level: Have maximum deviation of 1/8
inch in 10 feet without any apparent changes in grade.
b. Inserts: Set inserts to tolerances require for proper installation and
operation of equipment or systems to which insert pertains.
c. Maximum Tolerances: As follows:
Item Inches
Sleeves and Inserts Plus 1/8 Minus 1/8
Projected Ends of Anchor
Bolts
Plus 1/4 Minus 0.0
Anchor Bolt Setting Plus 1/16 Minus 1/16
END OF SECTION
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 4: Concrete Section 03200-1
SECTION 03200
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Concrete reinforcement.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork.
2. Section 03300 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
1. SP-66-ACI - Detailing Manual.
2. 315 - Details and Details of Concrete Reinforcement.
3. 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. A 143 - Standard Practice for Safeguarding Against Embrittlement of Hot-
Dip Galvanized Structural Steel Products and Procedure, for Detecting
Embrittlement.
2. A 185 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire, Fabric, Plain, for
Concrete Reinforcement.
3. A615 - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for
Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars.
4. A 767 - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement.
5. ASTM E8 - Standard Test Methods for Tensile Testing of Metalic Materials.
6. ASTM A 706 - Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and
Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
C. American Welding Society (AWS):
1. D1.4 - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The Drawings contain general notes concerning amount of reinforcement and
placing, details for reinforcement at wall corners and intersections, and details of
extra reinforcement around openings in concrete.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 4: Concrete Section 03200-2
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Shop Drawings on Reinforcing Steel:
a. Submit to the ENGINEER reinforcing steel detail drawings in
accordance with Contract Documents.
b. Changes to Reinforcing Steel Contract Drawing Requirements:
1) Indicate in separate letter submitted with shop drawings any
changes of requirements indicated on the drawings for
reinforcing steel.
2) Such changes will not be acceptable unless the ENGINEER
has accepted such changes in writing.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packing And Shipping:
1. Deliver bars bundled and tagged with identifying tags.
B. Acceptance At Site:
1. Reinforcing Bars: Deliver reinforcing bars accompanied by manufacturer’s
guarantee of grade.
C. Storage:
1. All rebar shall be stored on dunnage.
1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Bar Supports: Do not place concrete until samples and attached data of bar supports
has been accepted by the ENGINEER.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Reinforcement:
1. General: Provide reinforcing steel that is new material, of quality specified,
free from excessive rust or scale or any defects affecting its usefulness.
B. Reinforcing Bars:
1. Reinforcing Bars to be Embedded in Concrete or Masonry: Grade 60
deformed bars conforming to ASTM A 615 except as specified in the next
subparagraph.
2. Reinforcement resisting earthquake-induced flexural and axial forces in
concrete frame members and in concrete wall boundary members shall
comply with low alloy ASTM A 706. ASTM A 615 Grade 60 reinforcement
may be used in these members if the following requirements are met:
a. The actual yield strength based on mill tests does not exceed the
specified yield strength by more than 18,000 pounds per square inch
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 4: Concrete Section 03200-3
(retest shall not exceed this value by more than an additional 3,000
pounds per square inch).
b. The ratio of the actual ultimate tensile stress to the actual tensile yield
strength is not less than 1.25. 3. Hot-Dip Galvanized Reinforcing Bars:
a. When reinforcing bars are indicated on the Drawings to be hot-dip
galvanized, perform such galvanizing in accordance with ASTM A
767 and ATM A 143.
b. Galvanizing: Galvanize bars in conformance with Class 1 coating and
perform galvanizing after fabrication and shearing.
4. Thread Bars:
a. Provide thread bars having continuous rolled-in patter of thread-like
deformations along entire length.
b. Provide hex nuts and couplers for the thread bars that develop 125
percent of yield strength of bar.
c. Thread Bars:
1) Conform to ASTM A 615 Grade 60.
d. Do not substitute cut threads on regular reinforcing bars for thread
bars.
C. Bar Supports:
1. Reinforcement Support Chairs:
a. Hot-dip galvanized steel. Provide hot-dip galvanized steel with plastic
tips at surfaces which will be exposed to view. Use unless otherwise
indicated on the Drawings.
b. Stainless Steel where indicated on the Drawings.
c. Provide concrete adobe blocks to support rebar associated with
building foundation slabs.
d. Other suitable material approved by ENGINEER.
D. Tie Wires: Annealed Steel.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Shop Assembly:
1. Cut and bend bars in accordance with provisions of ACI 315 and ACI 318.
2. Bend bars cold.
3. Provide bars free from defects and kinks and from bends not indicated on the
Drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
EXAMINATION
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 4: Concrete Section 03200-4
A. Verification of Conditions:
1. Reinforcing Bars:
a. Verify that bars are new stock free from rust scale, loose mill scale,
excessive rust, dirt, oil, and other coatings which adversely affect
bonding capacity when placed in the work.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation:
1. Reinforcing Bars: Thin coating of red rust resulting from short exposure will
not be considered objectionable. Thoroughly clean any bars having rust
scale, lose mill scale, or thick rust coat.
2. Cleaning of Reinforcement Materials: Remove concrete of other deleterious
coatings from dowels and other projecting bars by wire brushing or
sandblasting before bars are embedded in subsequent concrete placement.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Reinforcing Bars:
1. No field bending of bars will be allowed on bars larger than #4.
2. Welding:
a. Weld reinforcing bars where indicted on the Drawings or acceptable
to the ENGINEER.
b. Perform welding in accordance with AWS D1.4.
B. Placing Reinforcing Bars:
1. Accurately place bars and adequately secure them in position.
2. Overlap bars at splices as specified or indicated on the Drawings.
3. Unless specifically otherwise indicated on the Drawings, install bars at lap
splices in contact with each other and fasten bars together with tie wire.
4. If lap splice length for bars in concrete is not specified or indicated on the
Drawings, bars shall be lap spliced in accordance with ACI 318.
5. Bar Supports:
a. Provide in sufficient number to prevent sagging and to support loads
during construction, but in no case less than quantities and at
locations as indicated in ACI 315.
b. Support reinforcing for concrete places on ground by standard
manufactured chairs, with steel plates for resting on ground.
c. Do not use brick, broken concrete masonry units, spalls, rocks, or
similar material for supporting reinforcing steel.
6. If not indicated on the Drawings, provide protective concrete cover in
accordance with ACI 318.
C. Tying of Bar Reinforcement:
1. Fasten bars securely in place with wire ties.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 4: Concrete Section 03200-5
2. Tie bars sufficiently often to prevent shifting.
3. There shall be at least 3 ties in each bar length (does not apply to dowel lap
splices or to bars shorter than 4 feet, unless necessary for rigidity).
4. Tie slab bars at every intersection around periphery of slab.
5. Tie wall bar and slab bar intersections other than around periphery at not less
than every fourth intersection, but at not greater than following maximum
spacing:
Bar Size Slab Bars Spacing
(Inches)
Wall Bars Spacing
(Inches)
Bars Number 5 and Smaller 60 48
Bars Number 6 through Number 9 96 60
Bars Number 10 and Number 11 120 96
6. After tying wire ties, bend ends of wire ties in towards the center of the
concrete section. Wire ties shall conform to the cover requirements of the
reinforcing bars.
7. Above tying requirements do not apply to reinforcement for masonry. Refer
to Division 4 for tying requirements for masonry.
D. Lap Splices of Reinforcing Bars:
1. Where bars are to be lapped spliced at joints in concrete, ensure bars project
from concrete first placed, minimum length equal to lap splice length
indicated on the Drawings.
2. Where lap splice length is not indicated on the Drawings, then provide lap
splice length as specified in ACI 318 and this Division.
E. Welded Wire Fabric Reinforcement:
1. Install necessary wiring, spacing chairs, or supports to keep welded wire
fabric in place while concrete is being placed.
2. Bend fabric as indicated on the Drawings or required to fit work.
3. Unroll or otherwise straighten fabric to make perfectly flat sheet before
placing in the Work.
4. Lap splice welded wire fabric as indicated on the Drawings.
5. If lap splice length is not shown on the Drawings, splice fabric in accordance
with ACI 318.
END OF SECTION
Division 3: Concrete Section 03300-1
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
SECTION 03300
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Cast-in-place concrete.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 03100 - Concrete Formwork. 2. Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement.
3. Section 03301 - Epoxies.
4. Section 03356 - Tooled Concrete Finishes.
5. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
2. Manuals of Concrete Practice.
3. Recommended Practices.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. C 31 - Test Methods for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the
Field. 2. C 33 - Specifications for Concrete Aggregates.
3. C 39 - Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens. 4. C 40 - Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete.
5. C 42 - Method of Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of
Concrete.
6. C 88 - Test Method of Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate
or Magnesium Sulfate. 7. C 94 - Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. 8. C 114 - Test Methods for Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic Cement.
9. C 117 - Standard Test for Materials Finer Than 75ìm (No. 200) Sieve in
Mineral Aggregate. 10. C 123 - Standard Test Method for Light Weight Particles in Aggregate.
11. C 131 - Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse
Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine. 12. C 136 - Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.
13. C 142 - Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in
Division 3: Concrete Section 03300-2
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Aggregate.
14. C 143 - Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete.
15. C 150 - Specification for Portland Cement.
16. C 157 - Test Method for Length Change of Hardened Hydraulic Cement
Mortar and Concrete. 17. C 172 - Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete.
18. C 173 - Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Volumetric Method.
19. C 203 - Test Methods for Breaking Load and Flexural Properties of Block-
Type Thermal Insulation. 20. C 227 - Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Cement-Aggregate
Combinations (Mortar-Bar Method).
21. C 260 - Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete.
22. C 289 - Test Method for Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of Aggregates
(Chemical Method). 23. C 295 - Standard Guide for Petrographic Examination of Aggregate for
Concrete.
24. C 309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds
for Curing Concrete. 25. C 311 - Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Fly Ash or Natural
Pozzolans for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete.
26. C 469 - Test Method for Static Modulus of Elasticity and Poisson’s Ratio of
Concrete in Compression. 27. C 494 - Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
28. C 595 - Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements.
29. C 618 - Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural
Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete. 30. D 75 - Practices for Sampling Aggregates.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Alkali: Is defined to mean sum of sodium oxide and potassium oxide calculated as
sodium oxide.
B. Hairline Crack: Crack with a crack width of less than 4 thousandths of an inch.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements: 1. General:
a. Except as otherwise specified, provide concrete composed of portland
cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, and water so proportioned and mixed as to produce plastic, workable mixture in accordance with
requirements as specified in this Section and suitable to specific conditions of placement.
Division 3: Concrete Section 03300-3
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
b. Proportion materials in manner such as to secure lowest water-cement
ratio which is consistent with good workability, plastic, cohesive mixture, and one which is within specified slump range.
c. Proportion fine and coarse aggregate in manner such as not to
produce harshness in placing nor honeycombing in structures. 2. Watertightness of Concrete Work: It is intent of this Section to secure for
every part of the Work, concrete and grout of homogeneous structure, which
when hardened will have required strength, watertightness, and durability.
a. It is recognized that some surface hairline cracks and crazing will
develop in the concrete surfaces. b. Construction, contraction, and expansion joints have been positioned
in structures as indicated on the Drawings, and curing methods specified, for purpose of reducing number and size of these expected
cracks, due to normal expansion and contraction expected from specified concrete mixes.
c. Class A and Class B Concrete: Watertight. Repair cracks which develop in walls or slabs and repair cracks which show any signs of
leakage until all leakage is stopped.
d. Pressure inject visible cracks, other than hairline cracks and crazing, in following areas with epoxy injection system:
1) Floors and walls of water bearing structures. 2) Walls and slabs which are exposed to weather or may be
washed down and are not specified to receive separate
waterproof membrane. 3) Epoxy used for Injection: Provide epoxy materials that are
new and use them within shelf life limitations set forth by
manufacturer. Water-insensitive 2 part type low viscosity epoxy adhesive material containing 100 percent solids and
meeting or exceeding the following characteristics when tested in accordance with standards specified Manufacturer:
a) Master Builders, Inc., Concressive Standard LVI. b) Sika Chemical Corp.’s, Sikadur 35, Hi-Mod LV.
e. Walls or Slabs, as Specified Above, That Leak or Sweat Because of
porosity or Cracks too Small for Successful Pressure Grouting: Seal
on water or weather side by coatings of surface sealant system, as specified in this Section.
f. Grouting and Sealing: Continue as specified above until structure is watertight and remains watertight for not less than one year after final
acceptance or date of final repair, whichever occurs later in time.
3. Workmanship and Methods: Provide concrete work, including detailing of reinforcing, conforming with best standard practices and as set forth in ACI
318, Manuals, and Recommended Practices.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit data completely describing products.
Division 3: Concrete Section 03300-4
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
B. Information on Heating Equipment to be Used for Cold Weather Concreting: Submit information on type of equipment to be used for heating materials and/or new
concrete in process of curing during excessively cold weather.
C. For Conditions that Promote Rapid Drying of Freshly Placed Concrete Such as Low Humidity, High Temperature, and Wind: Submit corrective measures proposed for
use prior to placing concrete.
D. Copies of Tests of Concrete Aggregates: Submit certified copies in triplicate of
commercial laboratory tests of all samples concrete aggregates. 1. On tests of concrete aggregates, indicate as minimum all specified tests.
E. Concrete Mixes: Prior to placement of concrete, submit full details, including mix
design calculations for concrete mixes proposed for use for each class of concrete. 1. Include information on correction of batching for varying moisture contents
fo fine aggregate.
2. Submit source quality test records with mix design submittal.
F. If there is Change in Aggregate Source, or Aggregate Quality from Same Source:
Submit new set of design mixes covering each class of concrete.
G. Batch Test Data (from supplier): 1. Submit data for each test cylinder.
2. Submit data that identifies mix and slump for each test cylinder.
H. Repair of defective concrete: Submit mix design for grout.
I. Acceptance of Method of Concrete Repair: Do not make any repairs until the ENGINEER has accepted method of preparing surfaces and proposed method of
repair.
J. Quality Control Submittals:
1. Certificates of Compliance: a) Cement: Submit certified copy of mill tests, including alkali content,
representative of each shipment of cement for verification of
compliance with specified requirements.
b) Pozzolan:
1) Submit certificates by Pozzolan supplier.
2) Submit certificates that identify source of pozzolan and
certify compliance with requirements of ASTM C 618.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packing And Shipping:
Division 3: Concrete Section 03300-5
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
1. Deliver, store, and handle concrete materials in manner as to prevent damage
and inclusion of foreign substances. 2. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers until ready for
use.
3. Deliver aggregate to mixing site and handle in such manner that variations in moisture content will not interfere with steady production of concrete of
specified degree of uniformity and slump.
B. Acceptance at Site: Reject material containers or materials showing evidence of
water or other damage.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements:
1. Hot Weather Conditions: a. When Ambient Air Temperature is Above 90 Degrees Fahrenheit:
Prior to placing concrete, cool forms and reinforcing steel by water cooling to below 90 degrees Fahrenheit.
b. Temperature of Concrete Mix at Time of Placement: Keep
temperature below 90 degrees Fahrenheit by methods which do not impair quality of concrete.
2. Cold Weather Conditions: a. Concrete Placed Below Ambient Air Temperature of 45 degrees
Fahrenheit and falling or below 40 degrees Fahrenheit: Make provision for heating water.
b. If Material Have Been Exposed to Freezing Temperatures to Degree
That Any Material is Below 35 degrees Fahrenheit: Heat such materials.
c. Heating Water, Cement, or Aggregate Materials: 1) Do not heat in excess of 160 degrees Fahrenheit.
d. Protection of Concrete in Forms:
1) Protect by means of covering with tarpaulins, or other
acceptable covering. 2) Provide means for circulating warm moist air around forms in
manner to maintain temperature of 50 degrees Fahrenheit for at least 5 days.
3. For Conditions That Promote Rapid Drying of Freshly Placed Concrete Such
As Low Humidity, High Temperature, and Wind: Take corrective measures to minimize rapid water loss from concrete:
a. Furnish and use sufficient number of maximum and minimum self- recording thermometers to adequately measure temperature around
concrete.
1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Schedule placing of concrete in such manner as to complete any single placing
operation to construction, contraction, or expansion joint.
Division 3: Concrete Section 03300-6
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Aggregate:
1. General:Provide concrete aggregates that are sound, uniformly graded, and
free of deleterious material in excess of allowable amounts specified. a. Grade aggregate in accordance with ASTM D 75 and C 136.
b. Provide unit weight of fine and coarse aggregate which produces in
place concrete with weight of not less than 140 pounds per cubic foot.
B. Fine Aggregate:
1. Provide fine aggregate for concrete or mortar consisting of clean, natural sand
or of sand prepared from crushed stone or crushed gravel. 2. Do not provide aggregate having deleterious substances in excess of
following percentages by weight of contaminating substances. In no case
shall total exceed percent listed.
Item Test Method Percent
Removed by decantation (dirt, silt, etc.) ASTM C 117 3
Shale or Chert ASTM C 295 1
Clay Lumps ASTM C 142 1
3. Except as otherwise specified, grade fine aggregate from coarse to fine in
accordance with requirements of ASTM C 33.
C. Coarse Aggregate: 1. General: Provide coarse aggregate consisting of gravel or crushed stone made
up of clean, hard, durable particles free from calcareous coatings, organic
matter, or other foreign substances.
2. Weight: Not exceeding 15 percent, for thin or elongated pieces having length
greater than 5 times average thickness. 3. Deleterious Substances: Not in excess of following percentages by weight,
and in no case having total of all deleterious substances exceeding 2 percent.
Item Test Method Percent
Shale or chert ASTM C 295 1
Coal and Lignite ASTM C 123 1/4
Division 3: Concrete Section 03300-7
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Clay lumps and friable
particles
ASTM C 142 1/4
Materials finer than
Number 200 sieve
ASTM C 117 ½*
* Except when material finer than Number 200 sieve consists of
crusher dust, maximum amount shall be 1 percent.
4. Grading:
a. Aggregate: As specified in ASTM C 33, Size Number 57, except as
otherwise specified or authorized in writing by the ENGINEER. b. Aggregate for Class CE Concrete for Encasement of Electrical
Conduits:
1) Graded as specified in ASTM C 33, Size Number 8.
2) Provide concrete utilizing this aggregate equal to Class C
concrete in all other respects, and is designated as Class CE. D. Portland Cement:
1. General: Conform to specifications and tests for ASTM C 150, Types II or
III, Low Alkali, except as specified otherwise.
2. Low Alkali Portland: Have total alkali containing not more than 0.60 percent.
3. Exposed Concrete in Any Individual Structure: Use only one brand of
Portland cement. 4. Cement For Finishes: Provide cement from same source and of same type as
concrete to be finished.
E. Portland-Pozzolan Cement: 1. General: Conform to requirements of ASTM C 595, Type IP (MS).
2. Portland Cement Clinker Used In Manufacture of Portland-Pozzolan Cement: Type II low alkali as specified in Paragraph 2.01D.
3. Pozzolan Content of Portland-Pozzolan Cement: Not exceed 15 percent by
weight.
4. Exposed Concrete in Any Individual Structure: Use only one brand of portland-pozzolan cement.
F. Admixtures: 1. General:
a. Do not use admixtures of any type, except as specified, unless written
authorization has been obtained from the ENGINEER. b. Compatible with concrete and other admixtures.
c. Do not use admixtures containing chlorides calculated as chloride ion in excess of 5% by weight.
d. Use in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations accordance
with manufacture’s recommendations and add each admixture to concrete mix separately.
e. A single manufacturer shall provide all concrete admixtures.
Division 3: Concrete Section 03300-8
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
2. Air Entraining Admixture:
a. Provide all concrete with 5 percent, plus or minus 1 percent, entrained
air of evenly dispersed air bubbles at time of placement. b. Conform to ASTM C 260.
3. Fly Ash Pozzolan Admixture: a. Pozzolan:
1) Ad mixture shall conform to requirements of ASTM C618,
Class F in concrete made with Type II portland cement.
2) Pozzolan may replace portland cement at ratio of 1.0 pound
fly ash for each pound of portland cement replaced. 3) Maximum of 20 percent by weight of minimum quantities of
portland cement listed in Table A under paragraph 2.03E may
be replaced with pozzolan.
4) Do not use pozzolan as an admixture in concrete made with
portland-pozzolan cement.
b. Loss on Ignition for Pozzolan: Not exceed four percent. 4. Water Reducing Admixture:
a. May be used at the CONTRACTOR’s option in all areas.
b. Conform to ASTM C 494, Type A or Type D.
c. Not contain air entraining agents. d. Liquid form before adding to the concrete mix.
e. No decrease in cement is permitted as result of use of water reducing
admixture. 5. Superplasticizers: Are not to be used without acceptance by ENGINEER.
G. Water: 1. Water for Concrete, Washing Aggregate, and Curing Concrete: Clean and
free from oil and deleterious amounts alkali, acid, organic matter, or other
substances.
2. Chlorides and Sulfate Ions: a. Water for Conventional Reinforced Concrete: Use water not
containing more than 1,000 milligrams per liter of chlorides
calculated as chloride ion, nor more than 1,000 milligrams per liter of sulfates calculated as sulfate ion.
H. Nonslip Abrasive: 1. Type: Aluminum oxide abrasive of size 8/16, having structure of hard
aggregate, homogenous, nonglazing, rustproof, and unaffected by freezing, moisture, or cleaning compounds.
2. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Exolon Company, Tonawanda, New York.
b. Abrasive Materials, Incorporated, Hillsdale, Michigan.
I. Concrete Sealer: 1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
Division 3: Concrete Section 03300-9
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
a. Hillyard Chemical Company, St. Joseph, Missouri, SEAL 341.
b. A. C. Horn, Inc., Horn Clear Seal EM-180.
J. Conduit Encasement Coloring Agent:
1. Color: Red color concrete used for encasement of electrical ducts, conduits,
similar type items. 2. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal.
a. Frank D. Davis Company, Red Oxide Number 1117.
b. I. Reiss Company, Inc., equivalent product.
K. Keyway Material: Steel, plastic, or lumber.
L. Sprayed Membrane Curing Compound: Clear type with fugitive dye conforming to
ASTM C 309, Type 1D, unless noted otherwise. After curing, and if subsequent
coatings or toppings are specified, the curing compound shall be removed per
manufacturer’s recommendations.
M. Surface Sealant System: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Radcon Laboratories, Inc., Las Vegas, Nevada, Formula Number 7.
2. IPA Systems, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, Duripal.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A. Mixing Concrete: 1. Mixers may be of stationary plant, paver, or truck mixer type.
2. Provide adequate equipment and facilities for accurate measurement and control of materials and for readily changing proportions of material.
3. Mixing Equipment: a. Capable of combining aggregates, cement, and water within specified
time into thoroughly mixed and uniform mass and of discharging mixture without segregation.
b. Maintain concrete mixing plant and equipment in good working order and operated at loads, speeds, and timing recommended by
manufacturer or as specified.
c. Proportion cement and aggregate by weight.
B. Machine Mixing:
1. Batch plant shall be capable of controlling delivery of all material to mixer
within 1 percent by weight of individual material. 2. If bulk cement is used, weigh it on separate visible scale which will
accurately register scale load at any stage of weighing operation from zero to
full capacity.
3. Prevent cement from coming into contact with aggregate or with water until
materials are in mixer ready for complete mixing with all mixing water. 4. Procedure of mixing cement with sand or with sand and coarse aggregate for
Division 3: Concrete Section 03300-10
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
delivery to project site, for final mixing and addition of mixing water will not be permitted.
5. Retempering of concrete will not be permitted.
6. Discharge entire batch before recharging.
7. Volume of Mixed Material Per Batch: Not exceed manufacturer’s rated
capacity of mixer.
8. Mixers:
a. Perform mixing in batch mixers of acceptable type.
b. Equip each mixer with device for accurately measuring and indicating
quantity of water entering concrete, and operating mechanism such
that leakage will not occur when valves are closed.
c. Equip each mixer with device for automatically measuring,
indicating, and controlling time required for mixing. d. Interlock device to prevent discharge of concrete from mixer before
expiration of mixing period. ransit-Mixed Concrete:
9. Mix and deliver in accordance with ASTM C 94. 10. Total Elapsed Time Between Addition of Water at Batch Plant and
Discharging Completed Mix: Not to exceed 90 minutes of elapsed time. At
project site shall not exceed 30 minutes.
11. Under conditions contributing to quick setting, total elapsed time permitted
may be reduced by the ENGINEER. 12. Equip Each truck mixer with device interlocked so as to prevent discharge of
concrete from drum before required number of turns and furnish such device that is capable of counting number of revolutions of drum.
13. Continuously revolve drum after it is once started until it has completely
discharged its batch: a. Do not admit water until drum has started revolving. b. Right is reserved to increase required minimum number of
revolutions or to decrease designated maximum number of
revolutions allowed, if necessary, to obtain satisfactory mixing. The Contractor will not be entitled to additional compensation because of
such increase or decrease.
C. Other Types of Mixers: 1. In case of other types of mixers, mixing shall be as follows:
a. Mix concrete until there is uniform distribution of materials, and
discharge mixer completely before recharging.
b. Neither speed nor volume loading of mixer shall exceed
manufacturer’s recommendations. c. Continue mixing for minimum of 1-1/2 minutes after all materials are
in drum, and for batches larger than one cubic yard increase minimum time 15 seconds for each additional cubic yard or fraction thereof.
2.3 MIXES
Division 3: Concrete Section 03300-11
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
A. Measurements of Materials:
1. Measure materials by weighing, except as otherwise specified or where other
methods are specifically authorized in writing by the ENGINEER. 2. Furnish apparatus for weighing aggregates and cement that is suitably
designed and constructed for this purpose.
3. Accuracy of Weighing Devices: Furnish devices that have capability of
Division 3: Concrete Section 03300-12
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
providing successive quantities of individual material that can be measured
to within on percent of desired amount of that material. 4. Measuring or Weighing Devices: Subject to review by the OWNER, and bear
valid seal of the Sealer of Weights and Measures having jurisdiction.
5. Weighing Cement: a. Weigh cement separately.
b. Cement in Unbroken Standard Packages (Sacks): Need not be
weighed. c. Bulk Cement and Fractional Packages: Weigh such cement.
6. Mixing Water: Measured by volume or by weight.
B. Concrete Proportions and Consistency:
1. Concrete Consistency and Composition: a. Provide concrete that can be worked readily into corners and angles
of forms and around reinforcement without excessive vibration and without permitting materials to segregate or free water to collect on
surface.
b. Prevent unnecessaryor haphazard changes in consistencyof concrete.
2. Ratio of Coarse Aggregate to Fine Aggregate: Not less than 1.0 nor more than 2.0 for all concrete Classes, with exception of Class CE.
3. Aggregate: a. Obtain aggregate from source which is capable of providing uniform
quality, moisture content, and grading during any single day’s operation.
4. Concrete Mix Water to Cement Ratio, Minimum Cement Content, and Slump Range: Conform to values specified in Table A in this Section unless
otherwise specified.
5. Concrete Batch Weights: Control and adjust so as to secure maximum yield,
and at all times maintain proportions of concrete mix within specified limits. 6. Mixture Modification: If required, by the OWNER, modify mixture within
limits set forth in this Section.
C. Concrete Mixes:
1. Proportioning of Concrete Mix: Proportion mixes with required average compressive strength (f’ cr) as defined in Subparagraph 2.04A.
2. Mixes: a. Adjusting of Water: After acceptance, do not change mixes without
acceptance by ENGINEER, except that at all times adjust batching of water to compensate for free moisture content of fine aggregate.
b. Total Water Content of Each Concrete Class: Not exceed those specified in Table A in this Section.
c. Checking Moisture Content of Fine Aggregate: Furnish satisfactory means at batching plant for checking moisture content of fine
aggregate.
3. Change in Mixes:
a. Undertake new trial batch and test program as specified in this
Division 3: Concrete Section 03300-13
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Section.
b. Each New Trial Batch and Test Program: Cost of such trail batches
and test program shall be borne by CONTRACTOR.
D. Hand Mixed Concrete:
1. Perform hand mixing of concrete only when requested by the
CONTRACTOR in writing and accepted by the OWNER.
2. Prepare hand mixed concrete on watertight, level platform in batches not to
exceed 1/3 cubic yard each. 3. Aggregate:
a. First spread required amount of coarse aggregate on platform in an
even and uniform layer, and then over such aggregate spread proper proportion of fine aggregate.
b. Combined Depth of Both Such Layers: Not be greater than one foot.
4. Cement: a. First evenly spread required quantity of cement over fine aggregate.
b. Then turn entire batch with shovels at least twice before adding water.
5. Water:
a. Then uniformly sprinkle or spray proper amount of water over
batched materials. b. Then turn with shovels not less than three times before being
removing from platform.
E. Classes of Concrete: 1. Provide concrete consisting of six classes, referred herein as Classes A, AAA,
B, C, D and CE specified in this Section and use where specified or indicated
on the Drawings.
2. Weight of Concrete Classes: Provide classes of concrete having minimum
weight of 140 pounds per cubic foot. 3. Class B Concrete: Class B concrete may be substituted for Class A concrete,
if high-early strength concrete is desired by the CONTRACTOR, only in those areas specifically accepted by ENGINEER and which do not require
sulfate resistant concrete.
4. Class C Concrete: Class C concrete may be used for fill for unauthorized excavation, for thrust blocks and ground anchors for piping, for bedding of
pipe, and where indicated on the Drawings.
5. Class D Concrete: Use Class D for precast concrete items.
6. Class CE Concrete: Use Class CE for electrical conduit encasements.
7. All other concrete, unless specified or otherwise indicated on the Drawings:
Use Class A concrete.
TABLE A - CONCRETE
Class 8.Specified Compressive
Strength f’c at 28 Days (Pounds per
Square Inch)
Maximum Net
Water to
Cement Ratio
Minimum Cement
per Cubic Yard
of Concrete by
Weight (Pounds)
Slump
Range
(Inches)
Division 3: Concrete Section 03300-14
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
A 4,000 0.53 564 2 to 4*
AAA 3,000 0.57 470 2 to 4*
B
(Type III cement)
4,000 0.53 564 2 to 4*
C 2,500 0.71 423 3 to 6
D 4,500 0.45 658 2 to 4
CE 2,500 0.71 423 3 to 6
* NOTE: Slump for slabs, decks, walks, and beams shall be not more than 3-1/2 inches.
8. Pumped Concrete: Provide pumped concrete that complies with all
requirements of this Section.
9. Do not place concrete with slump outside limits indicated in Table A. 10. Classes:
a. Classes A, C, D, and CE Concrete: Make with Type II low alkali cement.
b. Class B Concrete: Make with Type III low alkali cement.
c. Admixtures: Provide admixtures as specified in this Section.
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests: 1. Concrete Mixes:
a. After acceptance of concrete mixes, have trial batches of the accepted proposed concrete mix designs prepared by testing laboratory
acceptable to the ENGINEER.
b. Prepare trial batches by using specified cement and aggregates
proposed to be used for the Work. c. Trial Batches: Provide batches of sufficient quantity to determine
slump, workability, consistency and finishing characteristics, and to provide sufficient test cylinders.
d. Test Cylinders: Provide cylinders having six inch diameter by 12 inch length and that are prepared in accordance with ASTM C 31 for tests
specified in this Section.
e. Determine slump in accordance with ASTM C 143. f. Test Cylinders:
1) Test 4 cylinders for compressive strength in accordance with
ASTM C 39: a) Test 1 cylinder at 7 days and 2 at 28 days. b) Establish ratio between 7 day and 28 day strength for
mix. Seven day strength may be taken as satisfactory indication of 28 day strength provided effects on
concrete of temperature and humidity between 7 day and 28 day are taken into account.
Division 3: Concrete Section 03300-15
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
2) Average Compressive Strength of 2 Test Cylinders Tested at 28 Days: Equal to or greater than required average
compressive strength f’cr on which concrete mix design is
based.
2. Pozzolan:
a. Sampling And Testing:
1) Sample and test pozzolan in accordance with ASTM C 311. 2) In Computing Water-Cement Ratio and Cement Content Per
Cubic Yard of Concrete: Consider cement weight to be
weight of portland cement plus 100 percent of weight of fly ash.
3. Aggregate: a. Testing of concrete aggregate is at CONTRACTOR’s expense.
b. Sieves:
a. Use sieves with square openings for testing grading of
aggregates. b. Sieve Analysis: If sieve analyses indicate significant change
in materials, the ENGINEER may require that new mix
design be submitted and accepted before further placing of
concrete.
c. Sample aggregate in accordance with ASTM D 75 and C 136. d. Fine Aggregate:
a. Provide fine aggregate not containing strong alkali nor organic matter which gives color darker than standard color
when tested in accordance with ASTM C 40. b. Provide aggregate having soundness complying with
requirements of ASTM C 33 when tested in accordance with
ASTM C 88.
c. Provide aggregate complying with reactivity requirements of
ASTM C 33 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 289. e. Coarse Aggregate:
a. Soundness when tested in accordance with ASTM C 88: Have
loss not greater than 10 percent when tested with sodium sulfate.
b. Abrasion Loss: Not exceed 45 percent after 500 revolutions
when tested in accordance with ASTM C 131. c. Reactivity: Not exceed limits specified in Appendix of ASTM
C 33 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 227.
f. Portland Cement:
1) Determination Alkali Content: Determine by method set forth in ASTM C 114.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Division 3: Concrete Section 03300-16
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Conduit Encasement Concrete: Mix into each cubic yard of concrete 10 pounds of
coloring agent.
B. Joints and Bonding: 1. As far as practicable construct concrete work as monolith.
2. Locations of contraction, construction, expansion, and other joints are
indicated on the Drawings or as specified in this Section. 3. Construction Joints:
a. Where construction joints are not indicated on the Drawings, provide
slabs and walls with construction joints at intervals not greater than 30 feet.
b. In order to preserve strength and watertightness of structures, make no other joints, except as authorized by the ENGINEER.
c. At construction joints, thoroughly clean concrete of laitance, grease,
oil, mud, dirt, curing compound, mortar droppings, or other objectionable matter by means of sandblasting, and wash surfaces
just prior to succeeding concrete placement.
d. At Horizontal Joints: Immediately prior to resuming concrete placing
operations, thoroughly spread bed of grout not less than ½ inch in thickness nor more than 1 inch in thickness over horizontal joint
surfaces.
4. Keyways in Joints: a. Provide keyways in joints as indicated on the Drawings.
b. Treat lumber keyway material with form release coating, applied in
accordance with manufacture’s instructions. 5. Take special care to ensure that concrete is well consolidated around and
against waterstops and that waterstops are secured in proper position.
6. Cleaning of Construction Joints:
a. Wash construction joints free of sawdust, chips, and other debris after forms and built and immediately before concrete or grout placement.
b. Should formwork confine sawdust, chips, or other loose matter in such manner that it is impossible to remove them by flushing with
water, use vacuum cleaner for their removal, after which flush cleaned surfaces with water.
c. Provide cleanout hole at base of each wall and column for inspection
and cleaning. 7. Expansion, Contraction, and Construction Joints:
a. Constructed where and as indicated on the Drawings. b. Waterstops, Expansion Joint Material, Synthetic Rubber Sealing
Compound, and Other Similar Materials: As specified in Sections 03250 and 07900.
8. Repair of Concrete: Where it is necessary to repair concrete by bonding
mortar or new concrete to concrete which has reached its initial set, first coat
Division 3: Concrete Section 03300-17
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
surface of set concrete with epoxy bonding agent as specified in Section
03301.
C. Conveying and Placing Concrete:
1. Convey concrete from mixer to place of final deposit by methods which
prevent separation or loss of materials. 2. Use equipment for chuting, pumping, and conveying concrete of such size
and design as to ensure practically continuous flow of concrete at delivery end without separation of materials.
3. Design and use chutes and devices for conveying and depositing concrete that
direct concrete vertically downward when discharged from chute or conveying device.
4. Keep equipment for conveying concrete thoroughly clean by washing and
scraping upon completion of any day’s placement.
Division 3: Concrete Section 03300-18
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
D. Delivery of Concrete: 1. Delivery time of concrete from batch to site of placement shall not exceed 90
minutes at 90° F. The ENGINEER has the right to reject the load if it fails
to meet this criteria.
E. Placing Concrete:
1. Do not place concrete without prior authorization of the ENGINEER. 2. Do not place concrete until:
a. Reinforcement is securely and properly fastened in its correct
position and loose form ties at construction joints have been
retightened. b. Dowels, bucks, sleeves, hangers, pipes, conduits, bolts, and any other
fixtures required to be embedded in concrete have been placed and
adequately anchored.
c. Forms have been cleaned and oiled prior to placement around rebar
so as to prevent form oil from pelting on rebar. 3. Placement of concrete in which initial set has occurred, or of retempered
concrete, will not be permitted.
4. Do not place concrete during rainstorms or high velocity winds.
5. Protect concrete placed immediately before rain to prevent water from
coming in contact with such concrete or winds causing excessive drying. 6. Keep sufficient protective covering on hand at all times for protection of
concrete.
7. After acceptance, adhere to proposed sequence of placing concrete, except
when specific changes are requested by the CONTRACTOR and accepted by the ENGINEER.
8. Notify the ENGINEER in writing of readiness, not just intention, to place concrete in any portion of the work: a. Provide this notification in such time in advance of operations as the
ENGINEER deems necessaryto make final inspection of preparations
at location of proposed concrete placing.
b. Place forms, steel, screeds, anchors, ties, and inserts in place before
notification of readiness is given to the ENGINEER. c. Depositing Concrete:
1) Deposit concrete at or near its final position to avoid
segregation caused by rehandling or flowing.
2) Do not deposit concrete in large quantities in one place and work along forms with vibrator or by other methods.
3) Do not drop concrete freely into place from height greater
than 4 feet.
4) Use tremies for placing concrete on slopes, at bottom of
slope. 5) Commence placement of concrete on slopes, at bottom of
slope.
9. Place concrete in approximately horizontal layers not to exceed 24 inches in
Division 3: Concrete Section 03300-19
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
depth and bring up evenly in all parts of forms.
Division 3: Concrete Section 03300-20
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
10. Continue concrete placement without avoidable interruption, in continuous operation, until end of placement is reached. The ENGINEER reserves the
right to reject the placement if a cold joint is determined to affect the
structural integrity. 11. If more than 20 minutes lapse prior to placement of new concrete over
concrete previously places, reduce depth of layers being placed at one time,
and/or increase placing operation to previously placed concrete within 20
minutes.
12. If concrete is to be placed over previously placed concrete and more than 20 minutes have elapsed, then spread layer of grout not less than ½ inch in
thickness nor more than 1 inch in thickness over surface before placing
additional concrete.
13. Placement of Concrete for Slabs, Beams, or Walkways:
a. If cast monolithically with walls or columns, do not commence until
concrete in walls or columns has been allowed to set and shrink.
b. Allow set time of not less than one hour for shrinkage.
F. Consolidating Concrete: 1. Place concrete with aid of acceptable mechanical vibrators.
2. Thoroughly consolidate concrete around reinforcement, pipes, or other shapes built into the work.
3. Provide sufficiently intense vibration to cause concrete to flow and settle
readily into place and to visibly affect concrete over radius of at least 18 inches.
4. Vibrators:
a. Keep sufficient vibrators on hand at all times to vibrate concrete as
placed.
b. In addition to vibrators in actual use while concrete is being placed, have on hand minimum 1 spare vibrator in serviceable condition.
c. Do not place concrete until it has been ascertained that all vibrating
equipment, including spares, are in serviceable condition.
5. Take special care to place concrete solidly against forms so as to leave no voids.
6. Take every precaution to make concrete solid, compact, and smooth, and if
for any way defective, repair such concrete in manner acceptable to the ENGINEER.
G. Footings and Slabs on Grade:
1. Do not place concrete on ground or compacted fill until subgrade is in moist
condition acceptable to the ENGINEER. 2. If necessary, sprinkle subgrade with water not less than 6 nor more than 20
hours in advance of placing concrete.
3. If it becomes dry prior to actual placing of concrete, sprinkle again, without
forming pools of water. 4. Do not place concrete if subgrade is muddy or soft.
Division 3: Concrete Section 03300-21
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
H. Curing Concrete - General: 1. Cure concrete by methods specified in this Section.
2. Cure concrete minimum of 7 days. 3. Cure concrete that is to be painted or coated with water or plastic membrane.
4. Do not use curing compound on any concrete surface that is to receive paint
or upon which any material is to be bonded.
5. Water cure or plastic membrane cure concrete slabs which are specified to be sealed by concrete sealer.
6. Cure other concrete by water curing or sprayed curing membrane at the
CONTRACTOR’s option.
I. Water Curing:
1. Keep surfaces of concrete being water cured constantly and visibly moist day
and night for period of not less than 7 days.
2. Each day forms remain in place may count as 1 day of water curing.
3. No further curing credit will be allowed for forms in place after contact has
once been broken between concrete surface and forms. 4. Do not loosen form ties during period when concrete is being cured by
leaving forms in place.
5. Flood top of walls with water at least 3 times per day, and keep concrete
surfaces moist at all times during 7 day curing period.
J. Sprayed Membrane Curing:
1. Apply curing compound to concrete surface after repairing and patching, and
within 1 hour after forms are removed. 2. If more than one hour elapses after removal forms, do not use membrane
curing compound, but apply water curing for full curing period.
3. If surface requires repairing or painting, water cure such concrete surfaces. 4. Curing Compound:
a. Do not remove curing compound from concrete in less than 7 days. b. Curing compound may be removed only upon written required by the
CONTRACTOR and acceptance by the ENGINEER, stating what
measures are to be performed to adequately cure structures. c. Take care to apply curing compound in area of construction joints to
see that curing compound is placed within construction joint silhouette.
d. Remove curing compound placed within construction joint silhouette by heavy sandblasting prior to placing any new concrete: 1) CONTRACTOR’s Option: Instead of using curing compound
for curing of construction joints such joints may be water
cured. e. Apply curing compound by mechanical, power operated sprayer and
mechanical agitator that will uniformly mix all pigment and
compound.
Division 3: Concrete Section 03300-22
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
f. Apply compound in at least 2 coats. g. Apply each coat in direction 90 degrees to preceding coat. h. Apply compound in sufficient quantity so that concrete has uniform
appearance and that natural color is effectively and completely
concealed at time of spraying.
i. Continue to coat and recoat surfaces until specified coverage is
achieved and until coating film remains on concrete surfaces. j. Thickness And Coverage Of Compound: Provide compound having
film thickness that can be scraped from surfaces at any and all points
after drying for at least 24 hours. k. The CONTRACTOR is cautioned that method of applying curing
compound specified herein may require more compound than
normally suggested by manufacturer of compound and also more
than is customary in the trade. l. Apply amounts specified herein, regardless of manufacturer’s
recommendations or customary practice, if curing compound is used in place of water curing.
m. If the CONTRACTOR desires to use curing compound other than
specified compound, coat sample areas of concrete wall with proposed compound and also similar adjacent area with specified
compound in specified manner for comparison: 1) If proposed sample is not equal or better, in opinion of the
ENGINEER, in all features, proposed substitution will not be
allowed. n. Prior to final acceptance of the work, remove, by sandblasting or
other acceptable method, any curing compound on surfaces exposed
to view, so that only natural color of finished concrete is visible
uniformly over entire surface.
K. Plastic Membrane Curing:
1. Polyethylene film may be used to cure slabs. Seal joint and edges with small
sand berm. 2. Install plastic membrane as soon as concrete is finished and can be walked on
without damage. Keep concrete moist under plastic membrane.
3.2 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. Provide smooth troweled finish for all process basins and containment structures.
B. Edges of Joints: 1. Provide joints having edges as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Protect wall and slab surfaces at edges against concrete spatter and
thoroughly clean upon completion of each placement.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Division 3: Concrete Section 03300-23
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
A. Cost: All materials testing shall be included in the CONTRACTOR’s bid.
B. Testing of Concrete: 1. During progress of construction, the CONTRACTOR shall have tests made
to determine whether the concrete, as being produced, complies with
requirements specified.
2. Tests will be performed in accordance with ASTM C 31, ASTM C 39, and
ASTM C 172. 3. The testing laboratory will make and deliver test cylinders to the laboratory
and testing expense will be borne by the CONTRACTOR.
4. Required Number Cylinders: a. Not less than four cylinder specimens, 6 inch diameter by 12 inch
long, will be tested for each 150 cubic yards of each class of concrete
with minimum of four specimens for each class of concrete placed and not less than four specimens for each half day’s placement.
b. One cylinder will be broken at 7 days and 2 at 28 days.
5. The CONTRACTOR shall:
a. Test slump of concrete using slump cone in accordance with
requirements of ASTM C 143.
b. Furnish test equipment.
c. Do not use concrete that does not meet specification requirements in
regards to slump, but remove such concrete from project site. d. Test slump at the beginning of each placement, as often as necessary
to keep slump within the specified range, and when requested to so by the ENGINEER.
e. Make provisions for and furnish concrete for test specimens, and
provide manual assistance to the testing laboratory in preparing said specimens.
f. Assume responsibility for care of and providing of curing conditions
for test specimens in accordance with ASTM C 31.
B. Air Entraining Admixture: a. Test percent of entrained air in concrete at beginning of each placement, as
often as necessary to keep entrained air within specified ranges, and when requested to do so by the ENGINEER.
b. Provide test equipment.
c. Do not use concrete that does not meet Specification requirements as to air
entrainment and shall remove such concrete from project site. d. Test air entrainment in concrete in accordance with ASTM C 173.
C. Enforcement of Strength Requirement:
1. Concrete is expected to reach higher compressive strength than that which is
indicated in Table A as specified compressive strength f’c.
2. Strength Level of Concrete: Will be considered acceptable if following conditions are satisfied.
a. Averages of all sets of 3 consecutive strength test results is greater or
Division 3: Concrete Section 03300-24
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
equal to specified compressive strength f’c. b. No individual strength test (average of 2 cylinders) falls below specified
compressive strength f’c by more than 500 pounds per square inch.
c. Whenever one, or both, of 2 conditions stated above is not satisfied, provide additional curing of affected portion followed by cores taken in accordance with ASTM C 42 and
ACI 318 and comply with following requirements:
d. If additional curing does not bring average of 3 cores taken in affected area to at least
specified compressive strength f’c, designate such concrete in affected areas defective. 1) The ENGINEER may require the CONTRACTOR to strengthen defective
concrete bymeans of additional concrete, additional reinforcing steel, or replacement of defective concrete, all of the CONTRACTOR’s expense
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Repair of Defective Concrete: 1. Remove and replace or repair defective work.
2. Correct defective work as specified in this Article.
3. Do not patch, repair, or cover defective work without inspection by the
ENGINEER. 4. Provide repairs having strength equal or greater than specified concrete for
area involved:
a. Chip out and key imperfections in the work and make them ready for
repair. 5. Dry-Pack Method:
a. Dry Pack Method: Use for holes having depth nearly equal to or greater than least surface dimension of hole, for cone-bolt, and
narrow slots cut for repair.
b. Smooth Holes: Clean and roughen by heavy sandblasting before
repair. 6. Mortar Method of Replacement: Use for following:
a. Holes too wide to dry pack and too shallow for concrete replacement.
b. Comparatively shallow depressions, large or small, which extend no
deeper than reinforcement nearest surface. 7. Concrete Replacement:
a. Use: When holes extend entirely through concrete section or when
holes are more than 1 square foot in area and extend halfway or more through the section.
b. Method of Repair For Surfaces of Set Concrete to be Repaired: First
coat with epoxy bonding agent. 8. Acceptable Method of Concrete Repair:
a. Make no repair until the ENGINEER has accepted method of
preparing surfaces and proposed method of repair.
END OF SECTION
Division 3: Concrete Section 03301-1
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
SECTION 03301
EPOXIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Epoxy.
2. Epoxy gel.
3. Epoxy bonding agent.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. D 638 - Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
2. D 695 - Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics.
3. D 790 - Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and Reinforced
Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements:
1. Provide epoxy materials that are new and use them within shelf life
limitations set forth by manufacturer.
2. Perform and conduct work of this Section in neat orderly manner.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Not Used.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Epoxy: Water-insensitive two-part type low viscosity epoxy adhesive material
containing 100 percent solids and meeting or exceeding following characteristics
when tested in accordance with standards specified: Manufacturers: One of the
following or equal:
1. Master Builders, Inc., Concressive Standard LVI.
2. Sika Chemical Corp.’s, Sikadur 35 Hi-Mod LV.
Division 3: Concrete Section 03301-2
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Physical
Characteristic Test Method Required Results
Tensile Strength ASTM D 638 8,000 pounds per square inch at 14 days and
77 deg. F cure.
Flexure Strength ASTM D 790 11,000 pounds per square inch at 14 days and
77 deg. F cure.
Compressive Strength ASTM D 695 16,000 pounds per square inch at 24 hours
and 77 deg. F cure.
Bond Strength N/A Concrete shall fail before failure of epoxy.
Gel Time in 5-Mil Film N/A Four hours maximum at 77 deg. F
Elongation ASTM D 638 1 percent minimum at 14 days and 77 deg. F
B. Epoxy Gel: Manufactures: One of the following or equal:
1. Sika Chemical Corp.’s, Sikadur 31 Hi-Mod Gel.
C. Epoxy Bonding Agent: Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Master Builders, Inc., Concressive 1001 Liquid LPL.
2. Sika Chemical Corp.’s, Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install and cure epoxy materials in accordance with manufacturer’s installation
instructions.
B. Epoxy:
1. Apply in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.
C. Epoxy Gel:
1. Apply in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.
2. Use for vertical or overhead work, or where high viscosity epoxy is required.
3. Epoxy gel used for vertical or overhead work may be used for horizontal
work.
D. Epoxy Bonding Agent:
1. Apply in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.
2. Bonding agent will not be required for filling form tie hole or for normal
finishing and patching of similar sizes small defects.
END OF SECTION
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 3: Concrete Section 03302-1
SECTION 03302
EPOXY RESIN/PORTLAND CEMENT BONDING AGENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Epoxy resin/portland cement bonding agent.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing of Materials (ASTM):
1. C 109 - Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars.
2. C 348 - Test Method for Flexural Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars.
3. C 496 - Test Method for Splitting Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens.
4. C 882 - Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy-Resin Systems Used with
Concrete.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, New Jersey, Sika Armatec 110.
B. Substitutions: The use of other than the specified product will be considered
providing the CONTRACTOR request its use in writing to the ENGINEER. This
request shall be accompanied by:
1. A certificate of compliance from an approved independent testing laboratory
that the proposed substitute product meets or exceeds specified test standards.
2.2 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Properties of the Mixed Epoxy Resin/Portland Cement Adhesive:
1. Pot life: 75-105 minutes.
2. Contact time: 24 hours.
3. Color: Dark gray.
B. Properties of the Cured Epoxy Resin/Portland Cement Adhesive:
1. Compressive strength in accordance with ASTM C 109:
a. 1 day: 810 pounds per square inch minimum.
b. 7 day: 6,000 pounds per square inch minimum.
c. 28 day: 8,000 pounds per square inch minimum.
2. Splitting tensile strength in accordance with ASTM C 496:
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 3: Concrete Section 03302-2
a. 28 days: 540 pounds per square inch minimum.
3. Flexural Strength:
a. 1,100 pounds per square inch minimum in accordance with ASTM C
348.
4. Bond strength in accordance with ASTM C 882 modified at 14 days:
a. 0 hours open time: 1,900 pounds per square inch minimum.
b. 24 hours open time: 1,500 pounds per square inch minimum.
5. The epoxy resin/portland cement adhesive shall not produce a vapor barrier.
6. Material must be proven to prevent corrosion of reinforcing steel when tested
under the procedures as set forth by the Federal Highway Administration
Program Report Number FHWA/RD86/193. Proof shall be in the form of an
independent testing laboratory corrosion report showing prevention for
corrosion of the reinforced area.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Epoxy Resin/Portland Cement Adhesive:
1. Component “A” shall be an epoxy resin/water emulsion containing suitable
viscosity control agents. It shall not contain butyl glycidyl ether.
2. Component “B” shall be primarily a water solution of a polyamine.
3. Component “C” shall be a blend of selected portland cements and sands.
4. The material shall not contain asbestos.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 MIXING AND APPLICATION
A. Mixing the Epoxy Resin: Shake contents of Components “A” and Component “B”.
Empty all of both components into a clean, dry mixing pail. Mix thoroughly for 30
seconds with a jiffy paddle on a low-speed with 400 to 600 revolutions per minute
drill. Slowly add the entire contents of Component “C” while continuing to mix for
3 minutes until uniform with no lumps. Mix only that quantity that can be applied
within its pot life.
B. Placement Procedure:
1. Apply to prepared surface with stiff-bristle brush, broom, or “hopper type”
spray equipment:
a. For hand applications: Place fresh, plastic concrete/mortar while the
bonding bridge adhesive is wet or dry, up to 24 hours.
b. For machine applications: Allow the bonding bridge adhesive to dry
for 12 hours minimum.
C. Adhere to all limitations and cautions for the epoxy resin/portland cement adhesive
in the manufacturers current printed literature.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 3: Concrete Section 03302-3
3.2 CLEANING
A. Leave finished work and work area in a neat, clean condition without evidence of
spillovers onto adjacent area.
END OF SECTION
Division 3: Concrete Section 03356-1
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
SECTION 03356
TOOLED CONCRETE FINISHES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Tooled concrete finishes.
1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Packing and Shipping:
1. Deliver and store packages materials in original containers until ready for
use.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MIXES
A. Mortar Mix for F4 Finish: Consist of one part cement and 1-1/2 parts of fine sand
passing Number 100 screen, mixed with enough water emulsified bonding agent to
have consistency of thick cream.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.2 CONCRETE FINISHING
A. Cement for Finishes:
1. Addition of white cement may be required to produce finish which matches
color of concrete to be finished.
B. Vertical Concrete Surfaces: Use Following Finishes for Vertical Concrete Surfaces
(use F4 finish if not otherwise indicated on drawings):
1. F1 Finish: No special treatment other than repair defective work and fill
depressions 1 inch or deeper and tie holes with mortar after removal of curing
membrane.
2. F2 Finish: No special treatment other than repair defective work, remove fins,
fill depressions ½ inch or deeper and tie holes with mortar after removal of
curing membrane.
3. F3 Finish: Repair defective work, remove fins, offsets, and curing membrane,
and grind projections smooth. Fill depressions 1/4 inch or larger in depth or
width and tie holes with mortar after removal of curing membrane.
4. F4 Finish:
Division 3: Concrete Section 03356-2
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
a. Same as specified for F3 Finish, and in addition fill depressions and
holes 1/16 inch or larger in width with mortar.
b. “Brush-Off” sandblast surfaces prior to filling holes to expose all
holes near surface of the concrete.
c. Thoroughly wet surfaces and commence filling of pits, holes, and
depressions while surfaces are still damp.
d. Perform filling by rubbing mortar over entire area with clean burlap,
sponge rubber floats, or trowels.
e. Do not let any material remain on surfaces, except that within pits and
depressions.
f. Wipe surfaces clean and moist cure.
5. F5 Finish: Receive same finish specified for F3 Finish, and, in addition,
receive special stoned finish, in accordance with following requirements:
a. Remove forms and perform required repairs, patching, and pointing
as specified in this Section.
b. Wet surfaces thoroughly with brush and rub with hard wood float
dipped in water containing 2 pounds of portland cement per gallon.
c. Rub surfaces until form marks and projections have been removed.
d. Spread grindings from rubbing operations uniformly over surface
with brush in such manner as to fill pits and small voids.
e. Moist cure brushed surfaces and allow to harden for 3 days:
1) After curing, obtain final finish by rubbing with carborundum
stone of approximately Number 50 grit until entire surfaces
have smooth texture and are uniform in color.
2) Continue curing for remainder of specified time.
f. If any concrete surface is allowed to become too hard to finish in
above specified manner, sandblast and wash related surfaces exposed
to view, whether finished or not:
1) While still damp, rub over surface, plastic mortar, as specified
for brushed surfaces and hand stoned with Number 60 grit
carborundum stone, using additional mortar for brushed
surfaces until surface is evenly filled without an excess of
mortar.
2) Continue stoning until surface is hard.
3) After moist curing for 3 days, make surface smooth in texture
and uniform in color by use of Number 50 or Number 50 grit
carborundum stone.
4) After stoning, continue curing until 7 day curing period is
completed.
C. Horizontal Concrete: After proper and adequate vibration and tamping, use following
finishes for horizontal concrete surfaces as indicated on the Drawings (Use finish S4
unless otherwise indicated on Drawings):
Division 3: Concrete Section 03356-3
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
1. S1 Finish: Screened to grade and leave without special finish.
2. S2 Finish: Smooth steel trowel finish.
3. S3 Finish: Steel trowel finish free from trowel marks. Provide smooth
finish free of all irregularities.
4. S4 Finish: Steel trowel finish, without local depressions or high points,
followed by light hair broom finish. Do not use stiff bristle brooms or
brushes. Perform brooming parallel to slab-drainage. Provide resulting
finish that is rough enough to provide nonskid finish. Finish shall be subject
to review and acceptance by the OWNER.
5. S5 Finish: Nonslip abrasive: After concrete has been screened level and
hardened enough to support man standing on a board, sprinkle abrasive from
shake screen into surface at uniform rate of 25 pounds for each 100 square
feet of surface area, wood float into finish, then trowel abrasive into surface
with steel trowel properly exposing abrasive in surface as required to provide
nonslip surface.
D. Concrete Floor Surfaces to Which Surfacing Material is Applied: Finish smooth with
tolerance within 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction from lines indicated on the
Drawings.
END OF SECTION
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 3: Concrete Section 03600-1
SECTION 03600
GROUT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Concrete mortar, grout, drypack mortar, nonshrink grout, and
epoxy grout.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 03301 - Epoxies.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. C 109 - Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars.
2. C 157 - Test Method for Length Change of Hardened Cement Mortar and
Concrete.
3. C 191 - Test Method for Time Setting of Hydraulic Cement by Vicat Needle.
4. C 827 - Standard Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages of
Cylindrical Specimens of Cementitious Mixtures.
B. U. S. Corps of Engineers (USCE):
1. CRD C-621 - Corps of Engineer Specifications Non-Shrink Grout.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Concrete Mortar:
1. General: Consist of concrete mixture with coarse aggregate removed and
water quantity adjusted as required.
2. At Exposed Concrete Surfaces not to be Painted or Submerged in Water:
White cement.
B. Grout:
1. Consist of mixture of Portland Cement and sand.
C. Dry-Pack Mortar:
1. Consist of mixture of Portland cement and sand.
D. Non-Shrink Grout:
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 3: Concrete Section 03600-2
1. Consist of hydraulic cement, which when mixed with water hardens rapidly
to produce permanent high strength material suitable for exterior use.
2. Nonmetallic and not contain calcium chloride or other chemicals which
accelerate corrosion of embedded steel.
3. Physical Characteristics:
a) When Tested in Accordance with ASTM C 827: Show no shrinkage
prior to initial setting.
b) When Tested in Accordance with ASTM C 157 and Corps of
Engineers CRD C-621: Show no shrinkage in hardened state.
4. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a) Master Builders, Inc., Masterflow 928 Grout.
E. Epoxy Grout:
1. Consist of mixture of epoxy and sand.
2. Sand: Clean, bagged, graded, and kiln dried silica sand.
2.2 MIXES
A. Concrete Mortar Mix:
1. Use water-cement ratio that is no more than that specified for concrete being
repaired.
2. At Exposed Concrete Surfaces not to be Painted or Submerged in Water: Use
sufficient white cement to make color of finished patch match that of
surrounding concrete.
B. Grout Mix:
1. For Concrete Repair: Mix in same proportions used for concrete being
repaired, with only sufficient water to give required consistency for
spreading.
2. For Spreading over the Surfaces of Construction or Cold Joints: Mix with no
more water used than allowed by water-cement ratio specified for concrete.
3. For grout not specified in subparagraph 2.02B1 or 2.02B2, mix in proportions
by weight of one part cement to four part of concrete sand.
C. Dry-Pack Mortar Mix: Use only enough water so that resulting mortar will crumble
to touch after being formed into ball by hand.
D. Non-Shrink Grout: Mix accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions such
that resulting mix has semi-fluid, flowable consistency and is suitable for placing by
pouring.
E. Epoxy Grout:
1. Mix in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions for mixing.
2. Proportioning:
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 3: Concrete Section 03600-3
a. For horizontal work, consist of mixture of one part epoxy as specified
in Section 03301 with not more than 2 parts sand.
b. For vertical or overhead work, consist of 1 part epoxy gel as specified
in Section 03301 with not more than 2 parts sand.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation:
1. Concrete Surfaces: Clean and roughen by heavy sandblasting. For portland
cement based mortars and grouts, concrete shall be saturated and surface
damp before mortar or grout is placed.
2. Epoxy Grout:
a. Wet contact surface with prepared grout as required to provide proper
adhesion.
b. Where required to wet the concrete surfaces, apply coat of epoxy for
horizontal work or epoxy gel for vertical or overhead work prior to
placing epoxy grout.
3.2 APPLICATION
A. Cement Mortar and Grout:
1. For Imperfect Concrete Repair:
a. Filling: Filling of voids around items through the concrete.
b. Grout Spreading: Spread over construction joints, cold joints, and
similar type items.
2. Concrete Surfaces:
a. Apply epoxy bonding agent to clean, roughened, and dry surface
before placing mortar or grout.
3. Placing:
a. Exercise particular care in placing portland cement mortar or grout
since they are required to furnish structural strength or impermeable
water seal or both.
b. Do not use cement mortar or grout that as not been placed within 30
minutes after mixing.
B. Epoxy Grout:
1. Apply in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.
2. Use where specified herein or where indicated on the Drawings.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests:
1. CONTRACTOR shall include all materials testing in his bid.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 3: Concrete Section 03600-4
2. Non-Shrink Grout:
a. A set of three specimens shall be made for testing. One at seven days,
one at 25 days, and the third of a later date if needed.
b. Compression test specimens shall be taken during construction from
the first day of placement of grout.
c. Compressive Strength When Tested In Accordance With ASTM C
109:
1) At One Day: Not less than 3,000 pounds per square inch. At
28 days: Not less than 6,000 pounds per square inch.
d. Setting Time when Tested In Accordance with ASTM C 191: Not
less than 30 minutes.
END OF SECTION
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 3: Concrete Section 03605-5
SECTION 03605
EPOXY BONDING REINFORCING BARS AND RODS IN CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Bonding reinforcing bars and all thread rods in concrete using
epoxy adhesive.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1. Standard B212-15 - Carbide Tipped Masonry Drills and Blanks for Carbide
Tipped Masonry Drills.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. C 881 - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for
Concrete.
C. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC):
1. SP-10 Near-White Blast Cleaning.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish technical data for epoxy adhesives, including installation
instructions, independent laboratory test results, and handling and storage
instructions.
B. Quality Control Submittals:
1. Special Inspection: Provide detailed step-by-step instructions for the special
inspection procedure as required by International Building Code.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage of Epoxy Components:
1. Store epoxy components on pallets or shelving in a covered-storage area.
2. Control temperature above 60 degrees Fahrenheit and dispose of product if
shelf life has expired.
3. If stored at temperatures below 60 degrees Fahrenheit, test components prior
to use to determine if they still meet specified requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 3: Concrete Section 03605-6
A. Compatibilityof Materials: Use end products of one manufacturer in order to achieve
structural compatibility and singular responsibility.
2.2 EPOXY ADHESIVE FOR SELF-CONTAINED CARTRIDGE SYSTEM
A. Meet ASTM C 881, Type IV, Grade 3, Class B or C depending on site conditions.
B. Two-component, 100 percent solids, insensitive to moisture, and gray in color.
C. Cure Temperature, Pot Life, and Workability: Compatible for intended use and
environmental conditions.
D. Container Markings: Include manufacturer’s name, product name, batch number, mix
ratio byvolume, product expiration date, ANSI hazard classification, and appropriate
ANSI handling precautions.
E. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Covert Operations, Long Beach, CA, CIA-Gel 7000 System.
2. Hilti, Tulsa, OK, RE 500 High Strength Epoxy Doweling System.
2.3 EPOXY ADHESIVE FOR METER AND MIXING PUMP SYSTEM
A. Meet ASTM C 881, Type IV, Grade 3, Class B or C depending on site conditions.
B. Two-component, 100 percent solids, insensitive to moisture, and gray in color.
C. Cure Temperature, Pot Life, and Workability: Compatible for intended use and
environmental conditions.
D. Container Markings: Include manufacturer’s name, product name, batch number, mix
ration by volume, product expiration date, ANSI hazard classification, and
appropriate ANSI handling precautions.
E. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Sika, Sante Fe Springs, CA, Sikadur 31 Hi-Mod Gel.
2.4 ALL THREAD BARS
A. As specified in Section 05052.
2.5 REINFORCING BARS
A. As specified in Section
03200. PART 3 EXECUTION
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 3: Concrete Section 03605-7
3.1 GENERAL
A. Dispensing, Metering, or Mixing Epoxy Adhesive Components: Use portable,
automatic metering and mixing device or machine capable of maintaining prescribed
mix ratio within deviation of 5 percent or less, by volume.
B. Dispense epoxy components through specially designed static mixing nozzle that
thoroughly mixes epoxy components and places mixed epoxy at base of predrilled
hole.
C. Mixing Nozzles: Disposable and manufactured in several sizes to accommodate
different size and depth of holes.
D. Where large meter and mixing pumps are impractical, provide epoxy adhesive
packaged as follows:
1. Disposable, self-contained cartridges system capable of dispensing both
epoxy components in the proper mixing ratio, and fit into a manually or
pneumatically operated caulking gun.
2. Dispense components through a mixing nozzle that thoroughly mixes
components.
3.2 TESTING OF AUTOMATIC METERING AND MIXING PUMP SYSTEMS
A. Tests For Proper Ratio:
1. Retain small amount of dispensed adhesive for inspection after each time the
pump is refilled.
2. Operator shall check these samples for color change.
3. Should change in color occur, operator shall follow manufacturer’s service
instructions to obtain proper operation.
B. Frequency of Tests: Make full ratio check after each 10 gallons of adhesive is
dispensed or if color of mixed adhesive becomes noticeably darker or lighter.
C. Ratio Check Procedure:
1. Disconnect dispensing head behind ON/OFF valve.
2. Place a 1 cup volume container and a 2 cup volume container under the
“B” and “A” component hose ends.
3. Actuate the pump until both cups are filled to proper proportion as
recommended by epoxy manufacturer.
3.3 HOLE SIZING AND INSTALLATION
A. Drilling Holes:
1. Do not damage or cut existing reinforcing bars, electrical conduits, or other
items embedded in the existing concrete without acceptance by OWNER.
2. The location of reinforcing bars, or other obstructions shall be determined
with a non-destructive indicator device.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 3: Concrete Section 03605-8
B. Hole Drilling Equipment:
1. Electric or pneumatic rotary impact type with medium or light impact.
2. Drill Bits: Carbide-tipped in accordance with ANSI B212-15.
3. Hollow drills with flushing air systems are preferred. Air shall be free of oil,
water, or other contaminants which will reduce bond.
4. Where edge distances are less than 2 inches, use lighter impact equipment to
prevent microcracking and concrete spalling during drilling process.
C. Hole Diameter:
1. Reinforcing bar diameter or all thread rod diameter plus 1/8 inch.
D. Obstructions in Drill Path:
1. If the drill hits an existing reinforcing bar or other obstruction, stop drilling
and fill the hole with drypack mortar. Relocate the hole to miss the
obstruction and drill another hole. Repeat the above until the hole has been
drilled to the required depth.
2. Avoid drilling an excessive number of holes in an area which would
excessively weaken the structural member being drilled and endanger the
stabilityof the structure. When required, drypack holes which hit obstructions
and allow drypack to reach strength equal to the existing concrete being
drilled before drilling adjacent holes. Epoxy grout may be substituted for
drypack when acceptable to ENGINEER.
3. When existing reinforcing steel is encountered during drilling and when
acceptable to ENGINEER, enlarge the hole by 1/8 inch, core through the
existing reinforcing steel at the larger diameter, and resume drilling at
original hole diameter.
4. Bent Bar Dowels: Where edge distances are critical, and striking reinforcing
steel is likely, and if acceptable to ENGINEER, drill hole at 10 degree angle
or less from axis of reinforcing bar or all thread rod being installed.
E. Install reinforcing bars and all thread rods to depth, spacings, and locations as
indicated on the Drawings.
F. Cleaning Holes:
1. Insert long air nozzle into hole and blow out loose dust. Use air which is free
of oil, water, or other contaminants which will reduce bond.
2. Use a stiff bristle brush to vigorously brush hole to dislodge compacted
drilling dust.
3. Repeat step 1.
4. Repeat above steps as required to remove drilling dust or other material
which will reduce bond. The hole shall be clean and dry.
G. Cleaning Reinforcing Bars and All Thread Rods:
1. Degrease and sandblast reinforcing bars or all thread rods over embedment
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 3: Concrete Section 03605-9
length to near-white metal in accordance with Steel Structures Painting
Council, SP-10 finish. The reinforcing bar or all thread rod shall be free of
oil, grease, paint, dirt, mill scale, rust, or other coatings that will reduce bond.
H. Filling Hole with Epoxy:
1. Fill the hole with epoxy before inserting the reinforcing bar or all thread rod.
Fill hole with epoxy starting from back of the hole. Fill hole without creating
air voids.
2. Fill the hole with sufficient epoxy so that excess epoxy is extruded out of the
hole when the reinforcing bar or all thread rod is inserted into the hole.
END OF SECTION
DIVISION 4
MASONRY
Division 4 - Masonry
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 4: Masonry Section 04810-1
SECTION 04810
UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Concrete Block.
B. Mortar and Grout.
C. Reinforcement and Anchorage.
D. Accessories.
E. See Drawings.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ACI 530/530.1/ERTA - Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry
B. Structures; American Concrete Institute International.
C. ASTM A82/A82M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete
Reinforcement.
D. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars
for Concrete Reinforcement.
E. ASTM A641/A641M - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon
Steel Wire.
F. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
G. ASTM C90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units.
H. ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar.
I. ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.
J. ASTM C207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.
K. ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry.
L. ASTM C404 - Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 4: Masonry Section 04810-2
M. ASTM C780 - Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of
Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry.
N. ASTM C1357 - Standard Test Methods for Evaluating Masonry Bond Strength.
O. ASTM C897 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Job-Mixed Portland Cement-
Based Plaster.
P. ASTM C926 – Standard Specification for Application of Portland Cement-Based Plaster.
1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work
of this section; require attendance by all relevant installers.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data for masonry units, fabricated wire reinforcement, mortar, and
masonry accessories.
B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that masonry units meet or exceed specified
requirements.
C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that water repellent admixture manufacturer has
certified masonry unit manufacturer as an approved user of water repellent admixture in
the manufacture of concrete block.
1.05 MOCK-UP
A. Construct a masonry wall as a mock-up panel sized 8 feet long by 6 feet high; include
mortar, accessories, and structural reinforcing in mock-up.
B. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, handle, and store masonry units by means that will prevent mechanical damage
and contamination by other materials.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows:
1. Size: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 x 8 inches and nominal
depth as indicated on drawings.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 4: Masonry Section 04810-3
2. Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C90, normal weight.
a. Pattern: Smooth Face.
3. Units with Integral Water Repellent: Concrete block units as specified in this section
with polymeric liquid admixture added to concrete masonry units at the time of
manufacture.
a. Performance of Units with Integral Water Repellent:
1) Water Permeance: When tested per ASTM E514 and for a minimum of 72
hours.
a) No water visible on back of wall at the end of 2 hours.
b) No flow of water from flashing equal to or greater than 0.032 gallons per
hour at the end of 24 hours.
c) No more than 25% of wall area above flashing visibly damp at end of test.
2) Flexural Bond Strength: ASTM C1357; minimum 10% increase.
3) Compressive Strength: ASTM C1314; maximum 5% decrease.
4) Drying Shrinkage: ASTM C1148; maximum 5% increase in shrinkage.
a) Use only in combination with mortar and grout that also has integral water
repellent admixture.
2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I.
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.
C. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144.
D. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404.
E. Water: Clean and potable.
F. Integral Water Repellent Admixture for Mortar and Grout: Polymeric liquid admixture
added to mortar and grout at the time of manufacture.
1. Performance of Mortar and Grout with Integral Water Repellent:
a. Water Permeance: When tested per ASTM E514 for a minimum of 72 hours.
1) No water visible on back of wall above flashing at the end of 24 hours.
2) No flow of water from flashing equal to or greater than 0.032 gallons per hour
at the end of 24 hours.
3) No more than 25% of wall area above flashing visibly damp at end of test.
b. Flexural Bond Strength: ASTM C1357; minimum 10% increase.
c. Compressive Strength: ASTM C1314; maximum 5% decrease.
d. Drying Shrinkage: ASTM C1148; maximum 5% increase in shrinkage.
2. Use only in combination with masonry units produced with integral water repellent
admixture.
2.03 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE
A. Manufacturers of Joint Reinforcement and Anchors:
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 4: Masonry Section 04810-4
1. Blok-Lok Limited: www.blok-lok.com.
2. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc (including Dur-O-Wal brand): www.h-b.com.
3. WIRE-BOND: www.wirebond.com.
B. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M Grade 40 (280) deformed billet bars; galvanized.
C. Joint Reinforcement: Use ladder type joint reinforcement where vertical reinforcement is
involved and truss type elsewhere, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss type; ASTM A 82/A 82M steel wire, mill
galvanized to ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3; 0.1483 inch side rods with 0.1483 inch
cross rods; width as required to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of
mortar coverage on each exposure.
E. Flexible Anchors: 2-piece anchors that permit differential movement between masonry
and building frame, sized to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of
mortar coverage from masonry face.
2.04 STUCCO
A. Job-Mixed Portland Cement-Based Plaster per ASTM C897.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A. Preformed Control Joints: Rubber material. Provide with corner and tee accessories,
fused joints.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Blok-Lok Limited: www.blok-lok.com.
b. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc (including Dur-O-Wal brand): www.h-b.com.
c. WIRE-BOND: www.wirebond.com.
B. Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials.
2.06 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES
A. Mortar for Unit Masonry: ASTM C270, using the Proportion Specification.
1. Exterior, loadbearing masonry: Type N.
B. Admixtures: Add to mixture at manufacturer's recommended rate and in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry.
B. Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 4: Masonry Section 04810-5
C. Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry
work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other
sections
B. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until
building structure provides permanent bracing.
3.03 COLD AND HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with requirements of ACI 530/530.1/ERTA or applicable building code,
whichever is more stringent.
3.04 COURSING
A. Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.
B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of
uniform thickness.
C. Concrete Masonry Units:
1. Bond: Running.
2. Coursing: One unit and one mortar joint to equal 8 inches.
3. Mortar Joints: Concave.
3.05 PLACING AND BONDING
A. Lay hollow masonry units with face shell bedding on head and bed joints.
B. Buttering corners of joints or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not permitted.
C. Remove excess mortar and mortar smears as work progresses.
D. Interlock intersections and external corners.
E. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has achieved initial set. Where adjustment
must be made, remove mortar and replace.
F. Perform job site cutting of masonry units with proper tools to provide straight, clean,
unchipped edges. Prevent broken masonry unit corners or edges.
G. Cut mortar joints flush where wall tile is scheduled or resilient base is scheduled.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 4: Masonry Section 04810-6
3.06 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE – GENERAL
A. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or specified under specific wall type, install
horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches on center.
B. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below
openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening.
C. Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls.
D. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches.
E. Fasten anchors to structural framing and embed in masonry joints as masonry is laid.
F. Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or closer spacing is indicated under specific wall
type, space anchors at maximum of 36 inches horizontally and 24 inches vertically.
3.07 STUCCO COATING
A. Walls shall be finished with a stucco coating per Section 2.04.
B. Stucco shall be applied per ASTM C926.
C. Stucco shall be painted using an exterior latex enamel with a VOC content less than 250
supplied by Sherwin Williams, ICI Dulculax, or equal. Shine and color shall match the
existing exterior walls.
3.08 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A. Install preformed control joint device in continuous lengths. Seal butt and corner joints in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.09 BUILT-IN WORK
A. As work progresses, install built-in metal door frames and other items to be built into the
work and furnished under other sections.
B. Install built-in items plumb, level, and true to line.
C. Bed anchors of metal door frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with
grout.
D. Do not build into masonry construction organic materials that are subject to deterioration.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Mortar Tests: Test each type of mortar in accordance with ASTM C780.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 4: Masonry Section 04810-7
B. All materials testing shall be included in the CONTRACTOR’s bid.
3.11 CLEANING
A. Remove excess mortar and mortar droppings.
B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.
C. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.
D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.
3.12 PROTECTION
A. Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external
corners that are subject to damage by construction activities.
END OF SECTION
DIVISION 5
METALS
Division 5 - Metals
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 5: Metals Section 05052-1
SECTION 05052
ANCHOR BOLTS, TOGGLE BOLTS AND CONCRETE INSERTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope:
1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and
incidentals as shown on the Drawings, specified, and required to furnish and install anchor bolts, toggle bolts and concrete inserts.
B. This Section includes all anchor bolts, toggles and inserts required for the Work,
but not specified under other Sections.
C. The types of Work using the anchor bolts, toggles and inserts include, but are not
limited to the following: 1. Hangers and brackets.
2. Equipment. 3. Piping.
4. Grating and floor plate. 5. Electrical and Plumbing Work. 6. Metal and plastic fabrications.
7. Structural members and accessories.
D. Related Sections: CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the requirements of the Work in this Section along with the requirements of the Sections listed below which
includes, but is not necessary limited to, Work that is directly related to this
Section. 1. Section 05501 - Miscellaneous Metals.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Comply with the applicable provisions and
recommendations of the following, except as otherwise shown and specified. 1. ASTM A 36 - Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
2. ASTM A 123 - Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
3. ASTM A 153 - Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware.
4. ASTM A 307 - Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength.
5. ASTM A 484 - Specification for General Requirements for Stainless and
Heat-Resisting Steel Bars, Billets and Forgings.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 5: Metals Section 05052-2
6. ASTM A 536 - Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.
7. ASTM B 633 - Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel.
8. ASTM F 593 - Stainless Steel Bolts; Hex Cap Screws, and Studs. 9. Federal Specification FF-S-325 for Concrete Expansion Anchors.
10. Federal Specifications WW-H-171E for Malleable Iron. 11. ICBO, International Conference of Building Officials.
12. International Building Code
B. Inserts shall be ICBO, UL or FM approved.
C. Toggle Bolts: Federal Specification FF-B-588C - Type I, Class A, Style 1.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following:
1. Copies of manufacturer's specifications, load tables, dimension diagrams
and installation instructions for the devices. 2. Copies of ICBO, UL or FM Reports certifying load carrying capacities
and installation requirements for the anchorage devices.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 DESIGN CRITERIA
A. When the size, length or load carrying capacity of an anchor bolt, toggle bolt, or
concrete insert is not shown on the Drawings, provide the following: 1. For anchor bolts (cast-in-place), provide the size, length and capacity
required to carry the design load based on the values and requirements
given in the International Building Code. 2. For concrete anchors (epoxy adhesive types), stud type expansion anchors,
and concrete inserts, provide the size, length, type, and capacity required
to carry the design load based on the values and requirements given in the ICBO Evaluation Report, or similar certifications by UL or FM, for the
anchor to be used. Alternately the capacity may be based on independent
testing lab capacities for tension and shear strength using a minimum safety factor of four. Consideration of reduced capacity due to spacing
and edge distance shall be made.
B. Determine design loads as follows:
1. For equipment anchors, use the design load recommended by the equipment manufacturer.
2. For pipe hangers and supports, use the total weight of: pipe, fittings, and
water contained in pipe, plus the full weight of valves and accessories located between the hanger or support in question.
3. Allowances for vibration shall be included.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 5: Metals Section 05052-3
4. Concrete anchors shall develop ultimate shear and pull-out loads of not less than the following values in 4,000 psi concrete:
Bolt Diameter
(Inches) Min. Shear (Pounds)
Min. Pull-Out Load (Pounds)
½ 5,000 7,600 5/8 8,000 12,000 3/4 11,500 17,000
7/8 15,700 20,400 1 20,500 28,400
2.2 APPLICATION
A. In masonry, only anchor bolts shall be used.
B. Anchor Bolts (cast-in-place):
1. Shall be used where indicated and may be used where concrete anchors are indicated.
2. Where an anchor bolt is indicated, only a cast-in-place anchor bolt shall be
used, unless another anchor type is accepted by the ENGINEER. 3. Provide anchor bolts as shown on the Drawings or as required to secure
structural steel to concrete or masonry.
C. Epoxy Adhesive Anchors: 1. Use where subject to vibration or where buried or submerged. 2. Use for pipe supports.
3. Use in concrete.
4. Shall not be used for pipe hangers.
D. Concrete Inserts: 1. Use only where indicated on the Drawings.
2. Use for pipe hangers and supports for the pipe size and loading
recommended by the insert manufacturer.
E. Toggle Bolts:
1. Use for fastening brackets and other elements onto masonry units.
F. Stud Type Expansion Anchors:
1. Use only when indicted on the Drawings.
2.3 MATERIALS
A. Anchor Bolts:
1. Provide carbon steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307 - headed or non-
headed type where indicated.
2. In buried or submerged locations, provide stainless steel bolts complete
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 5: Metals Section 05052-4
with washers complying with ASTM F 593 - AISI Type 316 and with
nitronic 60 stainless steel nuts and locknuts.
3. For equipment, provide anchor bolts, which meet the equipment manufacturer's recommendations for size, material, and strength.
4. Provide anchor bolts as shown on the Drawings or as required to secure
structural steel to concrete or masonry. 5. Locate and accurately set the anchor bolts using templates or other devices
as required.
6. Protect threads and shank from damage during installation of equipment and structural steel.
7. Comply with manufacturer’s required embedment length and necessary
anchor bolt projection.
B. Epoxy Adhesive Anchors:
1. Provide stainless steel adhesive anchors complying with ASTM F 593 - AISI Type 316 with nitronic 60 stainless steel nuts and locknuts.
2. In buried or submerged locations, provide stainless steel adhesive anchors complying with ASTM F 593 - AISI Type 316 with nitronic 60 stainless
steel nuts and locknuts. 3. Anchors shall be of the size required for the concrete strength specified.
4. Adhesive anchors shall consist of threaded rods or bolts anchored with an
adhesive system into hardened concrete or grout-filled masonry. The adhesive system shall use a two-component adhesive mix and shall be
injected with a static mixing nozzle following manufacturer’s instructions.
The embedment depth of the rod/bolt shall provide a minimum allowable bond strength that is equal to the allowable tensile capacity of the rod/bolt,
unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. 5. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a. RE 500 Epoxy Injection Adhesive Anchor System, as
manufactured by Hilti. b. Or equal.
C. Concrete Inserts:
1. For piping, grating and floor plate, provide malleable iron inserts. Comply with Federal Specification WW-H-171E (Type 18). Provide
those recommended by the manufacturer for the required loading. 2. Finish shall be black. 3. Product and Manufacturer: Provide inserts by one of the following:
a. Figure 282, as manufactured by ITT Grinnell. b. No. 380, as manufactured by Hohmann and Barnard, Incorporated.
c. Or equal.
D. Toggle Bolts: 1. Provide spring-wing toggle bolts, with two-piece wings.
2. Provide carbon steel bolts with zinc coating in accordance with Federal Specification FF-S-325.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 5: Metals Section 05052-5
3. Product and Manufacturer: Provide toggle bolts by one of the following:
a. The Rawlplug Company, Incorporated. b. Haydon Bolts, Incorporated. c. Or equal.
E. Stud Type Expansion Anchors: 1. Product and manufacturer
a. Kwik-Bolt 3.
b. Or equal.
F. Powder activated fasteners and other types of bolts and fasteners not specified
herein shall not be used.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. CONTRACTOR shall examine areas and conditions under which anchor bolts, toggle bolts and concrete insert Work is to be installed.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Assure that embedded items are protected from damage and are not filled in with
concrete.
B. Use concrete inserts for pipe hangers and supports for the pipe size and loading
recommended by the insert manufacturer.
C. Use toggle bolts for fastening brackets and other elements onto masonry units.
D. For the epoxy adhesive anchors and adhesive material, CONTRACTOR shall comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions on the hole diameter and
depth required to fully develop the tensile strength of the adhesive anchor or
reinforcing bar. Contractor shall properly clean out the hole utilizing a wire brush and compressed air to remove all loose material from the hole, prior to installing
adhesive capsules or material.
3.3 CLEANING
A. After embedding concrete is placed, remove protection and clean bolts and
inserts.
END OF SECTION
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 5: Metals Section 05501-1
SECTION 05501
MISCELLANEOUS METALS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Miscellaneous metal fabrications including:
1. Miscellaneous aluminum.
2. Miscellaneous cast iron.
3. Miscellaneous stainless steel.
4. Miscellaneous structural steel.
5. Associated accessories to the above items.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 05052 - Anchor Bolts, Toggle Bolts, and Concrete Inserts.
2. Section 09800 - Special Coatings.
3. Section 09900 - Painting.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Aluminum Association (AA) - Specification M32-C22-A41 - Aluminum Finishes.
B. ANSI A12.1 - Safety Requirements for Floor and Wall Openings, Railings, and
Toeboards.
C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. A 36/A 36M - Specification for Structural Steel.
2. A 48 - Specification for Grey Iron Castings.
3. A 53 - Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless.
4. A 123 - Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coating on Iron and
Steel Products.
5. A 167 - Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel
Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.
6. A 269 - Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel
Tubing for General Service.
7. A 276 - Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes.
8. A 307 - Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 per square
inch Tensile.
9. A 325 - Specification for High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints.
10. A 489 - Specification for Carbon Steel Eyebolts.A 490 - Specification for
Heat-Treated, Steel Structural Bolts, 150 ksi Tensile Strength.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 5: Metals Section 05501-2
11. A 500 - Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.
12. A 501 - Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel
Structural Tubing.
13. A 554 - Specification for Welded Stainless Steel Mechanical Tubing.
14. A 635/A 635M - Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Heavy Thickness
Coils Carbon, Hot-Rolled.
15. A 653/A 653M - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-iron Alloy-coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process.
16. B 209 - Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
17. B 429 - Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extended Structural Pipe and
Tube.
18. B 308 - Specification for Aluminum Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural
Profiles.
19. B 221 - Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Extruded Bars,
Rods, Wire, Profiles and Tubes.
D. AWS D 1.1 - Structural Welding Code.
E. OSHA Part 1910.23 - Guarding Floor and Wall Openings and Holes.
F. International Building Code (IBC).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit fabrication drawings for approval.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Materials: Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, structural and
miscellaneous metals shall conform with the standards of the American Society for
Testing and Materials, including the following:
Item ASTM Standard No. Class, Grade Type or Alloy No.
Cast Iron
Cast Iron A 48 Class 40B
Steel
Galvanized sheet iron or steel A 653 Coating G90
Black steel, sheet or strip A 569 –
Coil (plate) A 635 –
Structural plate, bars, rolled shapes, and A 36 –
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 5: Metals Section 05501-3
Standard bolts, nuts, and washers A 307 –
High strength bolts, nuts and hardened flat washers A 325, A 490 –
Eyebolts A 489 Type 1
Tubing, cold-formed A 500 –
Tubing, hot-formed A 501 –
Steel pipe A 53 Grade B
Stainless Steel
Plate, sheet and strip A 167 Type 304 or 316*
Bars and shapes A 276 Type 304 or 316*
Aluminum
Sheet aluminum-flashing B 209 Alloy 5005-H14, 0.032 inches
minimum thickness
Sheet aluminum-structural B 209 Alloy 6061-T6
Structural aluminum B 308
B 209 Alloy 6061-T6
Extruded aluminum B 221 Alloy 6063-T42
* Use Type 304L or Type 316L if material will be welded.
B. Stainless steels are designated by type or series defined by ASTM.
C. Where stainless steel is welded, use low-carbon stainless steel.
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS ALUMINUM
A. General: Fabricate aluminum products, not covered separately herein, in accordance
with the best practices of the trade and field assemble by riveting or bolting. Do not
weld or flame cut.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS CAST IRON
A. General:
1. Tough, gray iron, free from cracks, holes, swells, and cold shuts.
2. Quality such that hammer blow will produce indentation on rectangular edge
of casting without flaking metal.
3. Before leaving the foundry, clean castings and apply 16 mil dry film
thickness coating of coal-tar epoxy, unless otherwise specified in or indicated
on the Drawings.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS STAINLESS STEEL
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 5: Metals Section 05501-4
A. Provide miscellaneous stainless steel items not specified herein as indicated on the
Drawings or specified elsewhere. Fabricate and install in accordance with the best
practices of the trade.
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURAL STEEL
A. Provide miscellaneous steel items not specified herein as indicted on the Drawings
or specified elsewhere. Fabricate and install in accordance with the best practices of
the trade.
2.6 RAILING
A. General: Design and fabricate assemblies to conform to current local, State, and
Occupational Safety and Health Administration standards and requirements.
B. CONTRACTOR shall provide aluminum or stainless steel railing.
C. Aluminum Railings (Nonwelded Pipe):
1. Rails, Posts, and Fitting-assembly Spacers:
a. ASTM B 429, 6063-T5, minimum Schedule 40, extruded aluminum
pipe of minimum 1.89 inch outside diameter and 0.14-inch wall
thickness.
b. Alloy 6063-T6 may be used for pieces requiring bending only.
c. Railing shall be attached to concrete structure with sidemount
brackets as indicated on Drawings.
2. Kick Plates: 6061-T6 aluminum alloy.
3. Fastening and Fasteners: As recommended or furnished by the manufacturer.
4. Other Parts: 6063 extruded aluminum, or F214 or F514.0 aluminum castings.
a. Fabrications: ASTM B 209 or ASTM B 221 extruded bars.
1.) Bases: 6061 or 6063 extruded aluminum alloy.
b. Plus Screws or Blind Rivets: Type 305 stainless steel.
c. Other Parts: Type 300 series stainless steel.
5. Finish of Aluminum Components:
a. Anodized finish, 0.7 mil think, applied to exposed surfaces after
cutting. Aluminum Association Specification M32-C22-A41.
b. Pretreat aluminum for cleaning and removing markings before
anodizing.
6. Fabrication and Assembly:
a. Fabricate posts in single, unspliced pipe length.
b. Perform without welding.
c. Do not epoxy bond the parts.
d. Maximum clear opening between assembled railing components as
indicted on the Drawings.
7. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 5: Metals Section 05501-5
a. Moultrie Manufacturing Company, Wesrail.
b. Julius Blum and Company, Inc., Connectorail.
c. Craneveyor Corporation Enerco Metals, C-V Rail.
D. Stainless Steel Pipe Railing:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. R & B Wagner, Inc.
b. Julius Blum and Company.
2. General: Prefabricated shop-assembled type, field welded type, or
mechanically joined type.
3. Materials: Type 304 or Type 316 stainless steel posts, rails, brackets, and
accessory parts.
a. Railings and Posts: Nominal 1-1/2 inch, Schedule 5 pipe with
minimum 1.900 inch outer diameter and 0.065 inch wall thickness,
b. Post Insert Reinforcing for All Posts: 1.750 inch outside diameter
pipe, of 0.083 inch wall thickness, and 26 inches long.
c. Fasteners, Connection Plates, Splice Bars, and Fittings: Type 304 or
Type 316 stainless steel.
d. Stainless Steel Finish: Number 4 NAAMM finish.
4. Fabrication:
a. Fabricate rails and posts to be in same plane.
b. Fabricate posts in single, unspliced pipe length.
c. Make railing sections between splices 20 feet maximum.
d. Form bends in pipe without use of fittings where practical. Form with
internal madrels on power benders.
e. Where railing is welded, make intersections and joints with
continuous 360 degree welds and grind welds smooth.
f. Where railing is mechanically joined, make joints with mechanical
connections utilizing stainless steel machine screws with lock
washers and threaded tubular rivets.
E. Fastenings and Fasteners: As recommended or furnished by railing manufacturer for
use with this system.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Examine Work in place to verify that it is satisfactory to
receive the Work of this Section. If unsatisfactory conditions exist, dot not begin this
Work until such conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install products as indicated on the Drawings, and in accordance with shop drawings
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 5: Metals Section 05501-6
and manufacturer’s printed instructions, as applicable except where specified
otherwise.
3.3 RAILING
A. During construction, keep exterior surfaces of railing covered with 0.4 millimeters,
minimum, heat shrink polyethylene film.
B. Do not remove protective film before railing have been accepted by OWNER nor
before other Work in proximity of handrails and guardrails has been completed.
C. Discontinue railing at lighting fixtures.
D. Provide 1/8 inch diameter weep hole at base of each post.
E. Where protection is applied for prevention of dissimilar materials electrolysis, make
application such that none of the protective material is visible in the completed
assembly.
F. Space posts as indicated on the Drawings.
G. Anchor post into concrete by grouting posts into core drilled holes in concrete, into
stainless steel sleeves cast in concrete; or bracket mount to face of concrete surfaces;
as specified and indicated on the Drawings.
H. Space rails as indicated on the Drawings.
I. Make adequate provision for expansion and contraction of kickplates and rails.
Make provisions for removable sections where indicated on the Drawings.
J. Make lower rails a single, unspliced length between posts, or continuous.
K. Make top rails continuous whenever possible, and attach single, unspliced length to
3 posts minimum.
L. Draw up fasteners tight with hand wrench or screw driver.
M. Space attachment brackets as indicated on shop drawings or in manufacturer’s
installation instructions.
N. Completed installation shall have railing rigid and free of play at joints and
attachments.
O. Protect railing finish from scratches, gouges, dents, stains, and other damage.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 5: Metals Section 05501-7
P. Replace damaged or disfigured railing with new.
Q. Shortly before final acceptance of the Work, and after removal of protective
polyethylene film, clean railing with mild detergent or with soap water.
R. After cleaning, thoroughly rinse railing and wipe with soft cloth.
S. Erect railing straight, level, plumb, and true to the positions as indicated on the
Drawings. Correct deviations from true line of grade which are visible to the eye.
3.4 MISCELLANEOUS ALUMINUM
A. Coat aluminum angles cast into concrete with bituminous materials.
END OF SECTION
DIVISION 7
THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
Division 7 - Thermal and Moisture Protection
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 7: Thermal and Moisture Protection Section 07900-1
SECTION 07900
JOINT SEALERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Sealants and joint backing.
B. Precompressed foam sealers.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C 834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants.
B. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
C. ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants.
D. ASTM D 1667 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Poly (Vinyl Chloride) Foam (Closed-Cell).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01340 for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, substrate preparation, limitations, and color availability.
C. Product Schedule: Provide schedule indicating manufacturer's products matched to the same Sealant Types (Type ES-1 and Type ES-2, etc.) listed in Part 2 of this Section. 1. Failure to provide product schedule will result in immediate rejection of the
submittal.
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, surface preparation, and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience.
B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years experience.
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 7: Thermal and Moisture Protection Section 07900-2
1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate the work with all sections referencing this section.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Correct defective work within a one year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
B. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SEALANTS
A. Type ES-1: General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, M, G, A and O; multi-component. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 2. Product: Sonolastic NP 2 manufactured by Sonneborn Building Products
Div., ChemRex, Inc: www.chemrex.com or equal.
B. Type ES-2: Self-leveling polyurethane; ASTM C 920, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T and M; multi-component. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 2. Product: Sonolastic SL2 manufactured by Sonneborn Building Products Div.,
ChemRex, Inc: www.chemrex.com or equal.
C. Type AE-1 - General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF single component, paintable. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 2. Product: AC-20 manufactured by Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com or
equal.
2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended bysealant manufacturer to suit application.
B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials.
C. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width.
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 7: Thermal and Moisture Protection Section 07900-3
D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work.
B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant.
B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C 1193.
D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions.
B. Completely seal joints indicated on Drawings and as required to render weathertightness, close openings, and allow movement of materials.
C. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C 1193.
D. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth ratio, neck dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer, except where specific dimensions are indicated.
E. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.
F. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.
G. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
H. Tool joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
I. Do not lap or feather onto adjacent surfaces.
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 7: Thermal and Moisture Protection Section 07900-4
J. Joint Backing: Do not stretch; avoid joints except at corners, ends, and intersections; install with face 1/8 to 1/4 inch below adjoining surface.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.
B. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this Section.
3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Protect sealants until cured.
3.6 SCHEDULE
A. Exterior Joint Sealants: 1. Exterior Joints for Which No Other Sealant Type is Indicated: Type ES-1;
colors as selected. 2. Expansion Joints in Paving Sloped 1:50 or Less: Type ES-2. 3. Expansion Joints in Paving Sloped More than 1:50: Type ES-1. 4. Joints Between Piping and Walls: Type ES-1. 5. Joints Between Exterior Metal Frames and Adjacent Work: Type ES-1.
B. Interior Joint Sealants:
1. Interior Joints for Which No Other Sealant is Indicated: Type ES-1; colors as selected.
2. Joints Between Metal Frames and Adjacent Work: Type AE-1. 3. Joints Between Piping and Walls: Type ES-1.
C. Colors: Except for interior sealants to be painted and as may otherwise be indicated, provide colors that match adjacent surfaces.
END OF SECTION
DIVISION 9
FINISHES
Division 9 - Finishes
Division 9: Finishes Section 09800-10
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
SECTION 09800
SPECIAL COATINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: All factory applied and field applied coatings shall follow the provisions of this Section unless other coating requirements are referenced in other specific equipment specification sections. Equipment vendors shall conform to this specification section for factory applied coatings. All exposed surfaces of process equipment, process piping, process piping supports, and other related materials shall be shop primed and field finished, unless specifically stated otherwise. Under all circumstances, stainless steel piping shall not be painted.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. A159.1 - Surface Preparation Specifications.
2. Z54.1 - Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials.
C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 101 - Life Safety Code.
D. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): 1. SP-1 - Solvent Cleaning. 2. SP-2 - Hand Tool Cleaning. 3. SP-3 - Power Tool Cleaning. 4. SP-5 - White Metal Blast. 5. SP-6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning. 6. SP-7 - Brush-Off Blast Cleaning. 7. SP-10 - Near White Blast Cleaning. 8. SP-11 - Power Tool Cleaning to Near White Metal. 9. SSPC 13 - Preparation of Concrete. 10. Steel Structures Painting Manual, Volumes 1 and 2. 11. Pictorial Standards for Surface Preparation - SSPC-VIS 1. 12. Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness With Magnetic Gages - SSPC SP A2.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
Division 9: Finishes Section 09800-11
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
A. Submerged Metal: Steel or iron surfaces below tops of channel or structure walls which will contain water even when above expected water level.
B. Submerged Concrete Surfaces: Surfaces which are or will be: 1. Underwater. 2. In structures which normally contain water. 3. Below tops of walls or water containing structures.
C. Dry Film Thickness: Thickness of fully cured coating, measured in mils.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coating materials for concrete and metal surfaces shall be especially adapted for use in wastewater treatment plants.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit in accordance with Sections 01340 and 09900.
B. Certificates: Submit in accordance with Article 1.06.
C. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Submit in accordance with requirements for Product Data and Section 09900.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of Applicator: 1. Experienced with at least 3 years experience applying type or types of
coatings under conditions similar to those of the Work. 2. Manufacturer approved applicator when manufacturer has approved
applicator program. 3. Approved and licensed bypolymorphic polyester resin manufacturer to apply
polymorphic polyester resin coating system.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Include requirements concerning the following: 1. Volatile organic compound limitations. 2. Coatings containing lead compounds. 3. Abrasives and abrasive blast cleaning techniques, and disposal. 4. NSF certification of coatings for use in potable water supply systems.
C. Certification: Certify that applicable pigments meet the specifications.
D. Compatibility of Coatings: Use products by same manufacturer for prime coats, intermediate coats, and finish coats on same surface, unless specified otherwise.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
Division 9: Finishes Section 09800-12
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
A. Regulatory Requirements: In accordance with Section 09900.
1.8 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Materials: Provide one extra gallon of each type of coating.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Products specified are manufactured by Tnemec.
B. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following manufacturers are acceptable: 1. Ameron Protective Coatings Division 2. Carboline Protective Coatings. 3. Porter Coatings. 4. Sherwin Williams. 5. Tnemec.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. All materials used must not contain more than 3.5 LBS/GAL VOC as applied (in thinned state) unless noted otherwise.
B. For unspecified materials such as turpentine or linseed oil, provide manufacturer’s recommended products.
C. Paint Systems - General:
1. P=prime coat. I=intermediate coat. F1, F2,. Fn = first finish coat, second finish coat . . . nth finish coat, color as selected by OWNER.
2. If two finish coats of same material are required, CONTRACTOR may, at his option and by written approval from paint manufacturer and ENGINEER, apply one coat equal to mil thickness of two coats specified.
3. Paint thickness specified are minimum dry mil thickness.
D. Paint Systems: 1. System No. 1 - Polyamide Epoxy - For ferrous metals and metals located at
and above a line 6 inches above the high liquid level and other non- submerged areas (except galvanized steel):
2. Surfaces include but are not limited to process steel and ductile iron piping,
pumps, equipment and pipe supports, and process mechanical equipment.
Tnemec
Division 9: Finishes Section 09800-13
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
P1=Series 66-1211 VOC=3.42 LBS/GAL thinned 1 coat, 3-5 mils DFT (Dry Film Thickness) F1=Series 66 1 coat, 4-6 mils DFT F2=Series 66
1 coat, 4-6- mils DFT F2E=73 Series 1 coat, 2.5-3.5 mils DFT VOC=3.5 LBS/GAL thinned Alternate Tnemec system P1=Series N140I, 1 coat, 4-6 mils F1=Series 73, 1 coat, 3-3.5 mils DFT
3. System 2 - Not Used.
4. System No. 3 - Polyamide Epoxy - For all assembled galvanized steel items; and all plastic including PVC and CPVC surfaces. Exposed PVC and CPVC piping shall be painted.
Tnemec
P1=Series 66 VOC=3.42 LBS/GAL thinned 1 coat, 3-5 mils DFT *F1=Series 66 1 coat, 4-6 mils DFT
F1E=73 Series VOC=3.5 LBS/GAL thinned 1 coat, 2.5-3.5 mils DFT * Replace F1 with F1E at exterior
5. System No. 4 - Polyamide Epoxy - For field cut edge of galvanized steel where top coat is required.
Tnemec
P1=Series 66 VOC=3.42 LBS/GAL thinned 1 coat, 3-5 mils DFT *F1=Series 66 VOC=3.42 LBS/GAL thinned 1 coat, 4-6 mils DFT F1E=73 Series VOC=3.50 LBS/GAL thinned 1 coat, 2.5-3.5mils DFT * Replace F1 with F1E at exterior
6. System No. 5 - Polyamide Epoxy - For bituminous coated pipe and materials.
Tnemec
P1=Series 66 VOC=3.42 LBS/GAL thinned 1 coat, 3-5 mils DFT F1=Series 66
Division 9: Finishes Section 09800-14
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
1 coat, 4-6 mils DFT *F2=Series 73 VOC=3.50 LBS/GAL thinned 1 coat, 2 .5-3.5 milsDFT * Add F2 at exterior
E. Sandblast Abrasive:
1. Sandblast media shall be clean copper slag of the proper particle size to produce the specified profile. Media shall not contain any extraneous matter.
2. Use proper equipment and abrasives when blast cleaning to produce the mil profile, within the range of 2.0 to 3.5 or as recommended by the coating manufacturer. Do not reuse sand or flat abrasives.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL PREPARATION
A. Prepare surfaces in accordance with coating manufacturer’s instructions, unless more stringent requirements follow.
B. Protect following surfaces from abrasive blasting by masking, or other means: 1. Threaded portions of valve and gate stems. 2. Machined surfaces for sliding contact. 3. Surfaces to be assembled against gaskets. 4. Surfaces of shafting on which sprockets are to fit. 5. Surfaces of shafting on which bearings are to fit. 6. Machined surfaces of bronze trim, including those slide gates. 7. Cadmium-plated items except cadmium-plated, zinc-plated, or sherardized
fasteners used in assembly of equipment requiring abrasive blasting. 8. Galvanized items, unless scheduled to be coated.
C. Protect installed equipment, mechanical drives, and adjacent coated equipment from abrasive blasting to prevent damage caused by entering sand or dust.
D. Concrete: Clean concrete surfaces of dust, mortar, fins, loose concrete particles, form release materials, oil, and grease. Fill voids so that surface is smooth. Etch or brush off-blast clean (SSPC SP-7) as recommended by coating manufacturer.
E. Ferrous Metal Surfaces: 1. Remove grease and oil in accordance with SSPC SP-1. 2. Remove rust, scale, and welding slag and spatter, and prepare surfaces in
accordance with SSPC SP-10. 3. Abrasive blast surfaces within 12 hours of coating.
4. When abrasive blasted surfaces rust or discolor before coating, abrasive blast surfaces again to remove rust and discoloration.
5. Do not coat surfaces before abrasive blasting. 6. When metal surfaces are exposed because of coating damage, abrasive blast
surfaces before touching-up.
Division 9: Finishes Section 09800-15
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
F. Ferrous Metal Surfaces not to be Submerged: Abrasive blast in accordance with SSPC SP-10, unless blasting may damage adjacent surfaces, prohibited or specified otherwise. Where not possible to abrasive blast, power tool clean surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP-11.
G. Ferrous Metal Surfaces to be Submerged: Unless specified otherwise, abrasive blast in accordance with SSPC SP-10 or better to clean and provide roughened surface profile of not less than 2 mils and not more than 4 mils in depth when measured with Elcometer 123, or as recommended by the coating manufacturer.
H. Sherardized, Aluminum, Copper, and Bronze Surfaces: Prepare in accordance with paint manufacture’s instructions.
I. Galvanized Surface: 1. Degrease or solvent clean to remove oily residue. 2. Power tool or hand tool clean or whip abrasive blast.
3. Apply metal pretreatment within 24 hours before coating galvanized surfaces that cannot be thoroughly abraded physically, such as bolts, nuts, or preformed channels.
J. Shop Primed Metal: 1. Correct abrades, scratched or otherwise damaged areas of shop prime coat by
sanding or abrasive blasting in accordance with SSPC SP-6 for metal surfaces not to be submerged and SSPC SP-10 for metal surfaces to be submerged.
2. When entire shop priming fails or has weathered excessively, or when recommended by paint manufacturer, abrasive blast shop prime coat to remove entire coat and prepare surface in accordance with SSPC SP-10.
3. When incorrect prime coat is applied, remove incorrect prime coat by abrasive blasting in accordance with SSPC SP-10.
K. Non-metallic surfaces: Prepare surface per manufacturer’s recommendation.
L. Abrasive blast cadmium-plated, zinc plated, or sherardized fasteners in same manner as unprotected metal when used in assembly of equipment designated for abrasive blasting.
M. Abrasive blast components to be attached to surfaces which cannot be abrasive blasted before components are attached.
N. Grind sharp edges to approximately 1/8 inch radius.
3.2 GENERAL PROTECTION
A. Protect adjacent surfaces not to be coated from spatter and droppings with drop cloths and other coverings. 1. Mask off surfaces of items not to be coated or remove items from area.
Division 9: Finishes Section 09800-16
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Paint metal unless specified otherwise.
C. Verify metal surface preparation immediately before applying coating in accordance with SSPC Pictorial Surface Preparation Standard.
D. Allow surfaces to dry, except where coating manufacturer requires surface wetting before coating.
E. Wash coat and prime sherardized, aluminum, copper, and bronze surfaces, or prime with manufacturer’s recommended special primer.
F. Prime shop primed metal surfaces. Spot prime exposed metal of shop primes surfaces before applying primer over entire surface.
G. Apply minimum number of specified coats.
H. Apply coats to thicknesses specified, especially at edges and corners.
I. Apply additional coats when necessary to achieve specified thicknesses.
J. Coat surfaces without drops, ridges, waves, holiday, laps, or brush marks.
K. Remove spatter and droppings after completion of coating.
L. When multiple coats of same material are specified, tint prime coat and intermediate coats with suitable pigment to distinguish each coat.
M. Dust coatings between coats. Lightly sand and dust surfaces to receive high gloss finishes, unless instructed otherwise by coating manufacturer.
N. Spray Application:
1. When using sprayapplication, apply coating to thickness not greater than that suggested in coating manufacturer’s instructions for brush coat application.
2. Use airless spray method, unless air spray method is required by coating manufacturer’s instruction or these Specifications.
3. Conduct spray coating under controlled conditions. 4. Protect adjacent construction and property from coating mist or spray.
O. Drying and Recoating:
1. Limit drying time to that required by these Specifications or coating manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Do not allow excessive drying time or exposure which may impair bond
Division 9: Finishes Section 09800-17
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
between coats. 3. Recoat epoxies within time limits recommended by epoxy manufacturer. 4. When time limits are exceeded, abrasive blast coat prior to applying another
coat. 5. When limitations on time between abrasive blasting and coating cannot be
met before attachment of components to surfaces which cannot be abrasive blasted, coat components before attachment.
6. Ensure primer and intermediate coats of coating are unscarred and completely integral at time of application of each succeeding coat.
7. Touch up suction spots between coats and apply additional coats where required to produce finished surface of solid, even color, free of defects.
8. Leave no holidays. 9. Sand and recoat scratched, contaminated, or otherwise damaged coating
surfaces so damages are invisible to naked eye.
P. Dry film thickness (DFT) readings of the coating are to be taken to provide reasonable assurance that the specified minimum DFT has been achieved. A minimum of five (5) separate spot measurements shall be made over every 100 square feet in area. Each spot measurement shall consist of an average of three (3) gage readings next to each other no further than six (6) inches apart. Each spot measurement must be within the specified minimum thickness. The single gage readings, however, making up the spot measurement, are permitted to be no less than 80 percent of the specified minimum thickness.
3.4 EPOXY AND POLYURETHANE COATING SYSTEM
A. Preparation: 1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with general preparation requirements, unless
more stringent requirements follow. 2. Prepare concrete surfaces per general preparation requirements unless more
stringent requirements are required by the manufacturer. 3. Touch up shop primed steel and miscellaneous iron. 4. Coating shall be applied to ferrous metal surfaces that have been abrasive
blasted at job site within twelve (12) hours of abrasive blasting. When cleaned surfaces rust or discolor, surfaces shall be re-blasted in accordance with Section 3.01.
5. Degrease or solvent clean, whip abrasive blast, power tool, or hand tool clean galvanized metal surfaces.
6. Lightly abrasive blast or sand fiberglass and plastic to be coated to roughen surfaces just prior to painting.
B. Application:
1. Apply coatings in accordance with general application requirements, unless more stringent requirements follow.
3.5 HIGH SOLIDS POLYAMINE EPOXY SYSTEM
Division 9: Finishes Section 09800-18
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
A. Preparation: 1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with general preparation requirements, unless
more stringent requirements follow. 2. Abrasive blast ferrous metal surfaces to be submerged at jobsite in
accordance with SSPC SP-10 within 12 hours of coating. When cleaned surfaces rust or discolor, abrasive blast surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP- 10.
3. Coating shall be applied to ferrous metal surfaces that have been abrasive blasted at job site within twelve (12) hours of abrasive blasting. When cleaned surfaces rust or discolor, surfaces shall be re-blasted in accordance with Section 3.01.
B. Application:
1. Apply coatings in accordance with general application requirements, unless more stringent requirements follow.
2. Recoat or apply succeeding epoxy coats within time limits recommended by manufacturer. Prepare surfaces for recoating in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
3. Coat metal to be submerged before installation when necessary, to obtain acceptable finish and to prevent damage to other surfaces.
4. Paint entire surface of support brackets, stem guides, pipe clips, fasteners, and other metal devices bolted to concrete.
5. Paint surface of items to be exposed and adjacent 1 inch to be concealed when embedded in concrete or masonry.
3.6 EPOXY, POLYURETHANE AND CLEAR COAT SYSTEM
A. Preparation: 1. Prepare surfaces in accordance with general preparation.
2. Aluminum surfaces must have a surface profile which can be created by either brush-off blast cleaning or chemical etching. Manufacturer’s representative shall determine acceptability of surface preparation prior to primer application.
3. All surfaces to be clean, dry and free of contaminants prior to coating application.
B. Application: 1. Apply coatings in accordance with general application requirements, unless
more stringent requirements follow.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
1. Inspection will be performed prior to and following the abrasive blasting and following each coat. Strip and remove defective coats, prepare surfaces and recoat. When approved, apply next coat.
B. Control and check dry film thicknesses and integrity of coatings.
Division 9: Finishes Section 09800-19
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
C. Measure dry film thickness with calibrated thickness gauge. D. Dry film thicknesses may be checked with Elcometer or Positector 2000.
E. Verify coat integrity with low-voltage holiday detector. Allow OWNER to use detector for additional checking.
F. Check wet film thickness before coal tar epoxy coating cures on concrete or non- ferrous metal substrates.
3.8 SCHEDULES OF ITEMS NOT REQUIRING COATING
A. Items that have received final coat at factory and not listed to receive coating in the field.
B. Brass, bronze, copper, plastic, rubber, stainless steel, chrome, everdur or lead.
C. Buried or encased piping or conduit.
D. Galvanized pipe trays and cable trays.
E. Grease fittings.
F. Steel to be encased in concrete or masonry.
G. Nameplates.
H. Serial number tags.
I. Control Panels.
J. Instruments.
K. Electrical Conduit.
3.9 SURFACES TO BE COATED IN THE FIELD
A. In general, coat steel and iron surfaces unless specified or otherwise indicated on the Drawings or listed above in Section 3.08. Coat pvc and cpvc piping. Coat concrete surfaces and anodized aluminum only when specified or indicated on the Drawings.
END OF SECTION
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance Systems and WWTP Improvement
2015
Specifications
Division 9: Finishes Section 09900-1
SECTION 09900
PAINT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Surface preparation.
B. Field application of paints.
C. See Schedule - Surfaces to be Finished, at end of Section.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 09800 - Special Coatings: Process piping and process equipment.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D 16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and
Applications.
B. ASTM D 4442 - Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement
of Wood and Wood-Base Materials.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. In addition to the following definitions, conform to ASTM D 16 for interpretation of
terms used in this section:
1. Buried - Covered with earth.
2. Exposed or Exposed Surfaces - Areas visible when permanent or built-in
fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, grilles, and
similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required,
to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01340 for submittal procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide data on all finishing products.
1. Paint System Identification: Identify products according to the identification
numbers for each interior and exterior paint system, as indicated in Part 2 of
this Section.
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance Systems and WWTP Improvement
2015
Specifications
Division 9: Finishes Section 09900-2
C. Paint Samples: Submit two paper chip samples, 3 x 3 inches in size illustrating range
of colors and textures available for each surface finishing product scheduled.
D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures and
substrate conditions requiring special attention.
E. Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and
coated surfaces.
F. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the Quality Assurance Article
to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects,
with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects or engineers and
owners, and other specified information.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products
specified in this section with minimum 10 years documented experience.
B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this
section with minimum five years documented experience.
1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke rating and VOC requirements for
products and finishes.
B. Lead, Heavy Metals, Cadmium, and Chromates: Lead, Heavy Metals, Cadmium, and
Chromate content of painting materials shall not exceed amount permitted byfederal,
state, and local authorities.
C. Coatings for surfaces in contact with potable water or water being treated for potable
use shall not impart any taste or odor to the water or result in any organic or inorganic
content in excess of the maximum contaminant level established by applicable laws
or regulations.
D. Comply with governing code requirements for air quality and material disposal
regulations.
1.8 MOCK-UP
A. Provide mock-ups, for each of the following substrates, illustrating painting and
coating colors and finishes. 1. Metal: Provide panel equal to 4 square feet in size for each color and finish.
B. Locate where directed by ENGINEER.
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance Systems and WWTP Improvement
2015
Specifications
Division 9: Finishes Section 09900-3
C. Mock-up(s) may remain as part of the Work.
D. Work advanced without approved job mock-ups shall be completely removed and
re-installed without additional compensation to OWNER.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify
acceptability.
B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot
number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup
requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing.
C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a
maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's
instructions.
D. Provide fire extinguishers and post caution signs warning against smoking and open
flame when working with flammable materials.
E. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by
painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as
approved by ENGINEER. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted
finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their
work after completing painting operations.
1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the
temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.
B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is
outside the humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.
C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50
degrees F for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.
D. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers - Provide paint and coating products by one of the following:
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance Systems and WWTP Improvement
2015
Specifications
Division 9: Finishes Section 09900-4
1. AkzoNobel Inc.: www.interpon.com.
2. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Moore): www.benjaminmoore.com.
3. Carboline Company (Carboline): www.carboline.com.
4. Coronado Paint Company (Coronado): www.coronadopaint.com.
5. Diamond Vogel (DV): http://www.diamondvogel.com.
6. Glidden Professional: www.gliddenprofessional.com.
7. Kwal-Howells, Inc. (KH): www.kwalhowells.com.
8. Okon, Inc. (OKON): www.okoninc.com.
9. Sherwin- Williams Company (SW): www.sherwinwilliams.com.
10. Tnemec Company Inc (Tnemec): www.tnemec.com
11. Or equal.
2.2 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL
A. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the Paint Schedule indicates that a surface or
material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the Paint Schedules does not
specifically mention an item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as
similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not the Schedules indicates color(s).
If the Schedule does not indicate color(s) or finishes, the ENGINEER will select
from standard colors and finishes available.
B. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition
to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.
C. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, except field-catalyzed coatings. Prepare
pigments:
1. To a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed
to a homogeneous coating. 2. For good flow and brushing properties.
3. Capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
D. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish-coat
materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under
conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on
testing and field experience.
1. Review other Sections of these Specifications in which prime paints are to be
provided to ensure compatibility of the total coatings system for the various
substrates. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the compatibility of all
shop primed and field painted items.
2. Furnish information on the characteristics of the finish materials proposed to
use, to ensure that compatible prime coats are used. Provide Tie coats over
incompatible primers or remove and reprime as required. Notify ENGINEER,
in writing, of anticipated problems using the coating systems as specified
with substrates primed by others.
E. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore
damaged or defaced painted surfaces.
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance Systems and WWTP Improvement
2015
Specifications
Division 9: Finishes Section 09900-5
2.3 PAINT SYSTEMS - EXTERIOR
A. Paint WE-OP-3A-1 - Not Used:
B. Paint CE-OP-3E-1 - Not Used:
C. Paint CE-OP-2AC-3 - Not Used:
D. Paint ME-OP-3E-4 - Ferrous and Galvanized Metals, Primed or Unprimed,
Opaque, 3 Coats: 1. Touch-up: Moore; Alkyd Metal Primer M06.
2. Primer: Moore; Alkyd Metal Primer M06; One coat, 1.3-1.5 dry mils.
3. Gloss Finish: Moore; Urethane Alkyd Gloss Enamel M22; Two coats, 2.0-2.2
dry mils.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive Work as instructed by the product
manufacturer.
B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report
any condition that may potentially affect proper application.
C. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.
D. Test previously painted surfaces for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.
E. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not
apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following
maximums: 1. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D 4442.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Perform all preparation and cleaning procedures as specified herein and in strict
accordance with the paint manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate
and atmospheric condition.
B. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil
and grease with clean cloths and cleaning solvents prior to mechanical cleaning.
Program the cleaning and painting so that dust and other contaminants from the
cleaning process will not fall in wet, newly painted surfaces.
C. Surface Appurtenances: Remove or mask electrical plates, hardware, light
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance Systems and WWTP Improvement
2015
Specifications
Division 9: Finishes Section 09900-6
fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.
D. Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section.
E. Marks: Seal marks which maybleed through surface finishes with tie coat
compatible with paint.
F. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew in accordance with paint
manufacturer's recommendations.
G. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and
wash with solvent.
H. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale,
weld splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove
by hand wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a
treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are
similarly cleaned. Prime paint entire surface; spot prime after repairs.
I. Factory Finished Surfaces to be Field Painted: Lightly sand to create a dull
surface and as required by paint manufacturer. Provide tie coat over entire
factory-finished surfaces as required by paint manufacturer.
J. Shop-Primed and Non-Shop-Primed Ferrous Surfaces to be Finish Painted:
Clean and prepare in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Feather
edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Prime bare steel surfaces.
K. Interior Wood Items to Receive Opaque Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior
to priming. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes
and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats. Back prime concealed
surfaces before installation.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions:
1. Anyspot measurement found below the required minimum dryfilm
thickness shall be repainted by the CONTRACTOR in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions, at no additional cost to the OWNER.
B. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is
applied.
C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry
before next coat is applied.
D. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance Systems and WWTP Improvement
2015
Specifications
Division 9: Finishes Section 09900-7
preceding coat unless otherwise approved.
E. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles
just prior to applying next coat.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The ENGINEER reserves the right to test surfaces, film thickness, and paint products
at any time and as often as the ENGINEER deems necessary during the period when
paint is being applied:
1. Anyspot measurement found below the required minimum dryfilm thickness
shall be repainted by the CONTRACTOR in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions, at no additional cost to the OWNER.
2. Do not paint unsatisfactory surfaces until they have been corrected and are in
accordance with paint manufacturer's recommendations.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Collect waste material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal
containers, and remove daily from site.
3.6 SCHEDULE - SURFACES TO BE FINISHED
A. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:
1. Items fully factory-finished unless specified herein or specifically noted.
2. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels.
3. Stainless steel, or chromium plated items.
4. Bronze and brass items.
5. Anodized aluminum items:
a. Paint concealed aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete, and
dissimilar materials as described below under Schedule - Paint
Systems. B. Paint the surfaces described below under Schedule - Paint Systems.
C. Process Piping and Process Equipment: Coat in accordance with Section 09800.
D. Mechanical and Electrical: Use paint systems defined for the substrates to be
finished.
1. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and
telephone equipment before installing equipment.
3.7 SCHEDULE - PAINT SYSTEMS
A. Galvanized Metals for Which No Other Paint System is indicated: ME-OP-3E-4.
B. Ferrous Metals for Which No Other Paint System is indicated: ME-OP-3E-4.
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance Systems and WWTP Improvement
2015
Specifications
Division 9: Finishes Section 09900-8
3.8 SCHEDULE - COLORS
A. Colors: Provide colors as selected by ENGINEER from manufacturer's standards.
END OF SECTION
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 9: Finishes Section 09970-1
SECTION 09970
CONCRETE COATING SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: 1. This section specifies the coating system, surface preparation, and application
requirements for coating new and existing concrete surfaces. The coating schedule shall be as follows:
System Description Coating Surfaces Coating Requirement Coating System
1. Headworks Wetwell Interior wall & floor New coating CS-A 2. New Manholes Interior wall & floor New coating CS-A
1.02 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing Materials: 1. D4258: Standard Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating. 2. D4260: Standard Practice for Liquid and Gelled Acid Etching of Concrete. 3. D4262: Standard Test Method for pH of Chemically Cleaned or Etched
Concrete Surfaces. 4. D16: Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and
Applications. 5. D4541: Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using
Portable Adhesion Testers. 6. E162: Standard Test Method for Surface Flammability of Materials Using a
Radiant Heat Energy Source 7. D3960: Standard Definitions and Terminology
B. Where standards of surface preparation are described by citing SSPC specification numbers reference is made to the “Steel Structures Painting Manual” Volume 2 published by the Steel Structures Painting Council.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A. Dry Film Thickness (DFT): The thickness of one fully cured continuous application of coating.
B. Field Coat: The application or the completion of application of the coating system
after installation of the surface at the work site. C. Shop Coat: One or more coats applied in a shop or plant prior to shipment to the
site of erection or fabrication, where the field or finishing coat is applied. D. Tie Coat: An intermediate coat used to bond different types of paint coats.
Coatings used to improve the adhesion of a succeeding coat.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 9: Finishes Section 09970-2
E. Photochemically Reactive Organic Material: Any organic material that sunlight will
cause to react with components in the atmosphere giving rise to secondary contaminants and reaction intermediates in the atmosphere which can have detrimental effects.
F. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: The portion of the coating that is a
compound of carbon, is photochemically reactive, and evaporates during drying or curing, expressed in grams per liter or pounds per gallon.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01340:
1. Product Data: Fully describe all products proposed for use. 2. For each primer and finish coating, the Contractor shall provide the
manufacturer's application instructions, which shall include the following: a. Surface preparation requirements.
b. Primer type, where required. c. Maximum dry and wet mil thickness per coat. d. Minimum and maximum curing time between coats, including
atmospheric conditions for each. e. Curing time before submergence in liquid. f. Thinner to be used, if any, with each coating.
g. Ventilation requirements. h. Minimum atmospheric conditions during which the coat shall be
applied. i. Allowable application methods. j. Maximum allowable moisture content. k. Maximum storage life.
3. Samples: Submit two 8-1/2- x 11-inch samples of the complete system. 4. Sample color selection chart. 5. Manufacturer’s certification attesting that the applicator is qualified and
approved to install the products specified herein. The certification shall include the following applicator qualifications:
a. Current Arizona contractor’s license or equivalent. b. The applicator shall demonstrate applicable experience and
performance history by submitting references from three other projects (within the past five years) using the same or similar corrosion protection system. Include project name, client name, date of work, engineer, and name and phone number of a contact person familiar with the project.
c. Qualifications for testing for holidays and other discontinuities. 6. The manufacturer’s field representative verification specified herein. 7. Warranty bond specified herein. 8. Provide Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all products.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Environmental Regulatory Requirements: 1. All work, material, procedures, and practices under this Section shall conform
to requirements of the local air quality requirements. Prime or finish coat
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 9: Finishes Section 09970-3
painting done in locations other than the project site shall be in accordance with air quality regulations in effect at the place the coating is applied. Products specified herein are, to the best of the ENGINEER’S knowledge, in compliance with the applicable volatile organic compounds (VOC)
1 levels
allowable at the date these Specifications were issued for bid. 2. If the CONTRACTOR applies coatings that have been modified or thinned
other than as recommended by manufacturer, he will be responsible for any fines, costs, remedies or legal actions that may result.
B. Manufacturer’s Recommendations: Comply with the disposal instructions of the
coating material manufacturer. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY
A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's labeled, unopened containers. Each container shall bear the manufacturer's name, coating type, batch number, date of manufacture, storage life, and special directions.
B. Materials shall be stored in enclosed structures and shall be protected from weather
and excessive heat or cold. Materials shall be stored, delivered and handled in accordance with state and local codes. Materials exceeding storage life recommended by the manufacturer shall be removed from the site.
1.07 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD REPRESENTATIVE
A. The manufacturer’s field representative shall verify in writing that the proper
procedures and equipment are being used by the applicator and that the coating is being properly applied.
1.08 WARRANTY BOND
A. Provide a two (2) year materials and labor warranty bond covering the repair or replacement of the entire coating system to correct shrinkage cracks, bond failure or surface deterioration resulting from causes other than abuse. The two (2) year warranty period shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. GENERAL: 1. Coating system shall be compatible with the concrete surface preparation
methods as specified herein. Any limitations or deviations requested by the manufacturer shall be approved in writing by the ENGINEER prior to surface preparation.
2. Primer shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and shall be used for all
coatings applied to concrete.
1 Measured in grams per liter by weight of coating as applied, excluding water and color added to be base tint.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 9: Finishes Section 09970-4
3. Epoxy based coatings shall be applied within two months (unless the
manufacturer’s requirements are more stringent) of their date of manufacture, unless otherwise approved in writing by the ENGINEER.
4. Thicknesses specified herein are the minimum dry film thicknesses required
and do not include the primer thickness, unless otherwise noted. Provide greater thickness where recommended by the manufacturer.
B. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS FOR CONCRETE COATINGS:
1. One hundred percent (100%) solids hybrid novolac epoxy formulation except that only fillers that enhance the corrosion resistance, mechanical and application properties may be used.
2. Adhesive failures shall be in the concrete (substrate) in accordance with ASTM D-4541.
2.02 MANUFACTURER
A. The coating system shall be limited to the following manufacturers and suppliers:
1. Sewer Shield Liner SS150 by Environmental Coatings, Mesa, AZ, 480-986-1212.
2. SP2000R by Superior Environmental products, Addison, Texas, 972-
490-0566.
B. The caulk for the coating system shall be limited to the following manufactures and suppliers:
1. Sewer Shield Caulk by Environmental Coatings, Mesa, AZ, 480-986-1212.
2. ER1500R Caulk by Superior Environmental products, Addison, Texas, 972-490-0566.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXTENT OF WORK
A. The coating system shall be applied to all exposed interior concrete surfaces of the following locations: sanitary manholes, wetwell structure for mechanical screen, and existing sanitary manholes that are modified as part of this work.
B. The coating system shall not be applied to gates, gate frames and other
mechanical equipment.
C. The coating shall not be applied to any working or expansion joint face. However, an approved hybrid novolac epoxy formulation caulk shall be used at all working and expansion joints.
3.03 SURFACE PREPARATION OF CONCRETE SURFACES
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 9: Finishes Section 09970-5
A. Surface preparation shall be in strict accordance with the coating system manufacturer’s written requirements for the material used except that the following minimum surface preparation shall be completed:
1. All new concrete shall receive either a wet abrasive brush-off blast using
a minimum water pressure of 5,000 psi or a dry sandblast at 125 psi to lightly abrade the surface and open up subsurface holes and voids, plus etch the surface sufficiently to at least a 3 to 5 mil profile or more if recommended in writing by the manufacturer.
2. After establishing the profile, all abraded surfaces shall be pressure
washed at a minimum of 3,000 psi to remove any residual.
B. Fill all surfaces defects with an approved underlayment to obtain a void-free surface according to the manufacturer’s requirements. The coating shall not be applied within less than 30 days after placement of the concrete.
3.04 APPLICATION OF COATINGS
A. All coatings shall be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements and recommendations. Number of coats, excluding primers, to achieve the minimum required total mil thickness shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. A minimum of two coats shall be required, unless otherwise approved in writing by the ENGINEER.
B. Confirm that the ambient temperature, the prepared surface temperature, and
the temperature of the coating material to be applied are within the manufacturer’s recommended ranges. Coatings shall be applied at a time of day when the ambient temperature is expected to be steady or falling.
C. Each coat shall be a contrasting color. The color of the final coat shall be
chosen by the ENGINEER. D. Ensure that pump, hoses, gun, tip, and pressure are properly matched for the
coating to be applied. Ensure that the application equipment has been properly cleaned prior to application of coating. Test spray pattern for uniformity of distribution.
E. Protect surfaces from rapid drying due to heavy wind or hot sun.
F. Cure coatings in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations, prior to putting into service.
3.05 TESTING
A. After all coats have been applied, the area shall be checked for holidays utilizing a dry conductive brush and tester at a testing voltage of 1250 times the square root of the coating system thickness in mils to obtain volts.
B. All holiday testing shall be done in the presence of the ENGINEER.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 9: Finishes Section 09970-6
C. All holidays discovered are to be marked, repaired and retested. D. In testing for continuity of coating at projections (such as bolts and nuts), and
crevices, the ENGINEER will determine the minimum conductivity for smooth areas of like coating where the dry mil thickness has been accepted. This conductivity shall then be taken as the minimum required for these rough or irregular areas. Pinholes and holidays shall be recoated to the required coverage.
3.06 CLEAN UP
A. Upon completion of coating, the CONTRACTOR shall remove surplus materials, protective coverings, and accumulated rubbish, and thoroughly clean all surfaces and repair any overspray, splashes, splatters or other coating-related damage. Surfaces damaged resulting from this clean up shall also be cleaned, repaired and refinished to the original or required condition.
B. Remove all tools, scaffolding, surplus materials, and debris from and around the
Work, leaving the area in a clean condition.
3.07 COATING SYSTEM A. COATING SYSTEM A (CS-A):
1. 125 mils of multi-layer spray applied Sewer Shield Liner SS150 by Environmental Coatings, or;
2. 125 mils of multi-layer spray applied SP2000R by Superior Environmental Products.
END OF SECTION
DIVISION 10
SPECIALTIES
Division 10 - Specialties
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance Systems and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 10: Specialties Section 10400-1
SECTION 10400
PROCESS IDENTIFICATION DEVICES, STENCILING AND TAGGING SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. All identification, stenciling, and tagging systems for process valves, process
piping, process equipment, etc.
B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 1
2. Section 09800 - Special Coatings
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards:
1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
a. A13.1, Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Product technical data including:
a. Acknowledgment that products submitted meet requirements of
standards referenced.
b. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.
c. Identification register listing all items to be identified, type of
identification system to be used, lettering, location and color.
d. Catalog information for all tagging systems.
e. Manufacturer’s illustration of safety and danger signs for selection by
OWNER.
f. Updated, complete, identification register with non-conflicting
numerical assignments submitted prior to project acceptance.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 .01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER’S
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturer’s
are acceptable:
1. Tagging Systems:
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance Systems and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 10: Specialties Section 10400-2
16
a. W.H. Brady Co.
b. Seton Name Plate Corp.
c. T & B/Westline.
d. Safety Sign Co.
e. Pre-approved Equal.
2 .02 MATERIALS
A. Tags:
1. Aluminum.
B. Fasteners:
1. Stainless Steel Wire.
2 .03 FABRICATION
A. General:
1. Lettering Color: Black.
2. Lettering Style: Helvetica.
B. Round Aluminum Tags (Type 1):
1. 2 inch diameter.
2. 1/4/inch high engraved letters.
3. Brushed aluminum finish.
4. Imprint tags with item designation indicated on Drawings.
C. Rectangular Plastic Signs (Type 2):
1. 7 x 10 x 1/ inch.
2. 1 inch high black lettering.
3. Stainless steel grommets each corner.
D. Painted-On Stenciling System (Type 3):
1. Text as required for item being identified.
a. All text uppercase sized in accordance with ANSI A13.1.
E. Rectangular Plastic Signs (Type 4):
1. 10 x 14 1/16 inch 2. Text as required by schedule in Part 3:
a. Text shall be largest practicable size based on number of characters
required.
3. Rated indoor/outdoor.
F. Engraved Name Plates (Type 5).
2 .04 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance Systems and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 10: Specialties Section 10400-3
A. Tags:
1. Aluminum.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to installation, inspect and verify condition of substrate. Installation of product
constitutes installer’s acceptance of substrate condition for product compatibility.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Correct defects which may interface with or prevent a satisfactory installation.
3.3 ERECTION, INSTALLATION, AND APPLICATION
A. Install tagging, stenciling, and identification items at required locations.
B. Provide arrows and markers on piping:
1. At 20 foot maximum centers along continuous lines.
2. At changes in direction (route) or obstructions.
3. At valves, risers, “T” joints, machinery or equipment.
4. Where pipes pass through floor, wall, and like obstruction.
a. Provide markers on both sides of obstruction.
C. Position markers on both sides of pipe with arrow markers pointing in flow direction.
If flow is in both directions use double headed arrow markers.
D. Apply stenciling in uniform manner parallel to piping.
E. Coat back of Type 1 aluminum tags with dissimilar metals protection when installed
on concrete.
F. Process piping shall be color coded. Color to be selected by ENGINEER.
G. For 3-inch and smaller piping, provide adhesive labels to indicate flow direction and
pipe service.
3.4 SCHEDULE
A. Identification Schedule.
ITEM ID TYPE FASTENER
Valves 1 Wire
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance Systems and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 10: Specialties Section 10400-4
Pumps, Pump Motors, and other Rotating Equipment, and
electrical powered equipment
3 or 5 Epoxy if Type
5
Instrumentation Flow (Primary Elements etc.) 5 Epoxy
Piping 3 --
Control panels, Motor Control Centers, Lightening Panels not
Factory Labeled
5 Epoxy
Safety Signs - Hazard Warning 4 Stainless Steel
Information and Caution Signs 4 See this
Section
Tanks 3 --
B. Piping Schedule (Colors based on Tnemec.):
1. Color Schedule:
Above Ground Pipe Labels Color of Pipe
Potable Water Safety Green
Sanitary Sewer Gray
Foul Air Amber Canyon
Odor Control Drain Safety Yellow
Chemicals Color
None
2. Lettering Size Schedule:
3/4 to 1-1/4 1/2
1-1/2 to 2 3/4
2-1/2 to 6 1-1/4
8 to 10 2-1/2
Over 10 3-1/2
3. Unless the line is in such a location that it can be seen only from one
OD of Pipe or Covering
(inches)
Height of
Letters (inches)
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance Systems and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 10: Specialties Section 10400-5
direction, such as pipes near a wall, two sets of the code designation shall be
applied at each location, placed in the two visible quadrants, with respect to
normal viewing positions. In general, pipe identification size, color, and
arrangements shall be in accordance with ANSI A 13.1 (latest edition).
C. Safety Signs and Miscellaneous:
1. Provide and install a minimum of 10 custom worded signs. Type 4 with text
and location to be provided by OWNER at later date. Five signs shall be
mounted on a galvanized post. Five signs shall be mounted on wall.
END OF SECTION
DIVISION 11
EQUIPMENT
Division 11 - Equipment
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance Systems and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 11: Equipment Section 11005-1
SECTION 11005
EQUIPMENT: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Requirements of this Section apply to all equipment provided on the Project,
including that found in Divisions 11, 13, and 15, even if not specifically
referenced as a related section in those Specifications.
B. Related sections include, but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Division 1 - General Requirements.
2. Section 09800 - Special Coatings.
3. Section 10400 - Process Identification Devices, Stenciling and Tagging
Systems
4. Individual equipment specifications in Divisions 11, 13, and 15.
5. Refer to Division 16 for Control Panel specifications.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Referenced Standards:
1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
a. A307, Standard Specification Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000
psi Tensile Strength.
b. F593, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap
Screws, and Studs.
2. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE):
a. 112, Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and
Generators.
3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.
b. ICS 6, Enclosures for Industrial Control and System.
c. MG1, Motors and Generators.
B. Unit Responsibility:
1. Where indicated in these documents, equipment systems made up of two or
more components shall be manufactured and assembled as a unit by the
responsible manufacturer. The responsible manufacturer shall select all
components of the system to assure compatibility, ease of construction and
efficient maintenance. The responsible manufacturer shall coordinate
selection and design of all system components, such that all equipment
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance Systems and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 11: Equipment Section 11005-2
furnished under the specification for the equipment system, including
equipment specified elsewhere, but referenced in the specification, is
compatible and operates properly to achieve the performance requirements
specified. Unless otherwise specified, the responsible manufacturer shall be
the manufacturer of the driven equipment. This requirement for unit
responsibility shall in no way relive CONTRACTOR of his responsibility to
the OWNER for performance of all systems.
2. CONTRACTOR shall assure that all equipment systems provided for the
Project are products for which unit responsibility has been accepted by the
responsible manufacturer. Where the detailed specification requires
CONTRACTOR to furnish a certificate from the Unit Responsibility
Manufacturer, such certificates shall be provided prior to Shop Drawing
review. No other submittal material will be processed until a Certificate of
Unit Responsibility has been received and has been found to be satisfactory.
Failure to provide acceptable proof that the unit responsibility requirement
has been satisfied will result in withholding approval of progress payments
for the subject equipment even though the equipment mayhave been installed
in the Work.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Product: Manufactured materials and equipment.
B. Equipment: One or more assemblies capable of performing a complete function.
Mechanical, electrical, instrumentation or other devices requiring an electrical,
pneumatic, electronic or hydraulic connection. Not limited to items listed under
“Equipment” article within Specifications.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. General for all equipment:
a. See Section 01340.
b. Acknowledgement that products submitted comply with the
requirements of the standards referenced.
c. Manufacturer’s delivery, storage, and handling instructions.
d. Equipment identification utilizing tagging system and name utilized
in the Construction Drawings.
e. Equipment installation details:
1) Location of anchorage.
2) Type, size, and materials of construction of anchorage.
3) Anchorage setting templates.
4) Manufacturer’s installation instructions.
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance Systems and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 11: Equipment Section 11005-3
4
f. Equipment area classification rating.
g. Shipping and operating weight.
h. Equipment physical characteristics:
1) Dimensions (both horizontal and vertical).
2) Materials of construction and construction details.
i. Equipment factory primer and painting and coating data.
j. Manufacturer’s recommended spare parts list.
k. Piping and duct connection size, type and location.
2. Mechanical and Process Equipment:
a. Operating characteristics:
1) Technical information including applicable performance
curves showing specified equipment capacity, rangeability,
and efficiencies.
2) Brake horsepower requirements.
3) Copies of equipment data plates.
b. Piping and duct connection size, type, and location.
c. Equipment bearing life certification.
d. Field noise testing reports if such testing is specified in specific
equipment sections.
e. Equipment foundation data:
1) Equipment center of gravity.
2) Criteria for designing vibration, special or unbalanced forces
resulting from equipment operation.
3. Electrical equipment:
a. Electric motor information:
1) Nameplate data.
2) Service factor on motors ½ HP and above.
3) Motor enclosure type.
4) NEMA frame size, if applicable.
5) NEMA design code, if applicable.
6) Insulation type.
7) Efficiency and power factor at full load, 3/ load, ½ load and 1
/4 load. b. Motor tests reports.
c. Certification that equipment has been installed properly, has been
initially started up, and is ready for operation.
B. Operations and Maintenance Manuals:
1. Section 01715.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance Systems and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 11: Equipment Section 11005-4
are acceptable:
1. Motors:
a. U.S. Motors.
b. Baldor.
c. Or approved equal (U.S. manufacturers only).
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Electric Motors:
1. Provide motors designed and applied in compliance with NEMA, IEEE, and
the NEC for specific duty imposed by driven equipment.
2. Where used in conjunction with adjustable speed drives, provide motors fully
compatible with the variable speed controllers. These motors shall be
inverter duty.
3. Where frequent starting applications are specified, design for frequent
starting duty equivalent to duty service required by driven equipment.
4. Rate for continuous duty at 50 Deg C ambient. Design in accordance with
NEMA standards for Class F insulation with Class B temperature rise above
50 Deg C ambient on continuous operation or intermittent duty at nameplate
horsepower.
5. Design for full or reduced voltage starting, as appropriate.
6. Design bearing life based upon actual operating load conditions imposed by
driven equivalent.
7. Size for altitude of Project.
8. Size so that, under maximum continuous load imposed by driven equipment,
motor nameplate horsepower for continuous operation is minimum of 15
percent more than driven load.
9. Provide encapsulated windings in wet/corrosive and for outdoor applications:
a. Provide encapsulation using a silicone or epoxy seal after the
windings have been dried to less than 1 percent moisture.
10. Furnish with clamp-type grounding terminals inside motor conduit box.
11. Furnish with oversized external conduit boxes.
12. Furnish with stainless steel nameplates with information to include all data
as required by paragraph 430-7 of the National Electric Code, NFPA 70.
13. Totally Enclosed, Fan-Cooled (TEFC) unless specified otherwise.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Guards:
1. Provide each piece of equipment having exposed moving parts with full
length, easily removable guards, meeting OSHA requirements.
2. Interior Applications:
a. Construct from expanded galvanized steel rolled to conform to shaft
or coupling surface.
b. Utilize non-flattened type 16 GA galvanized steel with nominal ½ IN
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance Systems and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 11: Equipment Section 11005-5
spacing.
c. Connect to equipment frame with hot-dip galvanized bolts and wing
nuts.
3. External Applications:
a. Construct from 16 GA stainless steel or aluminum.
b. Construct to preclude entrance of rain, snow, or moisture.
c. Roll to conform to shaft or coupling surface.
d. Connect to equipment frame with stainless steel bolts and wing nuts.
B. Anchorage:
1. Cast-in-place anchorage:
a. Provide ASTM F593, Type 316 stainless steel anchorage for exposed
equipment.
b. For continuously submerged anchorage, utilize ASTM A307
anchorage. For intermittently submerged applications, use 316
stainless steel.
c. Configuration and number of anchor bolts shall be per manufacturer’s
recommendations.
d. Provide two nuts for each bolt.
2. Drilled anchorage:
a. Epoxy grout per Section 03600.
b. Threaded rods same as cast-in-place.
C. Data Plate:
1. Attach a stainless steel data plate to each piece of rotary or reciprocating
equipment. Permanently stamp information on data plate including
manufacturer’s name, equipment operating parameters, serial number and
speed.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Design, fabricate, and assemble equipment in accordance with best modern
engineering and shop practices.
B. Manufacture individual parts to standard sizes and gages so that repair parts,
furnished at any time, can be installed in field.
C. Furnish like parts of duplicate units to be interchangeable.
D. Assure that equipment has not been in service at any time prior to delivery, except
as required by tests.
E. Furnish equipment which require periodic internal inspection or adjustment with
access panels which will not require disassembly of guards, dismantling of piping or
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance Systems and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 11: Equipment Section 11005-6
equipment or similar major efforts. Quick opening but sound, securable access ports
or windows shall be provided for inspection of chains, belts, or similar items.
F. Provide common, lipped base plate mounting for equipment and equipment motor
where said mounting is a manufacturer’s standard option. Provide drain connection
for tubing.
G. Machine the mounting feet of rotating equipment.
H. Shop or Factory Finishes shall be in accordance with Section 09800.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 ERECTION/INSTALLATION/APPLICATION
A. Install equipment as shown on Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer’s
directions.
B. Utilize templates for anchorage placement for slab mounted equipment.
C. For equipment having drainage requirements such as seal water, provide 3/4 IN PVC
or clear plastic tubing from equipment base to nearest floor or equipment drain.
Route clear of major traffic areas and as approved by OWNER.
D. Extend all non-accessible grease fittings using stainless steel tubing to a location which allows easy access of fittings.
E. Construct subbases, either concrete, steel or cast iron, level in both directions.
Particular care shall be taken at hold-down bolt locations so these areas are flat and
level.
F. Machine Base:
1. Mount machine bases of rotating equipment on subbases in manner that they
are level in both directions according to machined surfaces on base. Use
machinist level for this procedure. 2. Level machine bases on subbases and align couplings between driver and
driven unit using steel blocks and shims.
a. Size blocks and shims to provide solid support at each anchor bolt location. Area size of blocks and shims shall be approximately 1-1/2
times area support surface at each anchor bolt point.
b. Provide blocks and shims at each anchor bolt. Blocks and shims shall be square shape with “U” cut out to allow blocks and shims to be
centered on anchor bolts.
c. After all leveling and alignment has been completed and before grouting, tighten anchor bolts to proper torque value.
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance Systems and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 11: Equipment Section 11005-7
d. Do not use nuts below the machine base on anchor bolts for base leveling.
Grouting:
1. After machine base has been shimmed, leveled, couplings aligned and anchor
bolts tightened to correct torque value, a dam or formwork shall be placed around base to contain grouting. Dam or formwork shall extend at least ½ IN
above the top of leveling shims and blocks. 2. Grouting mixture shall be non-shrink grout per Division 3 requirements.
3. When the grout has sufficiently hardened, remove dam or framework and
finish the exposed grout surface to fine, smooth surface. Cover exposed grout surfaces with wet burlap and keep covering sufficiently wet to prevent too
rapid evaporation of water from the grout. When the grout has fully hardened
(after a minimum of 7 days) tighten all anchor bolts and recheck driver-driven unit for proper alignment.
H. Identification of Equipment and Hazard Warning Signs:
1. Identify equipment and install hazard warning signs in accordance with
Section 10400.
I. Field coat in accordance with Section 09800.
3.2 WIRING CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATION
A. Clean wires before installing lugs and connectors.
B. Coat connection with oxidation eliminating compound for aluminum wire.
C. Terminate motor circuit conductors with copper lugs bolted to motor leads.
D. Tape uninsulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape, 150 percent of
insulation value of conductor.
E. Connections to carry full ampacity of conductors without temperature rise.
F. Terminate spare conductors with electrical tape.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Furnish equipment manufacturer services as specified in the individual equipment
specifications.
B. Inspect wire and connections for physical damage and proper connection.
C. Check rotation of motor before connection to driven equipment, before couplings are
bolted or belts installed. Before motor is started to check rotation, determine that
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance Systems and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 11: Equipment Section 11005-8
motor is lubricated.
END OF SECTION
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 11: Equipment Section 11330-1
SECTION 11330
VERTICALLY MOUNTED HEADWORKS SCREENING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish, install, place into satisfactory operation, and
warrant the vertically mounted headworks screening system for receiving, separating,
washing, dewatering and transporting screenings material to the designated collection
container, as shown on the Drawings and described by the Specifications.
B. All items detailed in this section shall be provided by the same manufacturer.
C. Related Sections:
1. Section 13140: Technical Submittals
2. Section 11005: Equipment: General Requirements
3. Section 15050: Basic Process Piping Materials and Methods
4. Division 5: Metals
5. Division 16: Electrical
6. Section 02200: Earthwork
7. Section 02100: Site Preparation
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) A536-84: Standard Specification
for Ferritic Ductile Iron Castings
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) A48-83: Standard Specification for
Grey Iron Casting
C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) B16.42-1979, Class 150 Flanges
D. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) 303 Stainless Steel
E. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) 304 Stainless Steel
F. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) 316 Stainless Steel
G. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) 4130 Heat Treated Alloy Steel
H. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) 4140 Heat Treated Alloy Steel
I. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) 17-4 Stainless Steel
J. Controllers shall, as applicable, meet the requirements of the following Regulatory
Agencies:
1. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA) Standards
2. National Electrical Code (NEC)
3. Underwriters Laboratory (UL and cUL)
4. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC)
1.03 SUBMITTALS
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 11: Equipment Section 11330-2
A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Submit the following as a single complete initial
submittal in accordance with Section 01340:
1. Product data fully describing all items proposed for use to demonstrate that the
equipment conforms to the drawings and specifications.
2. Performance data demonstrating the equipment is capable of operating at the required
solids load.
3. Manufacturer’s catalog data and operating literature on equipment used.
4. Utility and nutrient use calculations.
5. Specifications, performance data and calibration curves for fan, motor, and auxiliary
components.
6. System layouts and/or schematics.
7. Elementary and connection wiring diagrams clearly showing external connections to
other equipment.
8. Motor designation and horsepower.
9. NEMA starter sizes and overload types/sizes.
10. Enclosure type with interior and exterior elevations with dimensions.
11. Control transformer ratings.
12. Circuit breaker (or fuse) sizes.
13. Auxiliary contacts.
14. Control devices being utilized.
15. Point-to-point wiring diagram by an approved system integrator.
16. Bill of material including spare parts being furnished.
17. Warranty.
B. Performance Testing: Submit certified factory performance test results. Receive favorable
review of test results from ENGINEER prior to shipping the equipment.
C. Manuals: Furnish manufacturer’s installation, lubrication, operation and maintenance
manuals, bulletins, and spare parts list.
D. Affidavits: Submit affidavits from the manufacturer stating that the equipment has been
properly installed, adjusted, and tested and is ready for full-time operation.
E. If requested by the ENGINEER or OWNER, manufacturer shall provide a list of
reference sites for similar equipment for verification.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The products furnished under this section shall be by a manufacturer that has been
regularly engaged in manufacturing of the equipment and has a minimum of 5 years
experience in design, fabrication and testing of vertically mounted headworks screenings
systems. Demonstrate to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER that the quality is equal to
equipment made by those manufacturers named herein.
B. Inspection and Testing Requirements: The Client reserves the right to refuse delivery of
any or all pieces of equipment found, upon inspection, to have any defects in
workmanship or materials.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 11: Equipment Section 11330-3
C. Upon completion of the installation each piece of equipment in each system shall be
tested for satisfactory operation without excessive noise, vibration, overheating, etc.
Compliance shall be as required in the Contract Documents and all applicable codes and
standards. All equipment shall be adjusted and checked for misalignment, clearances,
supports and adherence to safety standards.
D. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the successful startup and testing of
headworks screenings system. The manufacturer shall provide supervisory assistance,
instrumentation and testing services required during this phase of the work.
E. Inspection and Testing Requirements: The ENGINEER reserves the right to reject
delivery of any or all pieces of equipment found, upon inspection, to have any or all of
the following: blisters, chips, crazing, exposed glass, cracks burned areas, dry spots,
foreign matter, surface porosity, sharp discontinuity or entrapped air on laminate
surfaces.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Place materials in area protected from weather immediately upon delivery to the job site.
Use non-marring slings for loading, unloading and handling units to prevent rope or cable
damage to surfaces and protective wrappings.
B. Equipment shall remain in the packaging provided by the supplier until it is installed.
C. Equipment shall be stored in a dry environment between 40 degrees F and 100 degrees F.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. CONTRACTOR shall provide a written warranty for the entire system, both in material
and workmanship for a period of eighteen months (18) months from the date of
Substantial Completion.
B. The equipment shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship, design and
materials. If any part of the equipment should fail during the warranty period, it shall be
repaired or replaced and the complete system restored to service at no expense to the
OWNER.
C. Manufacturer shall provide a written warranty.
1.06 WARNING SIGNS
A. Each piece of driven machinery which can be started manually by any control station not
within 15 feet of the machine, or which can be controlled automatically by any means,
shall be identified with a warning sign inscribed:
CAUTION
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 11: Equipment Section 11330-4
THIS MACHINE IS REMOTELY CONTROLLED
AND MAY START AT ANY TIME
The word “CAUTION” shall be in yellow block letters on black panel at the tip of the
sign which shall have yellow background and text in black block letters. Signs shall be
fabricated from 30-gauge copper-bearing steel and finish shall be high-baked enamel; the
finished signs shall be weather resistant. Signs shall be 10 inches wide by 7 inches high.
Signs shall be located in prominent locations at machines and shall be fastened to
surfaces previously specified for nameplates.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. The system shall comprise of the following major components:
1. Wall Mount Frame.
2. Vertical Auger.
3. Auger Locator Supports.
4. Wash Water Control Assembly.
5. Discharge Chute.
6. Level Probe.
7. Motor Controller.
8. Factory Finishing.
9. The headworks screenings system shall be Model ALV01-285 by JWC
Environmental, LLC, or approved equal.
B. The system shall be designed for continuous, automatic operation and also be capable of
manual operation. Access ports shall be provided to allow access to the internals of the
system. The system shall be designed to withstand ambient temperatures up to 130
degrees F. The system and all accessories shall be factory mounted, piped, and wired to
the maximum extent possible.
2.02 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA
A. The vertically mounted headworks screenings system shall receive wastewater flow into
a wet well or vault, collect and remove captured solids from the waste stream and
effectively wash, transport, compact, de-water and discharge the solids to a collection
container. The system shall incorporate wall-mounted frame assembly and vertical auger
with perforated screen segment, transport segment, dewatering discharge segment, drive
segment and rotating spiral. The system shall be configured to permit installation of a
future grinder pump that precedes the auger.
B. The system shall meet the following minimum criteria unless otherwise approved by the
ENGINEER:
1. Number of vertical headworks screening systems: 1
2. Number of motor controllers: 1
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 11: Equipment Section 11330-5
3. Capacity per system: 500 GPM
4. Wet well diameter: 6 ft
5. Nominal screen height: 24 in
6. Screen perforation size: 1/4”
7. Minimum perforated screen thickness: 11 gauge
8. Minimum screen open area: 51%
9. Automatic screen cleaning with pressurized wash water with explosion-proof
solenoid valve.
10. Nominal rotor diameter: 11-1/4”
11. Nominal rotor RPM: 11
12. Environment rating in wet well: Class 1, Div. 1, Groups C & D
13. Supply power characteristics: 230 volt / 3 phase
14. Auger installed horsepower: 1 hp minimum
15. Future grinder: 5 hp minimum.
16. Auger motor type: TEFC
17. Auger motor service factor: 1.15
18. Auger min. motor efficiency (at full load): 84%
19. Auger min. motor power factor (at full load): 72%
20. Motor controller enclosure rating: NEMA 4X
21. Selector switch, pushbutton & pilot lamp type: 22 mm, LED (pilot lamp)
22. Programmable Logic Controller type: Siemens S7-1200; Allen Bradley Micrologix
1400, or approved equal.
23. Human Machine Interface type: Siemens KTP-400 Comfort; Allen Bradley C400,
or approved equal.
24. Level probe: Endress & Hauser FMU 40-series; MEAS KPSI 700, or approved
equal.
2.03 MATERIALS
A. General: The system shall be fabricated from the following materials unless otherwise
approved by the ENGINEER:
1. Fabricated components: 304 stainless steel
2. Auger rotor: Corrosion-resistant alloy steel, or 304 stainless steel.
3. Spray bar frame, nozzles, and piping components: 304 stainless steel
4. Strainers & solenoid valves: Bronze
5. Motor controller enclosure: 304 stainless steel
6. Coating type: Polyamidoamide epoxy, or as required by Engineer
7. Coating color: Hunter green, or as required by Engineer.
2.04 SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Wall Mounted Frame
1. General: Frame shall be wall-mounted to suit the wetwell diameter listed in
Performance and Design Criteria, and provide a method for supporting the vertical
auger. Frame shall contain and guide wastewater flow through the equipment for
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 11: Equipment Section 11330-6
processing. An overflow barscreen shall be incorporated into the frame to allow
coarse screening of wastewater during high-flow events.
2. Components: Frame shall be of material type listed in Materials. Frame shall
incorporate a flange feature to allow for anchoring to the wall of a round or flat wall
wet well. Frame shall incorporate a pocket for mounting a future in-channel grinder,
as required by manufacturer. Frame shall incorporate a guide feature to accommodate
a removable slide gate-style interface adapter for mounting the auger. Frame shall be
designed to support the static and dynamic loads of both the grinder and the vertical
auger. Frame shall incorporate an overflow barscreen.
B. Vertical Auger
1. General: Vertical auger shall include a perforated screen trough with flanged inlet and
spray wash manifold, transport segment, discharge segment with dewatering feature,
rotor assembly, and drive assembly.
2. Components:
a. Perforated Screen Trough: Screen trough shall be constructed of stainless steel of
type listed in Performance and Design Criteria and electro-polished to remove
burrs.Pickling and passivation of stainless steel is acceptable. Perforations shall be
of diameter listed in Performance and Design Criteria. Screen trough shall be
cylindrical and have a 8” minimum diameter flanged inlet pipe. Spray water
manifold with nozzles shall be mounted to the screen trough to apply water spray
to help promote transport and washing of solids.
b. Auger Interface & Support Assembly: A slide gate-style auger interface and
separate flange-mounted support shall be fabricated from stainless steel of type
listed in Performance and Design Criteria and connected to both the screen trough
inlet flange and upper screen trough flange. Auger interface shall guide
wastewater flow from wall-mounted frame to perforated screen trough. Along
with the auger interface, the support assembly shall transfer all vertical loads from
the vertical auger to the wall-mount frame.
c. Transport Segment: Transport casings shall be fabricated of stainless steel sheet
of type listed in Materials. Minimum material thickness shall be 10 gauge.
Transport casings shall be fitted with anti-rotation or wear bars to bear the radial
loads from the auger. Number and size of wear bars shall be in accordance with
manufacturer’s specifications and approved by the Engineer. Wear bars shall be
fabricated from 17-4PH stainless steel. Individual transport casings 39” and
longer shall have removable inspection covers (optional). At least one flange of
the transport segment shall be fitted with an auger locator flange bracket for
connection to the auger locator supports.
d. Dewatering Discharge Segment: Discharge segment shall be fabricated of
stainless steel sheet of type listed in Materials. Minimum material thickness shall
be 10 gauge. Discharge segment shall be fitted with anti-rotation or wear bars to
bear the radial loads from the auger. Number and size of wear bars shall be in
accordance with manufacturer’s specifications and approved by the Engineer.
Wear bars shall be fabricated from 17-4PH stainless steel. Discharge segment
shall incorporate a dewatering feature including 0.12” holes, spray wash manifold
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 11: Equipment Section 11330-7
with high-impact spray nozzles, collection tray and gasketted shroud assembly.
Discharge segment shall have a radial discharge.
e. Auger Rotor: Auger Rotor: Auger rotor shall be either shafted or shaftless
steel. The auger shall have a brush attached to the outside of the spiral to be used
as a sacrificial wear item.
f. Lifting Brackets: Two lifting brackets shall be mounted to the drive end of the
vertical auger. Lifting brackets shall be fabricated from material type listed in
Materials. Lifting brackets shall be designed to bear to full weight of the vertical
auger, including any material that may not have been cleared from the unit.
g. Packing Gland and Housing: Packing shall be constructed of four (4) PTFE
impregnated cords. Packing housing shall be constructed of 4140 steel.
f. Speed Reducer: Reducer shall be manufactured by Nord Gear Corporation; Bauer,
or approved equal. Reducer shall be helical-parallel and shaft mounted with
nominal 160:1 reduction.
g. Motor: Motor shall be manufactured by Baldor Electric Company or approved
equal. Motor horsepower, power characteristics, service factor, power factor and
efficiency shall be as listed in Performance and Design Criteria.
C. Auger Locator Supports
1. General: Supports shall be provided above the wall-mounted frame to keep the auger
properly located. One auger locator support shall be provided for each 13 feet of
vertical auger above the wall-mount frame.
2. Components: Supports shall be constructed of stainless steel of type listed in
Materials and designed to accommodate horizontal loads only.
a. A bolted-style locator support shall be provided as close as possible to the top of
the wet well. Support shall use a beam for connection to the locator flange
mounted on the auger transport segment. Side wall brackets or front wall beam
supports shall be used to maintain the position of the beam.
b. Any additional locator supports provided below the bolted-style locator support
shall not require human contact in order to disconnect. A female locator flange
bracket shall be mounted on the auger transport segment. A corresponding male
locator shall be mounted on a beam. Side wall brackets or front wall beam
supports shall be used to maintain the position of the beam.
D. Wash Water Control Assembly
1. General: Wash water control assembly shall provide screenings and flow control of
spray water for washing and transport of the captured solids, as well as cleaning of
the perforations of the dewatering discharge segment.
2. Components
a. Basket strainer shall be of material type listed in Materials and include a 20-mesh
304 stainless steel screen.
b. Y-strainer shall be of material type listed in Materials above and include an 80-
mesh 304 stainless steel screen.
c. Electrically-actuated water control valves shall be of type listed in Performance
and Design Criteria above.
d. Ball valves shall be manual and constructed of 316 stainless steel and allow the
wash water to be regulated or shut off.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 11: Equipment Section 11330-8
e. An integral mounting bracket shall be provided to attach the assembly to a wall or
a floor.
E. Discharge Chute
1. General: A discharge chute shall connect to the radial discharge of the discharge
segment and guide the ground, washed and dewatered wastewater solids to a
collection container.
2. Components
a. Discharge chute and supports shall be fabricated from stainless steel sheet of type
listed in Materials.
b. Discharge chute shall be removable to facilitate inspection and maintenance.
c. Additional supports shall be provided for discharge chutes allowing more than
36” of horizontal transport.
F. Level Probe
1. General: A level probe shall be mounted on the frame upstream of the headworks
intake. Level probe shall produce an analog output signal representative of the level
of the liquid contained in the frame. Analog signal shall be passed to the motor
controller.
2. Components: Level probe shall be rated NEMA 6P for temporary immersion and in
accordance with the environment rating listed in Performance and Design Criteria.
Level probe shall have 1-1/2” NPT process connection. Level probe shall be of make
and model listed in Performance and Design Criteria.
G. Motor Controller
1. General: Controller shall provide programmable operation of the Vertically Mounted
Headworks Screening. Controller shall have switches, indicator lights, and other
control devices. Operating parameters shall be adjustable via a Human Machine
Interface (HMI). Controller shall be designed to suit the supply power and motor
characteristics listed in Performance and Design Criteria.
2. Components:
a. Enclosure shall be of rating and material type listed in Materials. Enclosure shall
house motor starter, PLC, and control devices, and shall be latched and lockable.
b. Pilot shall be of type listed in Performance and Design Criteria, rated equal or
better than the enclosure. Lights shall indicate Power On, Compactor Run and
Fail.
c. Selector switches shall be rated equal to or better than the enclosure. Auger
selector switch shall be three-position and indicate On-Off-Auto.
d. Pushbuttons shall be rated equal to or better than the enclosure. Reset pushbutton
shall be momentary type and indicate Reset. Emergency stop pushbutton shall be
maintained type and indicate Emergency Stop.
e. Motor starters shall be full-voltage reversing with 120-volt operating coils.
Overload relays shall be adjustable and sized to full load amperes (FLA) of the
motor.
f. Current transducer shall have a discrete output. Current transducer shall have
selectable amperage range input and output contact.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 11: Equipment Section 11330-9
g. Control transformer shall produce 120-volt AC power from the supply power.
Transformer shall be sized and fused in accordance with code to accommodate the
control power requirements.
h. Disconnect switch in addition to existing disconnect switch shown on Drawing E-
04 shall be provided to completely disconnect the motor controller from all phases
of the supply power.
i. Short-circuit protection shall be in accordance with the Electrical Drawings.
j. Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) shall be of type listed in Performance and
Design Criteria.
k. Human Machine Interface (HMI) shall be of type listed in Performance and
Design Criteria. HMI shall display alarms and statistical counters, and provide
controls for adjusting operating parameters. HMI devices exposed to direct
sunlight shall be protected with a thermal insulating cover.
3. Operation
a. Vertical auger control shall be in accordance with the setting of the auger ON-
OFF-AUTO selector switch. In the OFF position the auger shall not run. In the
ON position, the auger shall run forward continuously. In the AUTO position, the
auger shall operate as controlled by the status of the HMI programmable run cycle
settings.
b. HMI shall display operational messages, alarms and statistical counters, and
provide controls for adjusting operating parameters.
c. RESET pushbutton shall clear active alarms.
d. EMERGENCY STOP pushbutton shall de-energize PLC output circuits powering
motor starter, run indicator lamps and wash water control valves. Once the
emergency stop pushbutton is reset, the RESET pushbutton shall be pressed to
clear active alarms.
e. When a vertical auger jam condition occurs while the system is operating, the
controller shall de-energize the auger, then reverse the auger rotation to clear the
obstruction. If the jam is cleared, the controller shall return the auger to normal
operation. If two reversals occur within a 30-second interval, the controller shall
de-energize the auger motor and activate the FAIL indicator and de-energize the
FAIL relay (fail-safe).
f. When a motor overload, motor over-temperature or emergency stop condition
occurs, to motor shall be de-energized, the FAIL indicator lamp shall be
illuminated and the FAIL relay shall be de-energized (fail-safe).
g. When a power failure occurs while the system is operating, the system shall return
to normal operation when power is restored.
h. When a power failure occurs while the auger is in a “fail” condition, the system
shall return to a fail state when power is restored. The fail state shall not be
cleared until reset.
H. Factory Finishes
1. Passivation: Stainless steel components shall be cleaned and passivated to remove
surface contaminants and re-establish the corrosion-resistant passivation layer.
2. Paint Coatings (Ferrous Materials): Ferrous metal surfaces shall be prepared to SSPC-
SP6 (Commercial Blast Cleaning) and coated with minimum 6-8 mils TDFT (total
dry film thickness) paint of type and color listed in Materials.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 11: Equipment Section 11330-10
2.05 SPARE PARTS
A. At a minimum, the following spare parts shall be supplied with the equipment:
1. One (1) set of fuses, one (1) for each fuse rating.
2. One (1) set of bearings.
3. Any other spare parts recommended by the Manufacturer.
B. The supplier shall identify and submit any applicable spare parts. Spare parts shall be
clearly labeled and packed for long term storage.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SITE PREPARATION – NOT USED
3.02 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST
A. Electrical control panel shall be inspected prior to shipping for conformance to the
following:
1. NEMA rating according to this specification.
2. PLC program shall be tested for proper communication and functionality.
3. PLC digital and analog inputs shall be electrically tested to ensure input recognition
in the proper area of the PLC program.
4. All wiring between panel components and terminal strips shall be checked for proper
labeling and connection.
B. All water panel piping and/or other pre-installed piping shall be tested prior to shipping
for conformance to the following:
1. System shall have no leaks when subjected to a pressure test at 1.5 times the
maximum operating pressure for a minimum of 1 hour.
2. All installed instruments, sensors, pumps, actuated valves, and other electrical
components shall be tested for proper operation.
3. All wiring from terminal strips to all electrical components shall be tested to ensure
proper wiring.
3.03 INSTALLATION & EQUIPMENT STARTUP
A. To the extent possible, all equipment shall be pre-assembled prior to shipment to
minimize the need for on-site assembly.
B. Installation of all equipment shall be in accordance with Manufacturer’s written
installation and startup instructions and by workers experienced in the handling of similar
equipment and materials, electrical work, plumbing and instrumentation. The final
installation shall be certified by the Manufacturer as complete and correct.
C. The Manufacturer shall provide the CONTRACTOR with required clearances, tolerances
and limitations, such as smoothness/flatness of concrete pad.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 11: Equipment Section 11330-11
D. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate installation of the compactor and controller in
accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions, Drawings and related
Specification sections, and in accordance with all OSHA, local, state, and federal codes
and regulations.
E. Once the installation has been certified by the Manufacturer, the CONTRACTOR, with
supervision from the Manufacturer, shall provide startup services of the system.
F. Any special tools or instruments required for this startup/acclimation period shall be
provided by the Manufacturer.
G. After satisfactory startup and the corresponding switch over to normal operation, the
CONTRACTOR shall conduct the performance test as detailed below.
3.04 FIELD COATING & CORROSION PROTECTION
A. If painted surfaces are damaged during shipment, off-loading or installation, as long as
the damage is surface only and in no way affects the integrity of the equipment or its
ability to perform, these blemishes, scratches or other imperfections shall be touched up
by the CONTRACTOR in accordance with instructions from the Manufacturer. Materials
used shall me compatible with the original coating material in quality and color.
3.05 FIELD PERFORMANCE TESTING
A. Performance testing shall not commence until the Manufacturer and OWNER agree that
the system has been satisfactorily started-up.
B. After the vertically mounted headworks screening system has been satisfactorily started-
up, the CONTRACTOR shall demonstrate that the system will perform as specified.
C. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the ENGINEER with a written test protocol for
approval prior to conducting testing.
D. The CONTRACTOR shall supply, install and operate all equipment, sensors and
instrumentation required to complete the performance testing.
E. The CONTRACTOR shall conduct testing of the compactor to demonstrate correct
alignment, smooth operation and freedom of excessive vibration and noise. Testing shall
demonstrate accurate measurement of sensors and function of the operating parameters.
3.06 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES
A. Manufacturer, not manufacturer’s representative, shall include 2 full days to supervise
CONTRACTOR’s work prior to system delivery.
B. Start-up assistance, testing, and training: Manufacturer’s factory trained representative
for one (1) separate trip unless otherwise approved by the ENGINEER.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 11: Equipment Section 11330-12
C. Performance testing assistance: Manufacturer’s factory trained representative for one (1)
separate trip unless otherwise approved by the ENGINEER.
D. The Manufacturer shall provide the services of a field technician to inspect the equipment
for proper installation, apply power for the first time and check for proper motor rotation,
oversee the initial introduction of material into the system and configure the equipment
operating parameters to optimize performance based on site-specific requirements.
E. Field training shall be provided for OWNER’s operations, maintenance and supervisory
staff members. Field instruction shall cover key components of the equipment, operating
and maintenance requirements and troubleshooting techniques.
3.07 EQUIPMENT NAME PLATES
A. Each separate piece of equipment shall be furnished with a unique name plate identifying
the Manufacturer, model & serial number, date of manufacture and, if applicable,
capacity and any performance limitations. The nameplates shall be engraved stainless
steel and firmly affixed to the exterior surface of the equipment and in a location that is
accessible and easily read.
END OF SECTION
DIVISION 13
SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
Division 13 - Special Construction
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 13: Special Construction Section 13120-1
SECTION 13120
FIBERGLASS PLANT COVERS
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
Provide necessary EQUIPMENT and appurtenances for fully functional flat fiberglass
covers including all anchorage hardware required for proper installation for the following
locations:
1. Equalization Basin
2. Aerobic Sludge Digester
3. Aerated Sludge Holding
4. Mechanical Headworks Screening Wetwell
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 13140: Technical Submittals
2. Section 11005: Equipment: General Requirements
3. Division 5: Metals
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM D 256 Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact
Resistance of Plastics.
B. ASTM D 570 Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics.
C. ASTM D 638 Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
D. ASTM D 695 Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Plastics.
E. ASTM D 696 Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of
Plastics Between -30°C and 30°C With a Vitreous Silica Dilatometer.
F. ASTM D 790 Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced and
Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials.
G. ASTM D 2344 Standard Test Method for Short-Beam Strength of Polymer Matrix
Composite Materials and Their Laminates.
H. ASTM D 2583 Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by
Means of a Barcol Impressor.
I. ASTM D 2584 Standard Test Method for Ignition Loss of Cured Reinforced Resins.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 13: Special Construction Section 13120-2
J. ASTM C 864-90 Standard Specifications for Preformed gasket and Sealing Material.
K. ASTM F593 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs
L. ANSI/ASCE 7-10 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures
M. ANSI/AWWA F-102-91 Section 5 Standard Recommended Practice for Classifying
Visual Defects in Glass Reinforced Laminates.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Submit the following as a single complete initial
submittal in accordance with Section 01340:
1. Product data fully describing all items proposed for use to demonstrate that the
EQUIPMENT conforms to the drawings and specifications.
2. Shop drawings shall be complete with all dimensions, anchor locations, details of
connecting piping and the size and locations of any required openings.
3. Specifications for all components
4. Details of the major fabricated components showing the arrangement of components
and labeled with component sizes and materials of construction.
5. Structural design calculations for all components.
6. Manufacturer’s recommended procedures for job site storage of EQUIPMENT,
handling and erection.
7. Bill of material including spare parts being furnished.
8. Warranty.
B. Performance Testing: Submit certified factory performance test results. Receive favorable
review of test results from ENGINEER prior to shipping the EQUIPMENT.
C. Manuals: Furnish manufacturer’s installation, lubrication, operation and maintenance
manuals, bulletins, and spare parts list.
D. Affidavits: Submit affidavits from the manufacturer stating that the EQUIPMENT has
been properly installed, adjusted, and tested and is ready for full-time operation.
E. If requested by the ENGINEER or OWNER, manufacturer shall provide a list of
reference sites for similar EQUIPMENT for verification.
F. Approval by the ENGINEER shall not relieve the manufacturer of responsibility for
providing materials and design conforming to the intent of these specifications.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The products furnished under this section shall be by a manufacturer that has been
regularly engaged in manufacturing of the covers and has a minimum of 5 years’
experience in design, fabrication and testing of fiberglass cover systems. Demonstrate to
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 13: Special Construction Section 13120-3
the satisfaction of the ENGINEER that the quality is equal to covers made by those
manufacturers named herein.
B. Inspection and Testing Requirements: The ENGINEER reserves the right to refuse
delivery of any or all pieces of EQUIPMENT found, upon inspection, to have any defects
in workmanship or materials.
C. Upon completion of the installation, each piece of EQUIPMENT in each system shall be
tested for satisfactory operation. Compliance shall be based on EQUIPMENT
manufacturer specifications and all applicable codes and standards. All covers must be
adjusted and checked for misalignment, clearances, supports and adherence to safety
standards.
D. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the successful startup and testing of the
fiberglass cover system.
E. Inspection and Testing Requirements: The ENGINEER reserves the right to reject
delivery of any or all pieces of EQUIPMENT found, upon inspection, to have any or all
of the following: blisters, chips, crazing, exposed glass, cracks burned areas, dry spots,
foreign matter, surface porosity, sharp discontinuity or entrapped air at the surface of the
laminate.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Place materials in area protected from weather immediately upon delivery to the job site.
Use non-marring slings for loading, unloading and handling units to prevent rope or cable
damage to surfaces and protective wrappings.
B. Covers shall remain in the packaging provided by the supplier until it is installed.
C. EQUIPMENT shall be stored in a dry environment between 40 degrees F (4.5 degrees C)
and 100 degrees F (37.8 degrees C).
1.06 WARRANTY
A. CONTRACTOR shall warranty the entire system, both in material and workmanship for
a period of one (1) year after Substantial Completion with a maximum of eighteen (18)
months from date of shipment.
B. The covers shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship, design and
materials. If any part of the covers should fail during the warranty period, it shall be
repaired or replaced and the complete system restored to service at no expense to the
Owner.
C. Manufacturer shall provide written warranty.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 13: Special Construction Section 13120-4
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. The system shall comprise of the following major components:
1. Self supporting covers as described in Paragraph 2.01 B.
2. Boots for penetration of pipes and other EQUIPMENT.
3. Ventilation structures to prevent excessive negative pressures under the covers.
4. Stainless steel hardware required for mounting.
5. Inspection and access hatches as shown on the Drawings or as otherwise required for
wastewater treatment plant operation.
6. The cover system shall be Composi Cover as manufactured by Fiberglass Fabricators,
Inc. or approved equal.
B. The covers shall be self supporting. The system shall be designed to withstand ambient
temperatures up to 120 degrees F. The system and all accessories shall be factory
assembled to the maximum extent possible.
2.02 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Design and Performance Criteria:
1. Design Loads:
a. The entire flat cover shall be designed to sustain the loads specified herein, within
the stress limitations of ANSI/ASCE 7-10.
b. The Load cases to be considered shall be those described below.
i. Dead Load: The dead load shall be defined as the weight of the panels and
all material permanently attached to or supported by the panels.
ii. Live Load: The uniform live load shall be at least 50 psf.
iii. Panel Design Load: In addition to the above mentioned loads, the fiberglass
panels shall be designed for a 500 lb load distributed over 1 square foot at
any location.
iv. Load Combinations: The loads described above shall be applied to the flat
cover in the following combinations:
1) Dead Load.
2) Dead Load, Uniform Live Load, and Vacuum Load.
3) Dead Load, Unbalanced Live Load, and Vacuum Load.
v. Deflections: For the above loads and load combinations, the deflection of all
components shall not exceed L/240 with L equal to the short span of the
component, or 1/2 inch, whichever is lower. Calculations stamped by an
Arizona Registered Professional Engineer shall be provided at the time of
the submittal to ensure that this requirement has been met.
2. Span: The cover must be designed to free span across the tank from the periphery
walls without the use of columns or center drive support.
3. Access Hatches: The access hatches shall be provided using hinged cover panels of
the size and location as shown on the drawings.
4. Penetrations: Boots made of EPDM rubber or other material suitable for ambient
conditions shall be provided with clamps provided as needed to attach to the piping or
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 13: Special Construction Section 13120-5
equipment penetrating the cover. The boot and clamps shall provide an airtight seal
and shall be removable to service equipment or piping. Boots shall be attached to the
covers to provide an airtight seal, but shall be removable for servicing or replacement.
5. Temperature: The load combinations listed above shall be considered for a
temperature change of 100 degrees F below the installation temperature and 50
degrees F above the installation temperature and for a material temperature range of
30 degrees F below zero to 120 degrees F above zero.
6. Design Stresses: All allowable design stresses in structural fiberglass shall be in
accordance with ANSI/ASCE 7-10.
7. Skid Resistance: The cover shall possess an integral non-skid surface and no exposed
area of cover system wider than one quarter inch shall be without ribs/non-skid
surface. The decking surface of the hinged panels shall provide a non-skid surface.
Products for the non-skid surface shall be suitable for a wastewater environment.
8. Chemical Resistance: The cover system shall be fabricated entirely of corrosion-
resistant materials.
9. Configuration: The cover shall be composed of panels and beams. Each removable
panel shall be easy to remove and the lifting force shall not exceed the dead weight of
the panel. All beams or trusses shall be concealed below the surface.
2.03 MATERIALS
A. All materials shall be new and shall be specially designed or selected for the function and
service specified. No material may be used in the project that has not been approved by
the ENGINEER. Approval for incorporation into the project will be made only after the
review of shop drawings and specifications. Standard color shall be gray.
B. Resin: The resin shall be corrosion-resistant general purpose polyester, which has been
determined to be acceptable for the service conditions. Ultraviolet – light inhibitors shall
be added to the laminate.
C. Structural Components: All structural components, with the exception of beam clips,
shall be FRP pultruded material.
D. Bolts and Fasteners – All fasteners shall be #316 stainless steel. Beams and panels
fastened to concrete shall be #316 stainless steel epoxy-type anchors with a minimum
diameter of 3/8” Expansion-type anchors are not permitted.
E. Gasketing for Panel Joints: Gasketing for panel joints shall be EPDM sponge.
F. Access Hatches and Vacuum Relief Apparatuses: Access hatches and vacuum relief
structures shall be provided on cover segments as shown on the Contract Drawings.
Access to any location under the cover shall be gained through integral hinged access
hatches. The access hatch panels shall have the identical properties as the rest of the
cover including loads, deflection, and slip resistance. Vacuum relief apparatuses shall be
sufficient to prevent overdue vacuum stresses. Hatches and vacuum apparatuses shall be
flush with the cover to prevent a tripping hazard or coated bright yellow.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 13: Special Construction Section 13120-6
G. Penetrations: Boots made of EPDM rubber or other material suitable for ambient
conditions.
H. Minimum physical properties shall be as shown in Tables 1 and 2:
Table 1. Laminate Minimum Physical Properties – Pultruded FRP
Property @ 70⁰F Value Test Method
Tensile Strength – plank 3"thk. 31,100 psi ASTM D 638
Tensile Strength – plank 2"thk. 30,000 psi ASTM D 638
Tensile Strength – structurals 30,000 psi ASTM D 638
Tensile Modulus – plank 3" thk. 2,486,000 psi ASTM D 638
Tensile Modulus – plank 2"thk. 3,000,000 psi ASTM D 638
Tensile Modulus – structurals 2,500,000 psi ASTM D 638
Compressive Strength – structurals 30,000 psi ASTM D 695
Compressive Modulus – structurals 2,500,000 psi ASTM D 695
Flexural Strength – plank 3" thk. 24,500 psi ASTM D 790
Flexural Strength – structurals 30,000 psi ASTM D 790
Flexural Modulus – plank 3" thk. 885,000 psi ASTM D 790
Flexural Modulus – structurals 1,600,000 psi ASTM D 790
Modulus Elasticity – structurals 2,500,000 psi Full Section
Shear Strength – plank 3" thk. 3,190 psi ASTM D 2344
Shear Strength – plank 2" thk. 4,500 psi ASTM D 2344
Shear Strength – structurals 4,500 psi ASTM D 2344
Shear Modulus – structurals 425,000 psi –
Barcol Hardness 45 ASTM D 2583
Glass Content 45% ASTM D 2584
Water Absorption. 0.6% Max ASTM D 570
Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion (in/in/°F) 4.4 x 10–6
ASTM D 696
Table 2. Laminate Minimum Physical Properties
Property @ 70 deg.F Value Test Method
Tensile Strength 26,500 psi ASTM D 638
Compressive Strength 30,000 psi ASTM D 695
Compressive Modulus 2,500,000 psi ASTM D 695
Flexural Strength 39,400 psi ASTM D 790
Flexural Modulus 1,550,000 psi ASTM D 790
Glass Content 45.6% ASTM D2584
Barcol Hardness 50 ASTM D 2583
Izod Impact Strength 29.1 ft–lb/in ASTM D256
Water Absorption 0.09% Max ASTM D 570
Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion (in/in/°F) 3.6 x 10–6
ASTM D 696
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 13: Special Construction Section 13120-7
2.04 SPARE PARTS
A. Spare parts shall be provided as recommended by the Manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION & STARTUP
A. To the extent possible, all covers shall be pre-assembled prior to shipment to minimize
the need for on-site assembly.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall confirm all field measurements with the approved flat cover
fabrication drawings before fabrication is initiated.
C. Installation of all covers shall be in accordance with Manufacturer’s written installation
and startup instructions and by workers experienced in the handling of similar
EQUIPMENT and materials. The final installation must be certified by the Manufacturer
as complete and correct.
D. All work shall be executed by skilled mechanics with a supervisor experienced in the
erection of flat covers. The flat cover shall be erected plumb and level and in proper
alignment.
E. The Manufacturer shall provide the CONTRACTOR with required clearances, tolerances
and limitations, such as flatness of panels or interface with the peripheral structure.
F. Provisions shall be made to provide adequate drainage of water from the cover to prevent
pooling which may result in over-stressing the flat cover.
G. Once the installation has been certified by the Manufacturer, the CONTRACTOR, with
supervision from the Manufacturer, shall demonstrate operation of the System.
H. Any special tools or instruments required for this startup period shall be provided by the
Manufacturer.
I. After satisfactory startup and the corresponding switch over to normal operation, the
CONTRACTOR shall conduct the performance test as detailed below.
3.02 FIELD PERFORMANCE TESTING
A. Performance testing shall not commence until the Manufacturer and OWNER agree that
the system has been satisfactorily constructed.
B. After the cover system has been satisfactorily started-up, the CONTRACTOR shall
demonstrate that the system will perform as specified.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 13: Special Construction Section 13120-8
C. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the ENGINEER with a written test protocol for
approval prior to conducting testing.
D. The CONTRACTOR shall supply, install and operate all equipment and sensors required
to complete the performance testing.
END OF SECTION
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 13: Special Construction Section 13126-1
SECTION 13126
ODOR CONTROL SYSTEM
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
Furnish and install equipment and appurtenances for a fully functional biofiltration
system as specified and as shown on the Drawings. The work to be performed in this
section shall consist of furnishing all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals
necessary to install and test the odor control system, in place complete with all
appurtenances. The biofilter odor control system consists of a single or multiple pass
through biotrickling filter system utilizing biologically active media and carbon layer,
also included are an automated water and nutrient injection spray system, foul air fan,
duct work, dampers, recirculation system (if required) and other equipment and
appurtenances to provide a complete and functioning system. The system shall also
include a layer of activated carbon to prevent untreated odors from exiting the unit during
startup.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 13140: Technical Submittals
2. Section 11005: Equipment: General Requirements
3. Section 15050: Basic Process Piping Materials and Methods
4. Division 5: Metals
5. Division 16: Electrical
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Submit the following as a single complete initial
submittal in accordance with Section 01340:
1. Product data fully describing all items proposed for use to demonstrate that the
equipment conforms to the Drawings and specifications.
2. Performance data demonstrating the equipment is capable of operating at the required
foul air and components load.
3. Manufacturer’s catalog data and operating literature on equipment proposed.
4. Utility and nutrient use calculations.
5. Specifications, performance data and calibration curves for fan, motor, and auxiliary
components.
6. System layouts and/or schematics.
7. Elementary and connection wiring diagrams clearly showing external connections to
other equipment.
8. Motor designation and horsepower.
9. Electrical drawings and schematics.
10. Piping systems.
11. NEMA or IEC starter sizes and overload types/sizes.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 13: Special Construction Section 13126-2
12. Enclosure type with interior and exterior elevations with dimensions.
13. Control transformer ratings.
14. Circuit breaker (or fuse) sizes.
15. Auxiliary contacts.
16. Control devices being utilized..
17. Bill of material including spare parts being furnished.
18. Warranty.
B. Manuals: Furnish manufacturer’s installation, lubrication, operation and maintenance
manuals, bulletins, and spare parts list.
C. Affidavits: Submit affidavits from the manufacturer stating that the equipment has been
properly installed, adjusted, and tested and is ready for full-time operation.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The products furnished under this section shall be by a manufacturer that has been
regularly engaged in manufacturing of the equipment and has a minimum of 5 years
experience in design, fabrication and testing of biological odor control systems.
Demonstrate to the satisfaction of the ENGINEER that the quality is equal to equipment
made by those manufacturers named herein.
B. Inspection and Testing Requirements: The OWNER reserves the right to refuse delivery
of any or all pieces of equipment found, upon inspection, to have any defects in
workmanship or materials.
C. Upon completion of the installation, each piece of equipment in each system shall be
tested for satisfactory operation without excessive noise, vibration, overheating, etc.
Compliance shall be based on meeting Contract Documents and all applicable codes and
standards. All equipment shall be adjusted and checked for misalignment, clearances,
supports and adherence to safety standards.
D. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the successful startup and testing of the
odor control system. The manufacturer shall provide supervisory assistance,
instrumentation and testing services required during this phase of the work.
E. Inspection and Testing Requirements: The ENGINEER reserves the right to reject
delivery of any or all pieces of equipment found, upon inspection, to have any or all of
the following: blisters, chips, crazing, exposed glass, cracks, burned areas, dry spots,
foreign matter, surface porosity, sharp discontinuity or entrapped air at the surface of the
laminate.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Place materials in area protected from weather immediately upon delivery to the job site.
Use non-marring slings for loading, unloading and handling units to prevent rope or cable
damage to surfaces and protective wrappings.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 13: Special Construction Section 13126-3
1.05 WARRANTY
A. CONTRACTOR shall warranty the entire system, both in material and workmanship for
a period of twelve months (12) months from the date of substantial completion or
eighteen months (18) from shipment, whichever occurs first. The warranty does not
include the carbon media.
B. The equipment shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship, design and
materials. If any part of the equipment should fail during the warranty period, it shall be
repaired or replaced and the complete system restored to service at no expense to the
Owner.
C. The biological media, on which the biological culture is grown, shall be guaranteed for
10 years from the date of Substantial Completion. If the biological media has to be
replaced in less than 10 years for the system to meet the maximum pressure drop
requirement or H2S removal performance criteria specified herein, it shall be repaired or
replaced by the manufacturer at no additional charge to the Owner.
D. The Manufacturer shall provide a written warranty.
1.06 WARNING SIGNS
A. Each piece of driven machinery which can be started manually by any control station not
within 15 feet of the machine, or which can be controlled automatically by any means,
shall be identified with a warning sign inscribed:
CAUTION
THIS MACHINE IS REMOTELY CONTROLLED
AND MAY START AT ANY TIME
The word “CAUTION” shall be in yellow block letters on black panel at the tip of the
sign which shall have yellow background and text in black block letters. Signs shall be
fabricated from 30-gauge copper-bearing steel and finish shall be high-baked enamel; the
finished signs shall be weather resistant. Signs shall be 10 inches wide by 7 inches high.
Signs shall be located in prominent locations at machines and shall be fastened to
surfaces previously specified for nameplates.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. The system shall comprise of the following major components:
1. The biological odor control system shall consist of one biological treatment stage
(stage 1) followed by an activated carbon polishing stage (stage 2) in series. Vessels
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 13: Special Construction Section 13126-4
shall be of unitary construction, segmented vessels with bolt together connections
shall not be allowed to prevent leakage.
2. The biological media bed shall consist of either synthetic or expanded clay material
which is non-reactive.
3. Activated carbon polishing stage to be utilized during the entire startup period while
the microbiological growth is not sufficient to remove the odors shall be included.
The carbon shall be coal based, pelletized and with a high H2S capacity of 0.3 g/cc.
4. The electric control panel housing shall consist of either (a) a single Programmable
Logic Controller (PLC) system with Human Machine Interface (HMI) and other
components required for the control and monitoring of the system or (b) a control
panel with relay logic.
5. A water panel that houses all components necessary for the control and monitoring of
the media irrigation system including an automatic flow control system. The water
panel must be a stand alone unit separate from the electric control panel.
6. Odor control fan/exhauster to move the odorous air from the source and be able to
compensate for all pressure losses at the design airflow.
7. The odor control system shall be Model EG-8.1 as supplied by EcoVerde or Integrity
Municipal Systems Model I-Box® 6000, or BioAir, or approved equal.
B. The system shall be designed for continuous, automatic operation and also be capable of
manual operation. Access ports shall be provided to allow access to the internals of the
system. The system shall be designed to withstand ambient temperatures up to 130
degrees F. The system and all accessories shall be factory mounted, piped, and wired to
the maximum extent possible.
2.02 PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Design and Performance Criteria:
1. Criteria: The system shall be capable of removing foul air at a rate no lower than the
rate shown on the following table.
2. Foul air removed from the facilities will have an average and peak concentration of
hydrogen sulfide (H2S) and design air flow rate as listed in the following table:
Air Flow Rate,
CFM
Avg. Inlet H2S
Concentration
Peak H2S
Concentration
600 200 300
3. System Performance: The odor control system shall demonstrate the following
performance when operating under the design flow conditions listed above:
a. The system shall remove on average a minimum of 99% of the inlet hydrogen
sulfide or have an outlet concentration of ≤0.5 ppm, whichever is greater.
b. Operational Pressure Drop: The pressure drop shall not exceed 5 in.w.c. across
the biotrickling vessel.
4. All components of the system shall be compatible with the conditions and chemicals
to which they will be subjected to during normal operation, which include but are not
necessarily limited to:
a. Hydrogen Sulfide
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 13: Special Construction Section 13126-5
b. Sulfuric Acid
c. Carbon Disulfide and other Sulfides/Disulfides
d. Mercaptans
e. VOCs
5. Minimum Overall Empty Bed Residence Time (EBRT):15 seconds unless otherwise
approved by the ENGINEER.
6. Blowers:
a. Blower performance ratings shall be based on tests made in accordance with
AMCA Standard 210 and licensed to bear the AMCA Seal for performance.
Blower shall have a sharply rising pressure characteristic extended throughout the
operating range to assure quiet and stable operation.
b. The supplier shall provide sound power level ratings in accordance with AMCA
Standards 300 and 301. Sound power ratings shall be in decibels (reference 10E-
12 watts) in eight octave bands. At the rated fan operating conditions, the blower
shall not produce noise levels that exceed the following octave band:
Center Frequency (Hz) 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
Sound Power Level 102 102 109 107 103 102 100 93
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Blower bearings shall be grease lubricated, precision anti-friction ball or spherical roller,
self-aligning, pillow block design. Bearings shall be designed for a minimum L-10 life of
30,000 hours (150,000 hours L-50 life) when rated at the blower’s maximum cataloged
operating speed. Blower bearings shall be visible and accessible for inspection and
maintenance. Bearings enclosed within the blower housing where they can be exposed to
the corrosive gas stream are not acceptable.
B. Blower shall be constructed in accordance with the ASTM D-4167 standard specification
for fiber-reinforced plastic blowers to ensure structural integrity. All parts exposed to the
gas stream shall be constructed of, or encapsulated in, an FRP laminate capable of
resisting continuous airstream temperatures of 250 degrees Fahrenheit.
C. All resins shall be clear to allow detection of subsurface imperfections. The use of
pigments, gel coats, inhibitors and additives which may disguise flaws in the laminate is
prohibited.
D. Blower housing shall be constructed of a fire retardant polyester resin with an ASTM E84
Class I rating. (Option: housing shall be constructed with a fire retardant vinyl ester resin
with an ASTM E84 Class II rating no greater than 30.) Housing laminate construction
shall conform to ASTM Standard C-582. Airstream surfaces shall be smooth to minimize
resistance and prevent buildup of airborne contaminants. Shaft hole openings shall be
fitted with a Teflon closure having a maximum clearance of 1/32” to minimize leakage.
Option: blower shall be furnished with a lubricatable, double-lip, Teflon or Viton shaft
seal.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 13: Special Construction Section 13126-6
E. Wheel shall be of backwardly inclined non-overloading design or radial design for
increased efficiency. Wheel shall be fabricated of fire-retardant vinyl ester with an
ASTM E84 Class II rating no greater than 30. Wheel hub shall be permanently bonded to
the shaft and completely encapsulated in FRP to insure corrosion resistant integrity. Steel
wheels coated with FRP or wheels with taper-lock hubs are not acceptable.
F. Shaft shall be ASTM A-108 steel, grade 1040/1045 with an FRP sleeve fixed securely
and bonded to the wheel backplate. The sleeve shall extend out through the housing shaft
hole for corrosion protection. (Option: shaft or shaft sleeve shall be 316 SST or Hastelloy
C-276). The shaft first critical speed shall be at least 125 percent of the blower’s
maximum operating speed. Shafts shall be counter-sunk for tachometer readings.
G. Blower balance and run test: The wheel and shaft shall be dynamically balanced, as an
assembly, in accordance with ASTM D-4167 and ANSI S2.19-1975, Grade 6.3. Prior to
shipment, completed blowers shall receive a final test-balance at the required operating
speed.
H. If the blower is not installed on the biofiltration vessel then vibration isolation shall be
installed per blower manufacturer’s recommendation.
I. Air ducting:
1. Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) ductwork shall be fabricated in accordance with
National Bureau of Standards Voluntary Product Standard PS 15-69 except where
fittings are not covered, then use the geometry of SMANCA standard geometries. The
resin shall be a biphenyl A polyester that provides high chemical resistance. The FRP
ductwork shall be rated to withstand a minimum of 10-inch water vacuum. The FRP
duct shall be flanged where required to mate with devices, equipment, or to provide
flanges for supporting the ducts. All duct joints shall be of the butt type where not
flanged. The flame spread of the FRP shall be a maximum of 25 when tested in
accordance with ASTM E84-69.
2. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) ductwork shall be fabricated in accordance with SMACNA
Thermoplastic Duct (PVC) Construction Manual for 10-inch W.G. negative pressure
on suction sides of fans and for 10-inch W.G. positive pressure on fan discharges.
Duct supports, access doors, and flanged joints shall conform to the details of
construction as described in this manual. The plastic sheet from which the duct is
fabricated shall meet ASTM D1927, specification for rigid PVC plastic sheet. The
flame spread of the PVC shall be a maximum of 25 when tested in accordance with
ASTM E84-69.
3. Flexible connections in ducts shall be made of neoprene fiberglass cloth, insulated in
folds, and of sufficient length to accommodate the maximum deflection resulting
from vibration and contraction without causing strain. Minimum length in folded
position shall be 4 inches. Flexible duct connections shall be Ventfabrics, Inc Vention
(for exterior joints) or Ventel (for interior); Duro-Dyne Corp. Duration; or approved
equal.
4. Flexible branches shall be U.L. listed insulated factory-fabricated assemblies.
Flexible ducts shall be JP Lamborn Type PR-25; ATCO Series 40; or approved equal.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 13: Special Construction Section 13126-7
5. Duct support details and spacing shall conform to the most current edition of the
SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standard, Metal and Flexible.” The specific
support detail utilized shall be as appropriate for each particular duct and location,
except as otherwise shown. Duct supports shall be hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication.
J. Vessel
1. The reactor vessel shall be free standing, packaged or skid mounted. Vessel shall be
constructed from fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) in accordance with ASTM
D4097 and C582, utilizing Interplastics 845 B gelcoat (or equal) with 3% UV
inhibitor. Vessel shall be completely corrosion resistant.
2. Resin used in the system liner and structural laminates shall be a premium vinyl ester
type such as Corezyn 8301, Hetron 922 by Ashland Chemicals, Derakane 411 by
Dow Chemical, Vipel F010 by AOC, or approved equal. The resin shall be reinforced
with an inner veil of a suitable synthetic organic fiber such as Nexus 111-00010, or
approved equal. Outer surface shall be UV protected. Any material of construction
other than vinyl ester resin shall not be acceptable.
3. Glass fiber reinforcement used shall be commercial grade, corrosion resistant
borosilicate glass. All glass fiber reinforcement shall be Type C, chemical grade,
Type E electrical grade. Surfacing veil shall be 10 mil Nexus 111-00010 or approved
equal. Mat shall be Type "E" (electrical grade) glass, 1.5 oz. per sq. ft with a nominal
fiber length of 1.25 + 0.25-inches, with a silane finish and styrene soluble binder.
Continuous glass roving, used in chopper gun spray-up applications shall be type "E"
grade with chrome or silane coupling agent. Alternate layers of mat and woven roving
used for reinforcement.
4. Unless otherwise specified, all fasteners, and metal attachments, such as anchors,
brackets etc. shall be ANSI Type 316 SS. Gaskets, unless otherwise approved shall be
EPDM.
2.04 SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Biotrickling Filter Vessel shall be free standing, packaged, skid mounted.
B. Foul air inlet, air outlet, spray headers, baffles, media support, drain and all connections
shown on the Contract Drawings shall be provided by the manufacturer. Tie down lugs
shall be integrally molded into the walls of the vessels. All external bolts shall be Type
316 stainless steel and designed for the specified loads. Interior fasteners shall be of
corrosion resistant materials such as PVC, FRP, or 316 SS.
C. A 1/4-inch thick, 60 durometer neoprene rubber sheet shall be placed underneath each
vessel.
D. The biological media shall have an available specific surface area and void space that
shall minimize the potential for short circuiting and encourage a uniform water and air
flow pattern over the entire media cross sectional area. Media shall resist compaction or
swelling due to anticipated moisture levels and shall not degrade when subjected to low
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 13: Special Construction Section 13126-8
pH conditions of <2 SU, and shall be sufficient to ensure the performance requirements
of this specification are met. Synthetic or expanded clay media are acceptable.
E. Irrigation System
1. The vessel shall be configured with multiple or a single irrigation point which shall
evenly distribute the irrigation water over the entire upper surface of the biological
media layer.
2. The irrigation system may (if required) have the ability to recirculate system water as
desired for optimal efficiency and shall be integrated with the fresh water addition
piping.
3. Each irrigation system shall be tested by the Manufacturer and a certificate of
conformity supplied with the shop Drawings to show that the nozzle has been tested
and meets the Manufacturer’s standards for uniform distribution.
4. The irrigation system shall be supplied with a nutrient addition system to provide the
nutrients required by the bacteria for optimal metabolism of the odorous compounds
being treated.
F. Control System
1. Electrical Control Panel (ECP)
2. The ECP enclosure shall be NEMA 4X and constructed of FRP.
3. The ECP shall house the necessary electronic components and an Allen Bradley PLC
and HMI or approved equal for the control and monitoring of the irrigation system.
Alternately, relay logic based control panels are acceptable. The system shall be
controlled on the basis of time for the irrigation cycle and irrigation time shall be
adjustable to sustain conditions appropriate to the activity of the bacteria. There shall
be an allowance to manually operate the irrigation spray for the purpose of routine
maintenance checks.
4. The ECP shall require a single electrical connection as shown on the Electrical
Drawings or as required.
5. NFPA 820 requirements are as follows::
(a) The system shall be designed and fabricated in compliance with National Fire and
Protection Agency Code 820. As a minimum, all equipment installed on the system
shall be rated for Class 1, Division 2, Group D.
(b) All motors and equipment within 3 feet of the airstream shall be rated for Class 1,
Division 2, Group D.
(c) The local control panel will be mounted a minimum of 3 feet from the odor
control vessel and will be shipped loose. The installation and wiring of the remote
mounted control panel to the fan, nutrient pump, and solenoid valve shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor.
6. The Water Control Panel (WCP) shall be constructed of FRP, and be mounted
integral to the vessel. The WCP shall contain valves, solenoid valves, strainers,
metering pumps, pressure gauges, flowmeters, instruments and piping, as needed, for
the control of the irrigation system and shall operate from control signals from the
ECP. The WCP shall allow for a single connection to a potable or reclaimed water
source. The WCP shall house the nutrient addition system.
7. The ECP panel shall not be housed inside the WCP panel.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 13: Special Construction Section 13126-9
2.05 SPARE PARTS
A. At a minimum, the following spare parts shall be supplied with the equipment:
1. One (1) set of fuses, one (1) for each fuse rating.
2. One (1) set of bearings for the blower.
3. One (1) blower belt.
4. Two (2) spray nozzles.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST
A. FRP vessel shall be inspected prior to shipping for conformance to the following:
1. Dimensions match those shown on submittal Drawings and are within Manufacturer’s
specified tolerances.
2. Flanges and connections between reactor parts fit securely without improper bending
or stressing of parts.
3. Damage or imperfections, including cracking/crazing are minimal and in accordance
with this specification.
4. Manufacturer shall keep a record of the quality control document for each reactor
vessel that is available to the ENGINEER upon request.
5. Owner or engineer reserves the right to be present during the FRP fabrication process
at the phase when the mold is ready to witness the inner liner application and the start
of the structural part addition. Owner will be responsible for travel costs.
B. Electrical control panel shall be inspected prior to shipping for conformance to the
following:
1. NEMA rating according to this specification.
2. PLC program (if applicable) shall be tested for proper communication and
functionality.
3. PLC digital and analog inputs (if applicable) shall be electrically tested to ensure
input recognition in the proper area of the PLC program.
4. All wiring between panel components and terminal strips shall be checked for proper
labeling and connection.
C. All water control panel piping and/or other pre-installed piping shall be tested prior to
shipping for conformance to the following:
1. System shall have no leaks when subjected to a pressure test at 1.5 times the
maximum operating pressure for a minimum of 1 hour.
2. All installed instruments, sensors, pumps, actuated valves, and other electrical
components shall be tested for proper operation.
3. All wiring from terminal strips to all electrical components shall be tested to ensure
proper wiring.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 13: Special Construction Section 13126-
10
D. Irrigation system shall be factory tested to ensure compliance with Manufacturer’s
standards for uniform distribution.
3.02 INSTALLATION & EQUIPMENT STARTUP
A. To the extent possible, all equipment shall be pre-assembled prior to shipment to
minimize the need for on-site assembly.
B. Installation of all equipment shall be in accordance with Manufacturer’s written
installation and startup instructions and by workers experienced in the handling of
FRP vessels, electrical work, plumbing and instrumentation. The final installation
shall be certified by the Manufacturer as complete and correct.
C. The Manufacturer shall provide the CONTRACTOR with required clearances,
tolerances and limitations, such as smoothness/flatness of concrete pad.
D. CONTRACTOR shall install water supply with pressure regulator, gravity drain to
wet well with a barometric P-trap, electrical circuit for all required equipment which
may include, but is not limited to, blower, recirculation pump, metering pump, valves
and controls, and all other accessories and appurtenances as may be required by the
Manufacturer for a complete and operational system.
E. Once the installation has been certified by the Manufacturer, the CONTRACTOR,
with supervision from the Manufacturer, shall start the System to begin the biological
acclimation period. This startup period shall take no longer than six (6) weeks but at
any point during this startup period, at the discretion and direction of the
Manufacturer, the CONTRACTOR shall switch the system over to normal operation.
Any minor re-piping or plumbing required will be clearly detailed in the
Manufacturer’s installation and startup manual and will be performed by the
CONTRACTOR.
F. Any special tools or instruments required for this startup/acclimation period shall be
provided by the Manufacturer.
G. After satisfactory startup and the corresponding switch over to normal operation, the
CONTRACTOR shall conduct the performance test as detailed below.
3.03 FIELD PAINTING & CORROSION PROTECTION
A. If painted surfaces are damaged during shipment, off-loading or installation, as long as
the damage is surface only and in no way affects the integrity of the equipment or its
ability to perform, these blemishes, scratches or other imperfections shall be touched up
by the CONTRACTOR in accordance with instructions from the Manufacturer. Materials
used shall be compatible with the original coating material in quality and color.
3.04 PERFORMANCE TESTING
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 13: Special Construction Section 13126-
11
A. Performance testing shall not commence until the Manufacturer and Owner agree that the
system has been satisfactorily started-up and sufficient time has been allowed for the
acclimation of the bacteria.
B. After the odor control system has been satisfactorily started-up, the CONTRACTOR
shall demonstrate that the system will perform as specified.
C. The CONTRACTOR shall provide the ENGINEER with a written test protocol for
approval prior to conducting testing.
D. The CONTRACTOR shall supply, install and operate all equipment, sensors and
instrumentation required to complete the performance testing.
E. H2S Testing Procedure
1. Measure airflow into the unit and adjust to the design airflow +/-10% if necessary.
Airflow shall be measured at the beginning of the test period. The set position on the
damper shall be marked or noted. Airflow shall not change as long as damper remains
in position.
2. Measure pressure drop across each biotrickling filter at beginning of test period.
3. Performance test period shall begin at a noted time and last for four (4) hours. H2S
data from the common inlet location and from the outlet of the odor control system
shall be measured and logged once every 30 minutes to demonstrate performance
during the test period.
a. The inlet H2S data shall be logged with a pre-calibrated OdaLog gas data logger
with appropriate range and accuracy for the inlet air stream (0-1000 ppmv or 0-
200 ppmv range, 1 ppm display resolution or 0.0-50.0 ppmv range, 0.1 ppmv
display resolution) or with portable H2S analyzer from Interscan.
b. The outlet H2S data shall be logged with a pre-calibrated OdaLog gas data logger
with appropriate range and accuracy for the outlet air stream (0.00-2.00 ppmv
range, 0.01 ppmv display resolution or 0.0-50.0 ppmv range, 0.1 ppmv display
resolution) or with portable H2S analyzer from Interscan.
F. H2S Acceptance Criteria: The system’s H2S removal efficiency shall be determined by
calculating the average inlet H2S concentration and the average outlet H2S concentration
and using the following formula: H2S removal efficiency (%) = (1 – average outlet H2S
concentration/average inlet H2S concentration) x 100. Data points that are greater than 2x
the average will not be included in the calculation. The H2S removal efficiency shall
meet the criteria specified above for the system to be accepted.
3.05 MANUFACTURER’S SERVICES
A. Start-up assistance, testing, and training: Manufacturer’s factory trained representative
for one (1) separate trip unless otherwise approved by the ENGINEER.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 13: Special Construction Section 13126-
12
B. Performance testing assistance: Manufacturer’s factory trained representative for one (1)
separate trip unless otherwise approved by the ENGINEER.
3.06 EQUIPMENT NAME PLATES
A. Each separate piece of equipment shall be furnished with a unique name plate identifying
the Manufacturer, model & serial number, date of manufacture and, if applicable,
capacity and any performance limitations. The nameplates shall be engraved stainless
steel or laminated in FRP and firmly affixed to the exterior surface of the equipment and
in a location that is accessible and easily read.
END OF SECTION
DIVISION 15
MECHANICAL
Division 15 - Mechanical
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 15: Mechanical Section 15050-1
SECTION 15050
BASIC PROCESS PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Basic piping materials and methods.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM): D 2240 - Test Method for
Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness.
B. Refer to Section 09800 for coating requirements for exterior of exterior piping.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Exposed Piping: Piping within buildings, vaults, tunnels, or other structures without
regard to elevation of piping, or exposed piping outside buildings and structures.
B. Buried Piping: Piping actually buried in soil or cast in concrete.
C. Wet Wall: Wall with water on at least one side.
1.4 INTENT OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. Except in details, piping is indicated diagrammatically. Sizes and locations are
indicated on the Drawings. Not every offset and fitting, or structural difficulty that
may be encountered has been indicated on the Drawings.
B. Perform minor modifications to piping alignment where necessaryto avoid structural,
mechanical, or other type of obstructions that cannot be removed or changed:
1. Modifications are intended to be of minor scope, not involving a change to
the design concept or a change to the Contract Price or Contract Time.
1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements:
1. Venting Piping Under Pressure:
a. Lay piping under pressure flat or at a continuous slope without air
traps, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
b. Install plug valves as air bleeder cocks at high points in piping.
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 15: Mechanical Section 15050-2
Provide one inch plug valves for water lines, and 2 inch plug valves
for sludge lines, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
c. Provide additional pipe taps with plug cocks and riser pipes along
piping as required for venting during initial fillings, disinfecting, and
sampling.
d. Before piping is placed into service, close plug valves and install
plugs. Protect plugs and plug valves from corrosion in accordance
with Section 09800.
2. Restraining Piping:
a. Restrain piping as follows:
1) When piping is underground, use mechanical restraints
throughout. All buried piping shall be restrained.
2) When piping is aboveground or under water, use mechanical
or structural restraints.
b. Provide restraints with ample size to withstand thrust forces resulting
from test pressures.
3. Connections to Existing Piping:
a. Expose existing piping to which connections are to be made with
sufficient time to permit, where necessary, field adjustments in line,
grade, or fittings:
1) Protect domestic water supplies from contamination:
a) Make connections between domestic water supplyand
other water systems in accordance with requirements
of public health authorities.
b) Provide devices approved byowner of domestic water
supply system to prevent flow from other sources into
the domestic supply system.
b. Make connections to existing piping and valves after sections of new
piping to be connected have been tested and found satisfactory.
c. Provide sleeves, flanges, nipples, couplings, adapters, and other
fittings needed to install or attach new fittings to existing piping and
to make connections to existing piping.
4. Connections to In-Service Piping:
a. Shutdown in-service piping in accordance with Section 01040:
1) Establish procedures and timing in a conference attended by
CONTRACTOR, ENGINEER, and OWNER of the in-service
piping.
5. Connections of Dissimilar Metals:
a. Connect ferrous and nonferrous metal piping, tubing, and fittings with
dielectric couplings especially designed for the prevention of
chemical reactions between dissimilar metals.
b. Nonferrous metals include aluminum, copper, and copper alloys.
c. For flanged piping with dissimilar metals use an insulated coupling
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 15: Mechanical Section 15050-3
or insulating gasket.
6. All pipe tapping saddles are to be of bronze construction, unless noted
otherwise on the Drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Dearborn Brass Company, Model Number 5358.
2. Keeney Manufacturing Company, Model Number 102 or Number 105.
3. Beaton and Corbin, Model Number 1 or Number 13.
B. Material: Chrome plated steel plate.
2.2 LINK SEAL
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Calpico, Inc.
2. Thunderline Corporation.
B. Characteristics:
1. Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking neoprene or synthetic
rubber links shapes to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe
and wall opening.
2. Assemble links solely with stainless steel bolts and nuts to form a continuous
rubber belt around the pipe.
3. Provide a stainless steel pressure plate under each bolt head and nut. Isolate
pressure plate from contact with wall sleeve.
4. The link seals used in the chemical storage containment areas shall be
corrosion resistant to the chemicals contained in the chemical storage tanks.
2.5 BURIED PIPING
A. All buried piping shall also be provided with an identification tape (non detectible)
placed 3 feet above the crown of the pipe. The tape shall be an inert polyethylene-
plastic impervious to alkalis, acids, chemical reagents, and solvents likely to be
encountered in the soil. The tape shall be a minimum of 4.0 mils thick and not less
than 3" wide. The color of the tape and the text will be selected by OWNER.
Lettering shall be minimum 1 ½" high. The OWNER will select text for each pipe
run using manufacturer’s normally available stock.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 15: Mechanical Section 15050-4
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Existing Conditions:
1. Locate and expose existing structures, piping, conduits, and other facilities
and obstructions which may affect construction of underground piping
before starting excavation for new underground piping and appurtenances.
2. Verify sizes, elevations, locations, and other relevant features of existing
facilities and obstructions. Determine conflicts for the construction of the
new underground piping and appurtenances.
3. Make piping location and grade adjustments to resolve conflicts between new
piping and existing facilities and obstructions.
3.2 WALL AND SLAB PENETRATIONS
A. Provide sleeves for piping penetrations through masonry and concrete walls, floors,
ceilings, roofs, pilasters, columns, piers, and beams unless specified or otherwise
indicated on the Drawings.
B. For piping 1 inch in nominal diameter and larger, provide sleeves with minimum
inside diameters of 1 inch plus outside diameter of piping. For piping smaller than
1 inch in nominal diameter, provide sleeve of minimum twice the outside diameter
of piping:
1. Arrange sleeves and adjacent joints so piping can be pulled out of sleeves and
replaced without disturbing the structure.
2. Cut ends of sleeves flush with surfaces of concrete, masonry, or plaster.
3. Conceal ends of sleeves with escutcheons where piping runs through floors,
walls, or ceilings of finished spaces within buildings.
4. Seal spaces between pipes and sleeves.
C. Cast couplings or wall pieces in walls for penetrations of buried rigid piping
including cast iron, ductile iron, reinforced concrete, and vitrified clay through
structures:
1. Provide couplings or wall pieces with mechanical push-ons, or similar
flexible joints at outside of walls.
2. Provide additional similar joints in piping at transition points between
trenches and structure excavations.
3. For steel piping, single joints may be used in lieu of 2 joints. Locate single
joints outside within 2 feet from outside faces of walls.
D. Link Seal: Use link seals where seal is used to seal at wet wall sleeves as shown on
the Drawings. Coordinate the inside diameter of the wall sleeve with the size of the
seal to provide watertight sealing.
3.3 EXPOSED PIPING
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 15: Mechanical Section 15050-5
A. Install exposed piping in straight runs parallel to the axes of structures, unless
indicated otherwise:
1. Install piping runs plumb and level, unless otherwise indicated on the
Drawings.
B. Install exposed piping after installing equipment and after piping and fitting locations
have been determined.
C. Support piping in accordance with Section 15141 and as shown on Drawings:
1. Do not transfer pipe loads and strain to equipment.
D. In addition to the joints indicated on the Drawings, provide unions, flexible
couplings, flanged joints, and other types of joints or means which are compatible
with and suitable for the piping system, and necessary to allow ready assembly and
disassembly of the piping.
E. Assemble piping without distortion or stresses caused by misalignment:
1. Match and properly orient flanges, unions, flexible couplings, and other
connections.
2. Do not subject piping to bending or other undue stresses when fitting piping.
Do not correct defective orientation or alignment by distorting flanged joints
or subjecting flange bolts to bending or other undue stresses.
3. Flange bolts, union halves, flexible connectors, and other connection
elements shall slip freely into place.
4. After piping assembly to fit when proper fit is not obtained.
5. Install eccentric reducers or increasers with the top horizontal for pump
suction piping.
3.4 BURIED PIPING
A. Bury piping with minimum 4 foot cover without air traps, unless otherwise indicated
on the Drawings.
B. Where 2 similar services run parallel to each other, piping for such services may be
laid in the same trench. Lay piping with sufficient room for assembly and
disassembly of joints, for thrust blocks, for other structures, and to meet separation
requirements of public health authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Laying Piping:
1. Lay piping in finished trenches free from water or debris. Begin at the lowest
point with bell ends up slope.
2. Place piping with top or bottom markings with markings in proper position.
3. Lay piping on an unyielding foundation with uniform bearing under the full
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 15: Mechanical Section 15050-6
length of barrels.
4. Where joints require external grouting, banding, or pointing, provide space
under and immediately in front of the bell end of each section under and
immediately in front of the bell end of each section laid with sufficient shape
and size for grouting, banding, or pointing of joints.
5. At the end of each day’s construction, plug open ends of piping temporarily
to prevent entrance of debris or animals.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Piping Cleaning:
1. Upon completion of installation, clean piping interior of foreign matter and
debris. Perform special cleaning when required by the Contract Documents.
2. Maintain pipe in clean condition during installation.
3. Before jointing piping, thoroughly clean and wipe joint contact surfaces and
then properly dress and make joint.
4. Immediately prior to pressure testing, clean and remove grease, metal
cuttings, dirt, or other foreign materials which may have entered the system.
5. At completion of work and prior to final acceptance, thoroughly clean work
installed under these Specifications. Clean equipment, fixtures, pipe, valves,
and fittings of grease, metal cuttings, and sludge which may have
accumulated by operation of system, from testing, or from other causes.
Repair any stoppage or discoloration or other damage to parts of building, its
finish, or furnishings, due to failure to properly clean piping system, without
cost to Owner.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY AND CONTROL
A. General:
1. Upon completion of piping, test all piping systems.
2. Test all piping systems at 150 psi for 2 hours, unless otherwise indicated.
Pressure shall stabilize within 2% of 150 psi.
3. Isolate equipment which may be damaged by the specified pressure test
conditions.
4. Perform pressure test using calibrated pressure gauges and calibrated
volumetric measuring equipment to determine leakage rates. Select each
gauge so that the specified test pressure falls within the upper half of the
gauge’s range. Notify the OWNER 24 HRS prior to each test.
5. Unless otherwise specified, completelyassemble and test new piping systems
prior to connection to existing pipe systems.
6. Acknowledge satisfactory performance of tests and inspections in writing to
OWNER prior to final acceptance.
7. Provide all necessary equipment and perform all work required in connection
with the tests and inspections.
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 15: Mechanical Section 15050-7
8. Bear the cost of all testing and inspecting, locating and remedying of leaks
and any necessary retesting and re-examination.
9. CONTRACTOR to dispose of testing water.
B. Pressure Testing Methods and Criteria:
1. Types of pressure testing and inspection to be employed include hydrostatic
pressure testing, and hydrostatic infiltration/exfiltration testing.
2. Pressurized liquid systems:
a. The following liquid piping systems shall have zero leakages at the
specified test pressure throughout the specified duration:
1) Exposed piping.
2) Buried insulated piping and buried or exposed pressure
piping.
3. Hydrostatic pressure testing:
a. All joints, including welds, are to be left exposed for examination
during the test.
b. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints for additional
pressure load under test. Equipment in piping system with rated
pressure lower than pipe test pressure shall be isolated by valves
or blind flanges.
c. Do not paint or insulate exposed piping until successful performance
of pressure test.
d. Test soil, waste and drain piping at completion of installation of each
stack or section of piping by filling system with water to highest point
and checking joints and fittings for leaks. Leaks must be eliminated
before proceeding with work or concealing piping. Minimum test
heights shall be 10 FT.
END OF SECTION
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 15: Mechanical Section 15075-1
SECTION 15075
PLASTIC PIPING AND TUBING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Plastic pipe, tubing, and fittings.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1. B 16.12 - Cast Iron Screwed Drainage Fittings.
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. D 648 - Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics Under Flexural
Load. 2. D 1248 - Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion
Materials.
3. D 1784 - Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds
and Chlorinated by Poly (Vinyl Chloride ) (CPVC) Compounds. 4. D 1785 - Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe,
Schedules 40, 80, and 120.
5. D 2321 - Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic
Pipe for Sewers and other Gravity-Flow Applications. 6. D 2412 - Test Method for Determination of External Loading Characteristics
of Plastic Pipe by Parallel-Plate Loading.
7. D 2466 - Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings
Schedule 40. 8. D 2467 - Specification for Socket-Type Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic
Pipe Fittings Schedule 80.
9. D 2513 - Specification for Thermoplastic Gas Pressure Pipe Tubing and
Fittings. 10. D 2564 - Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Plastic Pipe and Fittings.
11. D 2661 - Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS)
Schedule 40 Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings. 12. D 2665 - Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic, Waste and
Vent Pipe Fittings.
13. D 2680 - Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) and Poly
(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Composite Sewer Pipe. 14. D 2751 - Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS)
Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
15. D 3034 - Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer
Pipe and Fittings.
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 15: Mechanical Section 15075-2
16. D 3212 - Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using
Flexible Elastomeric Seals. 17. D 3350 - Specification for Polyethylene Plastic Pipe and Fittings Material.
18. D 4101 - Specification for Propylene Plastic Injection and Extrusion
Materials.
19. F 439 - Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride)
(CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. 20. F 441 - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC)
Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80.
21. F 477 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining
Plastic Pipe. 22. F 483 - Method for Total Immersion Corrosion Test for Aircraft Chemicals
Maintenance.
23. F 493 - Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl
Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 24. F 679 - Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large-Diameter Plastic
Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
C. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
1. C 900 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fabricated Fittings.
2. C-115 - Standard for Flanged Ductile Iron Pipe with Grey Iron Threaded
Flanges.
D. Code of Federal Regulations:
1. Title 49.
E. Plastic Pipe Institute ( PPI):
1. PE 3408.
F. United States Department of Transportation:
1. Materials Transportation Bureau.
1.3 ABBREVIATIONS
A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene.
B. CPVC: Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride.
C. DWV: Drain, waste, and vent.
D. ID: Inside diameter of piping or tubing.
E. NPS: Nominal pipe size followed by the size designation.
F. NS: Nominal size of piping or tubing.
G. PE: Polyethylene.
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 15: Mechanical Section 15075-3
H. PP: Polypropylene.
I. PVC: Polyvinyl Chloride.
J. SDR: Standard dimension ratio.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Describe materials and installation equipment including fusion
machine.
B. Manufacturer’s Published Installation Instructions.
C. Certificates:
1. Submit manufacturer’s certificate attesting that plastic pipe, tubing, and fitting types meet specified requirements.
2. Copies of solvent cement manufacturer’s report and certification in
accordance with ASTM D 2564 for PVC piping, and ASTM F 493 for CPVC piping.
D. Qualifications of installation crew for PE piping, including qualifications of the
fusion machine technician.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fusion Machine Technician Qualifications: 1 year experience in the installation of
similar PE piping systems from the same manufacturer.
B. Provide pipe and tubing bearing NSF seal, except for drainage piping.
C. Mark plastic pipe with nominal size, type, class, schedule or pressure rating, and manufacturer.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect piping materials from sunlight, scoring, and distortion.
B. Do not allow surface temperatures on pipe and fittings to exceed 120 degrees
Fahrenheit.
C. Store and handle pipe and fittings as recommended by manufacturer in published
instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 15: Mechanical Section 15075-4
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Extruding and Molding Material: Virgin material containing no scrap, regrind, or
rework material except where permitted in the referenced standards.
B. Fittings: Same material as the pipe and of equal or greater pressure rating, except the
DWV fittings need not be pressure rated.
C. Unions 2-1/2 inches and smaller: Socket end screwed unions. Make unions 3 inches
and larger of socket flanges with 1/8 inch full face soft rubber gasket.
2.2 PVC PIPING, SCHEDULE TYPE
A. Materials:
1. PVC schedule type piping: Designation PVC 1120 conforming to ASTM D
1785 and appendices thereto. a. Pipe and fittings: Extruded from Type I, Grade 1, Class 12454-B
material in accordance with ASTM D 1784.
b. PVC Schedule Type Piping: Schedule 80 unless otherwise indicated
on the Drawings. 2. Fitting:
a. Supplied by pipe manufacturer.
b. Pressure Fittings: In accordance with ASTM D 2466 or ASTM D
2467. c. DWV Fittings: In accordance with ASTM D 2665.
3. Solvent Cement: In accordance with ASTM D 2564.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. PVC Piping, Schedule Type:
1. Mark pipe and fittings in accordance with ASTM D 1785.
B. PVC Piping, Class Type:
1. Test pipe to withstand, without failure, 600 pounds per square inch, gauge, hydrostatic pressure for a minimum of 5 seconds.
2. Test integral bell with the pipe.
C. CPVC Piping:
1. Mark pipe and fittings in accordance with ASTM F 441.
2.4 DETECTABLE TAPE
A. Materials: 1. 3.5 mil thick solid foil core encased in a protective plastic jacket.
2. Resistant to alkalies, acids and other destructive elements commonly found
in soil.
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 15: Mechanical Section 15075-5
3. Lamination shall have sufficient strength that the layers cannot be separated
by hand. 4. Total composite thickness hall be 4.3 mils minimum. 5. Foil core to be visible to ensure continuity.
6. Minimum tensile strength of 63 lbs in the machine direction and 68 lbs in the
transverse direction per three (3) inch strip. 7. Continuous warning message repeated every 16 to 36 inches shall be
imprinted on the tape surface. Tape shall be colored.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: 1. Where not otherwise specified, install piping in accordance with ASTM F
645, or manufacturer’s published instructions for installation of piping, as applicable to the particular type of piping.
2. Provide molded transition fittings for transitions from plastic to metal or IPS pipe. Do not thread plastic pipe.
3. Locate unions where indicated on the Drawings, and elsewhere where
required for adequate access and assembly of the piping system. 4. Provide serrated nipples for transition from plastic pipe to rubber hose.
5. All buried plastic pipe shall have detectable tape applied along the entire
length of pipe. 6. PVC expansion joints installed on PVC pipelines as conditions require.
B. Installation of PVC Piping, Schedule Type: 1. Exposed 4- inch and larger connections will be van stone style flanged as
shown on the drawings. Spigot van stone style will be used to flange fittings.
Socket van stone style will be used for piping flanges exposed less than 4" and smaller connections will be solvent welded.
2. Neoprene gaskets will be used for all water piping. 3. Solvent weld joints in accordance with ASTM D 2855.
4. Install piping in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Clean and test piping as specified in section 15050.
END OF SECTION
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 15: Mechanical Section 15110-1
SECTION 15110
VALVES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Basic requirement for valves:
1. Furnish and install valves as shown on the Drawings.
2. Furnish and install valves required for proper piping and equipment operation
and maintenance, in addition to the valves indicated on the Drawings, and
specified.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. ASTM D: 1784 Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.
2. ASTM: C504 Rubber-Sealed Butterfly Valves
3. ASTM D 1599: Standard Test Method for Resistance to Short-Time
Hydraulic Pressure of Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings.
B. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
1. AWWA C504: Standard for Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves.
2. AWWA C560-14: Standards for Cast-Iron Slide Gates
1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Pressure Rating: Suitable for service under pressures equal to and less than 1.5 times
the maximum expected working pressure unless noted in on the Drawings.
B. Valve To Piping Connections:
1. Valves 3 inch nominal size and larger: Flanged ends unless otherwise
specified on the Drawings.
2. Valves less than 3 inch nominal size: Screwed ends or True Union.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit detailed technical information relating to the valve including
description of component parts, materials of construction, performance, dimensions,
and weights.
B. Manufacturer’s Published Instructions:
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 15: Mechanical Section 15110-2
1. Submit instructions for installation, operation, and maintenance of valves.
2. Furnish bound sets of installation, operation, and maintenance instructions for
each type of valve 4 inch nominal size and larger.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications:
1. Valves: Manufactured by manufacturers whose valves have had successful
operational experience in comparable service.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. PVC Butterfly Valves:
1. Rating: 10 psi at 75 degrees F.
2. Type: Short body flanged, suitable for a moist, corrosive foul air application
and suitable for thottling foul air flows. Seat shall be fully replaceable
without full valve disassembly.
3. Connections: Flanged.
4. Materials: PVC body and disk, high impact polypropylene lever handle, 316
SS stem. Seat shall be Buna-N or EPDM.
5. Manufacturer: Spears or equal.
B. PVC Knife Valves:
1. Rating: 10 psi at 75 degrees F.
2. Type: Wafer type suitable for long term use with raw sewage.
3. Connections: Socket
4. Materials: ABS body, PVC hubs, 304 SS shaft, paddle, and handle. Seals and
seats shall be chloroprene or santoprene, and shall be sewage and grease
resistant.
5. Manufacturer: Valterra or equal.
C. PVC Ball Valves:
1. Rating: 150 psi at 75 degrees F.
2. Type: Double Union
3. Connections: Socket
4. Materials: PVC body, teflon seats and EPDM O-ring seals, except Viton O-
ring seals for use with chlorine solution.
5. Manufacturer: R&G Sloane, Ashi/America Pro Block, or equal.
D. Slide Gate Valves:
1. Rating: 100 psi at 75 degrees F.
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 15: Mechanical Section 15110-3
2. Type: Resilient Seated
3. Materials:
a. Wetted Parts: Type 304 stainless steel.
b. Valve Stem: Type 304 stainless steel.
c. Seat/Seal: Chloroprene, sewage and grease resistant.
4. Protective Coating: All non-stainless steel surfaces shall be coated with a
minimum thickness of 16 mils epoxy.
5. Operator: Each valve to be factory equipped with a hand wheel operator.
6. Manufacturer: Waterman SS 251-O-Y, or equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Required Information Prior To Installation:
1. Install valves after the required submittal has been accepted.
2. Determine, after flanged valves are selected, the face-to-face dimensions of
flanged valves and flanged check valves.
B. Fabricate piping to lengths taking into account the dimensions of flanged valves.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Provide incidental work and materials necessary for installation of valves including
flange gaskets, flange bolts and nuts, valve boxes and covers, concrete bases,
blocking, and protective coating.
B. Where needed, furnish and install additional valves for proper operation and
maintenance of equipment and plant facilities under the following circumstances:
1. Where such additional valves are required for operation and maintenance of
the particular equipment furnished by CONTRACTOR.
2. Where such additional valves are required as a result of a substitution or
change initiated by CONTRACTOR.
3. Install valves with their stems in vertical position above the pipe, except as
follows:
a. Butterfly valves, gate valves aboveground, globe valves, and angle
valves may be installed with their stems in the horizontal position.
C. Install valves so that handles clear obstructions when the valves are operated from
full open to fully closed.
D. Place top of valve boxes flush with finish grade or as otherwise indicated on the
Drawings.
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 15: Mechanical Section 15110-4
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Make sure all adjustments to valves, operators and appurtenant equipment prior to
Project Acceptance. Operate valve, open, close at system pressures.
3.4 VALVE SCHEDULE
Valve ID
Type
Location
Service
Size
(In)
Actuator
Pressure
Class (min)
V-FA 1 Butterfly Headworks Foul Air 3" Lever 150 psi
V-FA 2 Butterfly EQ Basin Foul Air 4" Lever 150 psi
V-FA 3 Butterfly ASD Foul Air 6" Lever 150 psi
V-FA 4 Butterfly Aerated Sludge
Holding
Foul Air 3" Lever 150 psi
V-FA 5 Butterfly MH 2 Foul Air 1 ½" Nut 150 psi
V-INF 1 PVC Knife Influent to EQ
Basin
Influent
Sewage
12" Handle 10 psi
V-INF 2 PVC Knife Influent Bypass
Aeration Basin 1
Influent
Sewage
12" Handle 10 psi
V-INF 3 PVC Knife Influent Bypass
Aeration Basin 2
Influent
Sewage
12" Handle 10 psi
V-HW-1 Slide Gate Headworks Screened
Sewage
12" Handwheel 100 psi
END OF SECTION
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 15: Mechanical Section 15141-1
SECTION 15141
MECHANICAL - PROCESS PIPE SUPPORTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Supports for pipe, fittings, valves, and appurtenances.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American National Standard Institute or Manufacturer’s Standardization Society
(ANSI/MSS):
1. SP 58 - Pipe and Supports, Design and Manufacture.
2. SP 69 - Pipe Supports and Hangers, Selection and Applications.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Include schedule, indicating where supports will be installed, and
drawings of pipe support system components.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE SUPPORTS
A. Pipe Supports:
1. 2-inch and smaller: Supplied by CONTRACTOR under constraints of these
specifications. Locations for these supports are not specifically shown in
drawings but are the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR.
2. Larger than 2-inch: As shown on the Drawings.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Materials: As indicated on the Drawings.
B. Materials Not Specifically Indicated on the drawings: Hot-dip galvanized steel with
stainless fasteners.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 15: Mechanical Section 15141-2
A. Properly support, suspend or anchor exposed pipe, fittings, valves, and
appurtenances to prevent sagging, overstressing, or movement of piping and to
prevent thrusts or loads on or against connected pumps, valves, meters and other
equipment.
B. Carefully determine locations of inserts. Anchor to form work prior to placing
concrete.
C. Do not use stud type powder actuated fasteners for securing metallic conduit or steel
pipe larger than 1 inch to concrete, masonry, or wood.
D. Suspend pipe hangers from hanger rods. Secured with double nuts.
E. Install continuously threaded hanger rods only where indicated on the Drawings.
F. Use adjustable ring hangers; or adjustable clevis hangers, for 6 inch and smaller
diameter pipe.
G. Use adjustable clevis hangers for pipe larger than 6 inches in diameter.
H. Secure pipes with galvanized double nutted U-bolts or suspend pipes from hanger
rods and hangers.
I. Support Spacing(unless otherwise specified on drawings):
1. Support 2 inch and smaller piping on horizontal and vertical runs at
maximum 5 feet on center, unless otherwise specified.
2. Support larger than 2 inch piping on horizontal and vertical runs at maximum
8 feet on center, unless otherwise specified.
3. Support exposed polyvinyl chloride and other plastic pipes at maximum 5
feet on center, regardless of size.
4. Support tubing, copper pipe and tubing, fiber-reinforced plastic pipe or duct,
and rubber hose and tubing at intervals close enough to prevent sagging
greater than 1/4 inch between supports.
J. Install Supports at the following Locations (unless otherwise shown on Drawings):
1. Horizontal bends.
2. Both sides of flexible pipe connections.
3. Base of risers.
4. Floor penetrations.
5. Connections to pumps, blowers and other equipment.
6. Valves and appurtenances.
K. Securely anchor plastic pipe, valves, and headers to prevent movement during
Buckskin Sanitary District
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements
2015
Specifications
Division 15: Mechanical Section 15141-3
operation of valves.
L. Anchor plastic pipe between expansion loops and direction changes to prevent axial
movement through anchors.
M. Size hanger rods, supports, clamps, anchors, brackets, and guides in accordance with
ANSI/MSS SP 58 and SP 69.
N. Do not use chains, plumbers’ straps, wire, or similar devices for permanently
suspending, supporting, or restraining pipes.
O. Support plumbing drainage and vents in accordance with Uniform Plumbing Code.
P. Supports, clamps, brackets, and portions of support system bearing against copper
pipe: Copper plates, copper throughout, or isolated with neoprene or polyvinyl
chloride tape.
Q. Where pipe is insulated, install over-sized supports and hangers.
R. Install insulation shield in accordance with ANSI/MSS SP 69, Type 40. Shield shall
be galvanized steel unless specified elsewhere.
S. Install riser clamps at floor penetrations and where indicated on the Drawings.
T. Paint or Coat support system components as specified in Section 09800.
END OF SECTION
Division 3 - Concrete
DIVISION 16
ELECTRICAL
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16050 – Page 1
SECTION 16050
GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope:
1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals
as shown on the Drawings, specified, and required to complete the electrical
Work.
B. Coordination:
1. Review installation procedures, drawings and schedules under other Sections
and coordinate with other trades the installation of electrical items that must
be installed with or within formwork, walls, partitions, ceilings and panels.
2. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the installation of all conduits,
inserts, and other items to be embedded in the concrete, or built into walls,
partitions, ceilings or panels constructed by other subcontractors.
CONTRACTOR shall provide other sub-contractors with detailed plans or
sketches of the location of said conduits and other built-in items as may be
required. CONTRACTOR shall keep himself fully informed of the
construction where conduits and other built-in items are to be installed.
CONTRACTOR shall install said conduits and other built-in items in such a
manner and within such time periods as will not unnecessarily delay the work
of the other sub-contractors.
C. General:
1. Interpretation of Drawings:
a. Dimensions shown on the Drawings that are related to equipment are
based on the equipment of one manufacturer. Confirm the dimensions
of the equipment furnished to the space allocated for that equipment.
b. The Drawings show the principal elements of the electrical Work.
They are not intended as detailed working drawings for the electrical
Work, but as a complement to the Specifications to clarify the
principal features of the electrical systems.
c. It is the intent of the Drawings and Specifications that all equipment
and devices, furnished and installed under this Contract, be properly
connected and interconnected with other equipment and devices so as
to render the installations complete for successful operation,
regardless of whether all the connections and interconnections are
specifically mentioned in the Specifications or shown on the Drawings.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16050 – Page 2
d. It also is the intent of the Contract Documents that similar products be
provided by the same manufacturer for uniformity on the Project.
D. Related Sections: CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the requirements of the Work in
this Section along with the requirements of the Sections listed below which includes,
but is not necessarily limited to, Work that is directly related to this Section.
1. Section 01072, Project Record Documents
2. Section 01340, Technical Submittals
3. Section 01423, Reference Standards
4. Section 01600, Product Delivery, Storage and Handling
5. Section 01651, Transportation and Handling of Materials and Equipment
6. Section 01715, Equipment Operation and Maintenance Instructions
E. Temporary Power and Lighting:
1. Refer to Division 1, Temporary Electricity, for temporary power during
construction.
2. Refer to Division 1, Temporary Lighting, for temporary lighting during
construction.
F. Utilities:
1. Refer to Section 16051 UTILITY WORK.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:
1. Permits: Obtain all permits and pay fees required to commence Work and,
upon completion of the Work, obtain and deliver to ENGINEER a Certificate
of Inspection and Approval from the State Board of Fire Underwriters or
other authority having jurisdiction.
2. Codes: Material and equipment shall be installed in accordance with the
current standards and recommendations of the National Electrical Code (latest
edition), the National Electrical Safety Code and with local codes which
apply. Where discrepancies arise between codes, the most restrictive
regulation shall apply.
3. Tests by Independent Regulatory Agencies: Electrical material and equipment
shall be new and shall bear the label of the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., or
other nationally recognized, independent testing laboratory, wherever
standards have been established and label service regularly applies.
4. Utilities:
a. Work in connection with the electric service and utility metering shall
be done in strict conformance with the requirements of APS.
b. Phone Company: None
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16050 – Page 3
B. Reference Standards: Electrical material and equipment shall conform in all respects
to the latest approved standards of the following:
1. National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
2. The American National Standards Institute.
3. The Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.
4. Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association.
5. National Electrical Code.
6. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Refer to Division 1, Shop Drawing Procedures, and the General Conditions.
B. Shop Drawings shall include the following information to the extent applicable to the
particular item:
1. Manufacturer's name and product designation or catalog number.
2. Electrical ratings.
3. Conformance to applicable standards or specifications of ANSI, ASTM,
ICEA, IEEE, ISA, NEC, NEMA, NFPA, OSHA, UL, or other organizations.
4. Dimensioned plan, section, elevations and panel layouts showing means for
mounting, conduit connection, and grounding.
5. Materials and finish specification, including paints.
6. List of components including manufacturer's names and catalog numbers.
7. Internal wiring diagram and drawings indicating all connections to
components and numbered terminals for external connections.
1.04 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit complete manuals including:
1. Copies of all Record Drawings and Wiring Diagrams, test reports,
maintenance data and schedules, description of operation, and spare parts
information.
2. Furnish Operation and Maintenance Manuals in conformance with the
requirements of Division 1.
B. Record Drawings:
1. Furnish Record Drawings in accordance with the requirements of Division 1,
Record Documents, including:
a. System Record Drawings: Include the following:
1) One line wiring diagram of the distribution system.
2) Actual in place conduit and cable layouts with schedule of
conduit sizes and number and size of conductors.
3) Layouts of the power and lighting arrangements and the
grounding system.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16050 – Page 4
4) Control schematic diagrams, with terminal numbers and all
control devices identified, for all equipment.
b. Point-to-Point Interconnection Wiring Diagram Drawings: Include the
following:
1) External wiring for each piece of equipment, panel, instrument
and other devices and conduit wiring to control stations,
lighting panels and motor controllers.
2) Numbered terminal block identification for each wire
termination.
3) Identification of the assigned wire numbers for all
interconnections.
4) Identification of all conduit wiring by the conduit tag in which
the wire is installed.
5) Terminal and pull boxes through which wiring is routed.
6) Identification of all equipment and the Shop Drawing
transmittal numbers for equipment from which the wiring
requirements and termination information was obtained.
2. The Record Drawings shall reflect final equipment and field installation
information.
1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
C. Delivery of Materials: CONTRACTOR shall instruct the manufacturers and vendors
as to the maximum shipping sizes of equipment that can be accommodated at the site.
D. Storage of Materials: Conform to the requirements of Division 1, Storage of
Materials and Equipment.
E. Handling of Materials: Conform to the requirements of Division 1, Transportation
and Handling of Materials and Equipment.
1.06 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Existing Conditions:
1. CONTRACTOR shall examine the site and existing facilities in order to
compare them with the Contract Documents with respect to the conditions of
the premises, location of and connection to existing facilities and any
obstructions which may be encountered.
2. CONTRACTOR shall perform the Work with due regard to safety and in a
manner that will not interfere with the existing equipment or in any way cause
interruption of any of the functions of the plant.
3. Work shall be carried out with a minimum amount of disruption to the
operation of the existing plant and with prior approval of OWNER.
CONTRACTOR shall submit, for approval by OWNER, a detailed written
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16050 – Page 5
procedure for work which affects operation of the existing plant, a detailed
procedure for modifying any existing electrical equipment, and anticipated
time required to complete the Work and the required shutdown time, if any.
4. Where the Work of CONTRACTOR ties in with existing installations,
CONTRACTOR shall take prior precautions and safeguards in connecting the
Work with the existing operating circuits so as to prevent any interruption to
the existing operating circuits. The tying in of Work, installed under this
Contract, with the existing circuits shall be performed only in the presence of
OWNER. Advance notice will be required before any equipment is removed
from service. CONTRACTOR shall notify OWNER, in writing, of his
intention to do such work, providing full details.
1.07 CONTROL CABINETS AND PANELS
A. All control cabinets and panels located in wet or corrosive environments shall be
NEMA 4X, stainless steel, unless otherwise specified or noted on the Drawings. All
outdoor panels (containing electronics rated for less than 122 degrees Fahrenheit)
shall be provided with sunshade structures.
1.08 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A. All electrical equipment shall be capable of operating successfully at full-rated load,
without failure, with an ambient outside air temperature of 25 F to 122 F and an
elevation of 420 feet (MSL).
1.09 AREA CLASSIFICATIONS
A. Wet/Corrosive Locations: The following areas shall be considered wet/corrosive
locations:
1. All outdoor areas.
2. All indoor areas below grade.
3. Inside storage tanks.
4. Areas indicated on the Drawings.
Materials, equipment and incidentals in areas identified as wet locations shall meet
NEC and NEMA requirements for wet or corrosive locations. All equipment
enclosures including pull boxes installed in wet or corrosive locations shall be NEMA
4X, Type 316 stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated. Conduits shall be PVC-
Coated-GRS and shall be terminated at enclosures with watertight, threaded hubs.
B. All equipment enclosures including pull boxes installed indoor (above grade) shall be
NEMA Type 12.
1.10 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16050 – Page 6
A. Schematic diagrams are provided for CONTRACTOR'S guidance in fulfilling the
operational intent of the Contract Documents.
B. It shall be CONTRACTOR'S responsibility to meet all safety and electrical codes, and
to provide all equipment, appurtenances and specialty items required to provide for
complete and operable systems.
C. Review of control schemes submitted by CONTRACTOR shall not relieve
CONTRACTOR of his contractual responsibility to provide complete and successfully
operating systems.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 NAMEPLATES
A. Material: Laminated phenolic, incised to show 3/8-inch high letters, Gothic. The
letters shall be black with white background or match existing unless indicated
otherwise.
B. Border: Minimum 1/8-inch around engraved print with extra length for fastening
devices.
C. Fasteners: Secured with #4-40, round-head, stainless steel, self-tapping screws.
2.02 WIRE MARKERS
A. Refer to Section 16122, 600 Volt Cable.
2.03 CONDUIT TAGS
A. Refer to Section 16131, Rigid Conduit.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide identification of each electrical item, in addition to the manufacturer's
nameplates, to identify the item's function and the equipment or system which it serves
or controls.
B. Identify equipment by means of nameplates. Re-label existing equipment whose
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16050 – Page 7
designation has been changed.
C. Color code and identify all wires and cables by means of wire markers. Identify
power conductors by circuit number, labeled at power source and at the equipment,
and phase.
D. Identify each control and instrumentation signal and status wire by a unique
information, Example:
E. Numbering system shall reflect the actual designations used in the Work and shall be
documented on the point-to-point wiring diagrams. Wire markers shall be clearly
identified at both ends of conductors. Coil spare wiring neatly. Tag each spare wire
with conduit number and wire number.
F. Conduit Tags:
1. Conduit tags shall be yellow, 1-1/2-inches round, aluminum tags. Engraved,
with the conduit number directed by the ENGINEER. Print shall be 1/4-inch
Gothic. The conduit tags shall be manufactured by Brady, Catalog No. 49900,
Almetek Mini-tag, or Pre-Approved Equal.
2. Each tag shall be attached with nylon-coated 48-mil stainless steel wire and
fasteners, as manufactured by Brady, Catalog No. 23310, Almetek Mini-tag,
or Pre-Approved Equal, and brass wire clamps, double ferrule design, as
manufactured by Brady Catalog No. 23312, or Pre-Approved Equal.
G. Identify pull and terminal boxes with nameplates. Identify each box by a unique
number. Numbering system shall reflect the actual designations used in the field and
as documented on wiring diagrams.
END OF SECTION
Tag ID Description Terminal Slot #
FM1-FR Raw Water Influent Flow Rate 22
FCV1-C Flow Control Valve 1 Closed Position 104
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16051– Page 1
SECTION 16051
UTILITY WORK
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope:
1. This section specifies general requirements for the electrical and telephone
utility work.
2. This section specifies several requirements that are not indicated on the
Drawings.
3. All fees must be paid by the CONTRACTOR.
B. Coordination:
1. The CONTRACTOR shall examine APS electrical utility specifications prior
to initiating the work, become intimately familiar with the APS electrical
utility requirements, and investigate any and all additional requirements that
are necessary for this project.
2. CONSTRUCTION-PHASE COORDINATION: CONTRACTOR shall
coordinate all work with the utility companies. This coordination shall
include, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Pre-construction meeting and coordination
b. Blue staking and ductbank locating services
c. Utility cable work (primary and secondary)
d. Utility power pole work
e. Utility transformer work
f. Utility switch and fuse cabinet work
g. City inspection of the service entrance section
h. Utility company inspection
i. New utility energization work
j. Utility demolition work
C. Related Sections:
1. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the requirements of the Work in this Section
along with the requirements of the Sections listed below which includes, but is
not necessarily limited to, Work that is directly related to this Section.
a. Division 1, Submittals.
b. Division 1, Record Documents
c. Section 16061, Grounding
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16051– Page 2
d. Section 16131, Rigid Conduit
1.02 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Existing Conditions:
1. CONTRACTOR shall examine the site and existing facilities in order to
become familiar with the conditions of the premises, location of and
connection to existing utilities and any obstructions which may be
encountered.
2. CONTRACTOR shall perform the Work with due regard to safety and in a
manner that will not interfere with the existing equipment or in any way cause
interruption of any of the functions of the facility.
3. Work shall be carried out with a minimum amount of disruption to the
operation of the existing facility and with prior approval of OWNER.
CONTRACTOR shall submit, for approval by OWNER, a detailed written
procedure for work which affects operation of the existing facility, a detailed
procedure for modifying any existing electrical equipment, and anticipated
time required to complete the Work and the required shutdown time, if any.
1.03 DEMOLITION
A. Utility Demolition:
1. All utility demolition work shall be coordinated with the utility company. At
no time shall the facility be without utility power.
1.04 ELECTRIC UTILITY POWER WORK
A. The CONTRACTOR shall furnish and install all electrical power work in accordance
with the utility company's requirements. All work shall be coordinated with the utility
company prior to start of work. The CONTRACTOR shall obtain the latest copy of
the utility company's specifications. The CONTRACTOR shall bid and construct all
work as required per the utility company's specifications. All work shall be performed
by the Contractor unless specifically indicated to be performed by the utility company.
B. Material and Installation: All material used and all installations shall be in accordance
with the utility company's requirements. Include pull boxes as specified by the utility
company.
C. Inspection: All work requiring inspection by the utility company shall be inspected and
approved by the utility company.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16051– Page 3
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. All material used shall be in accordance with the utility company's requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. All installation shall be in accordance with the utility company's requirements unless
noted otherwise.
3.02 INSPECTION
A. All installations shall be inspected by the utility company. The CONTRACTOR shall
obtain the utility company's acceptance of the work prior to covering the underground
work. All work shall be coordinated with the utility company.
END OF SECTION
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16061– Page 1
SECTION 16061
GROUNDING SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope:
1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals
as shown on the Drawings, specified and required to furnish and install
complete grounding for the electrical systems, structures and equipment.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the
following, except where otherwise shown or specified:
1. NEC Article 250, Grounding.
2. UL Standard No. 467, Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipment.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following:
1. Manufacturer's technical information for grounding materials proposed for
use.
2. Listing of grounding connector types identifying where they are to be used.
3. Layouts of each structure ground grid.
4. Test point construction details.
5. Ground resistance test procedure.
B. Field Test Report
1. Results of ground resistance tests at each test point.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Bare Ground Cable:
1. Material: Annealed, bare, stranded copper, No. 4/0 AWG minimum size or as
otherwise shown on the Drawings (whichever is larger). Product and
Manufacturer: Provide ground cable of one of the following:
a. Cablec Corporation.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16061– Page 2
b. General Cable Corporation.
c. Rome Cable Company.
d. Or Equal.
B. Ground Rods:
1. Material: Copperclad rigid steel rods, 3/4 inch diameter, ten feet long.
2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide ground rods manufactured by one of the
following:
a. Copperweld, Bimetallics Division.
b. ITT Blackburn Company.
c. Or Equal.
C. Grounding Connectors:
1. Material: Pressure connectors shall be copper alloy castings, designed
specifically for the items to be connected, and assembled with Durium or
silicone bronze bolts, nuts and washers. Welded connections shall be by
exothermic process utilizing molds, cartridges and hardware designed
specifically for the connection to be made.
2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide grounding connectors of one of the
following:
a. Pressure Connectors:
1) O.Z./Gedney, Division of General Signal Corporation.
2) Burndy Corporation.
3) Or Equal.
b. Welded Connections:
1) Cadweld by Erico Products, Incorporated.
2) Therm O Weld by Burndy Corporation.
3) Or Equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 STRUCTURE GROUND SYSTEM
A. Provide ground grids as shown on the Drawings.
B. Install No. 4/0 bare copper cable around the exterior perimeter of structures,
minimum 2 feet 6 inches below grade, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings.
C. Install ground rods where shown on the Drawings. Install additional ground rods, if
necessary, to attain a resistance to ground of less than five ohms for each ground grid.
D. For structures with steel columns, install No. 4/0 ground cable from grid to each
column around the perimeter of the structure. Connect cable to steel using
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16061– Page 3
exothermic welds.
E. Connect grids to a continuous underground water pipe system, if available.
F. Provide accessible test points for measuring the ground resistance of each grid.
G. Weld all buried connections, except for test points.
3.02 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. Ground all electrical equipment in compliance with the National Electrical Code.
B. Equipment grounding conductors shall be bare stranded copper cable of adequate size
installed in metal conduit where necessary for mechanical protection. Ground
conductors, pulled into conduits with non-grounded conductors, shall be insulated.
Insulation shall be green.
C. Control panels grounding conductors shall be base stranded copper cable of adequate
size to the ground grid from the AC ground bus and an insulated stranded copper
cable of adequate size to the ground grid from the DC ground bus.
D. Connect ground conductors to conduit with copper clamps, straps or with grounding
bushings.
E. Connect to piping by welding or brazing. Use copper bonding jumpers on all
gasketed joints.
F. Connect to equipment by means of lug compressed on cable end. Bolt lug to
equipment frame using holes or terminals provided on equipment specifically for
grounding. Do not use holddown bolts. Where grounding provisions are not
included, drill suitable holes in locations designated by ENGINEER.
G. Connect to motors by bolting directly to motor frames, not to sole plates or
supporting structures.
H. Connect to service water piping by means of copper clamps. Use copper bonding
jumpers on gasketed joints.
I. Scrape bolted surfaces clean and coat with a conductive oxide resistant compound.
3.03 TESTING
A. The grounding system shall be tested by a third party entity (not the CONTRACTOR
or the supplier).
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16061– Page 4
B. Test the completed ground systems for resistance to ground using an electrical ground
resistance tester. The grounding system maximum resistance shall not exceed five
ohms under normally dry conditions when measured by the resistance tester.
Resistance values above five ohms shall be brought to the ENGINEER'S attention.
C. Test all grounded cables and metal parts for continuity of connection.
D. Test shall be witnessed by the OWNER.
E. Provide test report documenting the test results.
END OF SECTION
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16100 – Page 1
SECTION 16100
DEMOLITION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. The CONTRACTOR shall visit the project site and investigate all work required in
order to construct this project prior to the bid. This site visit is essential since
additional work is required which is not shown on the Drawings. Demolition of
existing electrical shall be as indicated on the Plans, as indicated elsewhere herein,
and as required for the construction of this project.
B. Demolition information shown on the Plans is based on visual field examination and
existing Record Drawings. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for verification of all
items indicated or not. All items affected that are not indicated on the plans shall be
brought to the ENGINEER's attention before demolition for direction.
C. The CONTRACTOR shall confine demolition work to the item specifically
identified on the plans. He shall be liable for any other damage he may inflict to the
existing installations.
D. Where the demolition work involves equipment and material that is owned by or
affects the utility company, the work shall be coordinated and approved by the utility
company.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Care shall be taken in demolition or removal of items as indicated on plans as being
returned to the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the OWNER prior to
removing existing equipment.
B. Whether indicated on the Plans or not, the CONTRACTOR shall provide patching
material to fill voids where demolition has taken place. Patching materials shall
match, as nearly as practical, the existing original structure material for each surface
being patched.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16100 – Page 2
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 COORDINATION
A. The CONTRACTOR shall verify existing field conditions, measurement, circuitry,
and other pertinent information prior to performing any demolition.
B. The CONTRACTOR shall test circuitry and verify that abandoned or demolished
wiring and electrical equipment serve only abandoned facilities. If demolished or
abandoned electrical is necessary for proper operation of facilities to remain in
service, the CONTRACTOR shall immediately notify the ENGINEER for direction.
C. Demolition shall not be performed without coordinating with new construction to
limit down time and ease of switchover. The CONTRACTOR must coordinate with
the ENGINEER and the OWNER prior to any demolition.
D. Prior to performing any demolition work, the CONTRACTOR shall provide
temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during
construction. Temporary wiring shall conform to the National Electrical Code.
E. The CONTRACTOR shall coordinate all work associated with the electrical utility
equipment with the utility company. The disconnecting and removal of the electrical
utility equipment and cables shall be coordinated with the utility company and the
OWNER in order to provide a transition that does not interrupt the power
distribution to the existing or new equipment. Prior to performing any demolition
work, the CONTRACTOR shall provide temporary wiring and connections to
maintain existing systems in service during construction. A generator of appropriate
amperage and voltage shall be provided to feed the required load. The generator
shall be sized (in kW) as required to provided "connected load" to the system
requiring temporary power. Temporary wiring shall conform to the National
Electrical Code.
3.02 PERFORMANCE
A. General: The means and methods of performing electrical demolition and removal
operations are the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. However, equipment
used, and methods of demolition and removal will be subject to approval of the
ENGINEER.
1. Remove exposed abandoned conduit systems, including abandoned conduit
systems in false ceilings.
2. Remove wiring in abandoned conduit systems to source of power supply,
where indicated.
3. In exposed through-structure conduit or foundation locations, cut conduits and
foundation below the finished structure surfaces in order to perform adequate
surface patching.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16100 – Page 3
4. Maintain electrical continuity of existing electrical installations which remain
active. Modify installations as necessary to maintain continuity and provide
adequate access as required by the National Electrical Code.
5. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with
existing electrical installations, and as specified elsewhere herein.
6. Disconnect and leave in place electrical devices and equipment serving
utilization equipment that has been removed or demolished.
B. Cutting: Perform cutting work of existing structure materials by such methods as
will prevent extensive damage beyond the immediate area of cutting. Consult
ENGINEER before removing any concrete slabs, concrete footings, or compacted
dirt underneath and around footings.
C. Unless otherwise indicated existing, electrical equipment, conduit, wire, etc.
indicated for demolition shall be removed and disposed of in a lawful manner, off
Site.
D. The CONTRACTOR shall move existing electrical equipment required to be
returned to the OWNER, to locations as directed by the OWNER. Care shall be
taken to be sure existing electrical equipment being returned to the OWNER does
not become damaged. The CONTRACTOR shall provide a means for storing and or
stacking of the returned equipment prior to moving to final location, if necessary.
E. Items Abandoned in Place:
1. All items to be abandoned in place shall be de-energized.
2. Connections shown or otherwise indicated as disconnected shall be removed
with lugs left in place and with all conduit and cable openings properly plugged
and sealed as required by the NEC.
3. Any abandoned in-place equipment damaged by CONTRACTOR shall be
repaired and restored to its original condition.
END OF SECTION
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16121 – Page 1
SECTION 16121
INSTRUMENTATION CABLE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope:
1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals
as shown on the Drawings, specified and required to furnish and install
instrumentation and telephone cables.
2. The types of cable include the following:
a. Shielded Instrument Cable.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following:
1. Manufacturer's technical information for instrumentation cable proposed for
use.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Single Shielded Pair Instrument Cable:
1. Bare, soft annealed copper, seven strand, PVC insulated conductors, No. 16
AWG minimum, twisted with aluminum-polyester shield, stranded tinned 20
AWG copper drain wire and PVC outer jacket. Color shall be black and
white or black and clear. Rated for 600 volts.
2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a. Okonite Company.
b. Belden Company.
c. Dekoron Wire and Cable Company.
d. Or Approved Equal.
B. Multipaired Shielded Instrument Cable:
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16121 – Page 2
1. Bare, soft annealed copper, seven strand, PVC insulated conductors, No. 16
AWG minimum, twisted in pairs with aluminum-mylar shield over each pair,
tray cable rated, silicone rubber fiberglass fire barrier tape, tinned copper drain
wire, pairs shall be individually numbered, aluminum mylar overall shield,
PVC outer jacket. Color shall be black and white or black and clear. Rated
for 600 volts.
2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a. Okonite Company.
b. Dekoron Wire and Cable Company.
c. Or Approved Equal.
B. Multiconductor Shielded Instrument Cable:
1. Tinned copper, stranded conductors, No. 16 AWG minimum, with overall
aluminum-polyester shield with 85 percent tinned copper braid shield and
overall teflon jacket. Rated for 600 volts, minimum.
2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a. Okonite Company.
b. Belden Company.
c. Or Approved Equal.
C. Cable Terminals:
1. Provide barrel compression fittings or solder dipped, or fork type copper
compression terminals with nylon insulation for termination of cable at all
terminal blocks.
2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a. T&B Sta-Kon.
b. Burndy Insulug.
c. Or Approved Equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in conduit separate from power cables, unless otherwise noted.
B. Ground shield of shielded cables at one end only and as recommended by instrument
manufacturer.
C. Terminate stranded conductors with pre insulated crimp type spade or barrel
compression fitting terminals properly sized to fit fastening device and wire size.
D. Install and terminate vendor furnished cable in accordance with vendor equipment
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16121 – Page 3
requirements.
E. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the installation and termination of the telephone
cables with the telephone company.
F. Install in conformance with the National Electrical Code.
G. DC Signal cables (i.e. 4-20 mA and under 50V DC) shall be separated from AC
voltage cables by a minimum of 12 inches.
3.02 TESTING
A. Test all 600 volt wiring in accordance with the requirements of Section 16122, 600
Volt Cable.
B. Test shielded instrumentation cable shields with an ohmmeter for continuity along the
full length of the cable and for shield continuity to ground. The tests shall be
witnessed by the OWNER and ENGINEER.
END OF SECTION
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16122 – Page 1
SECTION 16122
600 VOLT CABLE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope:
1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals
as shown on the Drawings, specified and required to furnish and install 600
volt cable.
2. The types of cable required include the following:
a. Insulated cable for installation in raceways.
b. Cable for installation in trays (if applicable).
B. Related Sections: CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the requirements of the Work in
this Section along with the requirements of the Sections listed below which includes,
but is not necessarily limited to, Work that is directly related to this Section.
1. Section 16061, Grounding Systems.
2. Section 16121, Instrumentation Cable.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Comply with applicable provisions of
Regulatory Agencies below and others having jurisdiction:
1. Codes: Install cable in accordance with the National Electrical Code and
applicable local codes.
2. Tests by Independent Regulatory Agencies: Cable shall bear the label of the
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
B. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the
following, except where otherwise shown or specified:
1. ASTM B 3, Soft or Annealed Copper Wire.
2. ASTM B 8, Concentric Lay Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium
hard or Soft.
3. ICEA S 66 524, Cross linked thermosetting polyethylene insulated Wire and
Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy.
4. National Electrical Code.
5. UL Standard No. 44, Wires and Cables, Rubber Insulated.
6. UL Standard No. 83, Wires and Cables, Thermoplastic-Insulated.
7. IEEE Standard 971.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16122 – Page 2
C. Factory Production Tests:
1. All wire and cable shall be factory tested in accordance with the requirements
of Underwriters' Laboratories.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following:
1. Manufacturer's literature, specifications, and engineering data for 600 volt
insulated cable proposed for use.
2. Manufacturer's literature for cable markers.
B. Test Records: Submit for review copies of written records of field insulation
resistance test results.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Insulated Cable In Raceways:
1. Material: Single conductor copper cable conforming to ASTM B 3 and B 8
with flame retardant, moisture and heat resistant cross linked polyethylene or
thermoplastic insulation rated 90°C in dry locations and 90°C in wet locations
and listed by UL as Type XHHW-2.
2. Application: Use Type XHHW-2 for all sizes, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Wire Sizes: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG.
4. Stranding: All 600 volt cable shall be stranded.
5. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a. Okonite Company.
b. Rome Cable Corporation.
c. The Southwire Company.
d. Or Approved Equal.
B. Cable for Installation in Trays:
1. Material: Factory assembled cable, single or multi-conductor as required by
the Drawings, Type XHHW-2 bearing the UL label, Type TC and specifically
approved for installation in cable trays and meeting the flame test
requirements of IEEE 1202.
2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a. The Southwire Company.
b. The Okonite Company.
c. Or Approved Equal.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16122 – Page 3
C. Cable Connectors, Solderless Type:
1. For wire sizes up to and including No. 6 AWG, use compression type. Alarm
and control wire shall be terminated using forked type connectors at terminals.
If terminal block is crimp type, then the wire shall be terminated with a
crimped barrel lug or solder dipped.
2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a. T & B Sta Kon.
b. Burndy Hylug.
c. Or Approved Equal.
3. For wire sizes No. 4 AWG and above, use either compression type or bolted
type with silver plated contact faces.
4. For wire sizes No. 250 kcmil and larger, use connectors with at least two
cable clamping elements or compression indents and provision for at least two
bolts for joining to apparatus terminal.
5. Properly size connectors to fit fastening device and wire size.
D. Cable Splices:
1. For wire sizes No. 8 AWG and larger, splices shall be made up with
compression type copper splice fittings. Splices shall be taped and covered
with materials recommended by the cable manufacturers, to provide insulation
equal to that on the conductors.
2. For wire sizes No. 10 AWG and smaller, splices may be made up with
preinsulated spring connectors.
3. For wet locations, splices shall be waterproofed. Compression type splices
shall be waterproofed by a sealant-filled, thick wall, heat shrinkable,
thermosetting tubing or by pouring a thermosetting resin into a mold that
surrounds the joined conductor. Spring connector splices shall be
waterproofed with a sealant-filler.
4. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a. Compression-Type Splices:
1) Burndy Hylink.
2) T&B Color-Keyed Compression Connectors.
3) Or Approved Equal.
b. Spring Connectors:
1) Buchanan B-Cap.
2) T&B Wire Connector.
3) Or Approved Equal.
E. Cable Markers:
1. Provide only heat shrinkage type cable identification, which shall be type
written.
2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide the following:
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16122 – Page 4
a. Omni-Grip by W.H. Brady Company
b. Or Equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install all cables complete with proper identification and terminations at both ends.
Check and correct for proper phase sequence and proper motor rotation.
B. Pulling:
1. Use insulating types of pulling compounds containing no mineral oil.
2. Pulling tension shall be within the limits recommended by the wire and cable
manufacturer.
3. Use a dynamometer where mechanical means are used.
4. Cut off section subject to mechanical means.
C. Bending Radius: Limit to a minimum of six times cable overall diameter.
D. Slack: Provide maximum slack at all terminal points.
E. Splices:
1. Where possible, install cable continuous, without splice, from termination to
termination.
2. Where required, splice where shown on the Drawings or as approved by the
ENGINEER and also where required for cable installation. All splices below
grade, in manholes, handholes and wet locations shall be waterproofed.
3. Splices are not allowed in conduits.
4. All splices shall be pre-approved by ENGINEER.
F. Identification:
1. Each cable and conductor shall be identified in each pullbox, manhole and
each termination point with circuit identification markers, which shall include
the conduit number and wire number. The markers shall be self-laminating
vinyl on white background and shall be printed using a Brady "XC Plus"
printer Or Equal.
G. Phase Identification/Color Coding:
1. All three phase circuits shall be identified, which shall include the conduit
number and phase, at switchgear, motor control centers, manholes (5 KV),
cables and panelboards as "PHASE A"," PHASE B", and "PHASE C". All
conductors not identified with a tag number shall be identified with a tag
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16122 – Page 5
indicating the source.
2. Three phase 480 volt systems shall be color coded as follows:
a. Phase A - Brown.
b. Phase B - Orange.
c. Phase C - Yellow.
d. Neutral (if applicable) - White.
3. Single phase, 120/240 volt circuits shall be color coded as follows:
a. Phase A - Black.
b. Phase B - Red.
c. Neutral - White.
4. Three phase, 208 volt systems shall be color coded as follows:
a. Phase A - Black.
b. Phase B - Red.
c. Phase C - Blue.
d. Neutral - White.
5. No. 6 AWG and Smaller: Provide colored conductors.
6. No. 4 AWG and Larger: Apply general purpose, flame retardant tape at each
end, wrapped in overlapping turns to cover an area of at least 2-inches.
7. Color code power cables in accordance with National Electric Code’s
requirements.
3.02 TESTING
A. Test each electrical circuit after permanent cables are in place to demonstrate that the
circuit and connected equipment perform satisfactorily and that they are free from
improper grounds and short circuits.
B. Individually test 600 volt cable mechanical connections after installation and before
they are put in service with a calibrated torque wrench. Values shall be in accordance
with manufacturers' recommendations.
C. Individually test 600 volt cables for insulation resistance between phases and from
each phase to ground. Test after cables are installed and before they are put in service
with a Megger whose rating is suitable for the tested circuit. Tests shall meet with the
applicable specifications of IPCEA S 66 524 and NEMA WC7 1971. Tests shall be
witnessed by the ENGINEER.
D. The insulation resistance for any given conductor shall not be less than the value
recommended by the IPCEA or a minimum of one megohm for 600 volt and less
service, if not IPCEA listed. Any cable not conforming to the recommended value or
which fails when tested under full load conditions shall be replaced with a new cable
for the full length.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16122 – Page 6
E. Install in accordance with the National Electrical Code (latest edition).
F. Where existing cables are spliced to cables provided under this Contract, the existing
cables shall be tested prior to splicing. Test cables at 1,000 volts DC for one minute.
The entire spliced cable installation shall be re-tested after the splice is completed.
Any existing cable which fails or has a value less than two megohms shall be brought
to the ENGINEER'S attention and the splicing shall not proceed. Tests shall be
witnessed by the ENGINEER.
3.03 WIRING ALLOWANCES
A. CONTRACTOR shall include allowance of necessary conductors and termination to
provide any and all motorized equipment, electrical outlets, fixtures, communication
outlets, instruments, and devices within 10 linear feet of location shown on the
Drawings.
B. CONTRACTOR shall include allowance of necessary conductors and related
materials to provide any and all pull boxes, manholes, and ductbanks within 20 linear
feet of location shown on the Drawings.
C. Prior to installation of any raceway or related items identified in paragraphs A and B
above, the OWNER shall have the right to make changes related to preferred location,
at no additional cost.
D. CONTRACTOR shall include all necessary conductors for all equipment specified,
identified in wiring/raceway schedules, equipment schedules, panelboards schedules,
electrical single line diagrams, block diagrams, fixture schedules, and devices. Said
necessary conductors may not be shown on the plan Drawings, but they shall be sized
by CONTRACTOR in accordance with requirements of the National Electrical Code,
and included in this allowance if the conductors are necessary for the complete
operation of the included device or equipment.
END OF SECTION
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16131 – Page 1
SECTION 16131
RIGID CONDUIT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope:
1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals
as shown on the Drawings, specified and required to furnish and install
conduit and fittings to provide complete, coordinated and grounded raceway
systems.
2. Conduit routings for various systems within buildings and other areas may not
be shown on the Drawings, but shall be established by CONTRACTOR based
upon single line, riser and interconnection diagrams and other information
shown on the Drawings. CONTRACTOR shall provide for the proper
installation of all conduits for each system.
3. The conduit types and the installation methods shall conform to the following:
a. Use schedule 40 PVC conduit for horizontal runs underground or
under slab.
b. Use EMT conduit for exposed indoor conduit runs.
c. Use Galvanized Rigid Steel conduit for outdoor non-corrosive areas.
d. Use Galvanized Rigid Steel conduit for vertical risers in non-corrosion
areas.
e. Use PVC-coated-GRS conduit for exposed indoor and outdoor
conduit runs in corrosive areas.
f. Use PVC-coated-GRS conduit for vertical risers in corrosion areas.
B. Coordination:
1. Conduit runs shown are diagrammatic. Coordinate conduit installation with
piping, ductwork, lighting fixtures and other systems and equipment and
locate so as to avoid interferences.
2. For conduits to be embedded in concrete slabs, confirm adequate slab
thickness and coordinate location of conduits with placement of reinforcing
steel, water stops and expansion joints.
C. Related Sections: CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the requirements of the Work in
this Section along with the requirements of the Sections listed below which includes,
but is not necessarily limited to, Work that is directly related to this Section.
1. Section 03310, Concrete Work.
2. Section 16132, Flexible Conduit.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16131 – Page 2
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the
following, except where otherwise shown or specified.
1. NEC Article 346, Rigid Metal Conduit.
2. NEC Article 347, Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit.
3. UL Standard No. 6, Rigid Metal Electrical Conduit.
4. UL Standard No. 514, Electrical Outlet Boxes and Fittings.
5. UL Standard No. 651, Schedule 40 and 80 PVC Conduit.
6. UL Standard No. 886, Electrical Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in
Hazardous Locations.
7. ANSI C80.1, Specification for Zinc Coated Rigid Steel Conduit.
8. NEMA TC2, Electrical Plastic Tubing, Conduit and Fittings.
9. NEMA TC3, PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.
10. NEMA TC14A, Filament-Wound Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit
and Fittings.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following:
1. Manufacturer's catalog cuts for the conduit, fittings, supports, identification
tags and warning ribbon proposed for use.
2. Construction details of conduit racks and other conduit support systems.
3. Layout drawings showing proposed routing of exposed conduits, conduits
embedded in structural concrete and conduits directly buried in earth.
Drawings shall show locations of pull boxes and penetrations in walls and
floor slabs. Drawings of embedded conduits shall include cross-sections
showing the thickness of the concrete slabs and the locations of conduits with
respect to reinforcing steel and water stops.
4. Conduit identification numbering system for the conduit systems.
B. Record Drawings: Show the actual routing of exposed and concealed conduit runs on
the Record Drawings conforming to the requirements of Section 01072, Record
Documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit, Elbows and Couplings:
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16131 – Page 3
1. Material: Rigid, heavy wall, mild steel, hot dip galvanized, smooth interior,
tapered threads and carefully reamed ends; 3/4-inch NPS minimum size.
2. Manufacturer: Provide conduit and fittings of one of the following:
a. Allied Tube and Conduit.
b. Republic Steel Corporation
c. Or Approved Equal.
B. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) Conduit, Elbows, Fittings, and Couplings:
1. Material: Steel, Not Die Cast. Concrete-tight and rain-tight compression
type. Neither set screw nor indenter type is acceptable. Shall meet NEC 348
and UL 797.
2. Manufacturer: Provide conduit and fittings of one of the following:
a. Allied Tube and Conduit.
b. Republic Steel Corporation
c. Or Approved Equal.
C. PVC Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit, Elbows and Couplings:
1. Material: Rigid, heavy wall, mild steel, hot dip galvanized, interior coating of
2-mil thick urethane, tapered threads, carefully reamed ends, 3/4-inch NPS
minimum size with a factory exterior coating of 40-mil thick polyvinyl
chloride.
2. Color: Color of coating shall be the same on all conduit and fittings.
3. Manufacturer: Provide conduit and fittings of one of the following:
a. Robroy Industries.
b. Perma-Cote Industries.
c. OCAL Incorporated.
d. Or Approved Equal.
D. Metallic Conduit Fittings and Outlet Bodies:
1. Material and Construction: Cast gray iron alloy, cast malleable iron bodies
and covers. Outdoor units to be gasketed and water-tight. Gaskets shall be
of an approved type designed for the purpose. Improvised gaskets are not
acceptable. All units shall be threaded type with five full threads. Material
shall conform to ANSI C80.4 and be listed by UL. Do not use "LB" fittings.
Use type "LBD" fittings wherever the use of fittings is unavoidable.
2. Fittings installed in a hazardous area shall be rated for Class 1, Division 1 or 2,
where required, in compliance with NEC 501-4(a)(b). Fittings shall be UL
listed for specific application.
3. Manufacturer: Provide conduit fittings and outlet bodies of one of the
following:
a. Crouse-Hinds Company.
b. Appleton Electric Company.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16131 – Page 4
c. Or Approved Equal.
E. PVC Coated Conduit Fittings and Outlet Bodies:
1. Material and Construction: Cast gray iron alloy, cast malleable iron bodies
and covers with a factory coating of 40-mil thick polyvinyl chloride, an
interior coating of 2-mil thick urethane and V-seal gasketing. All units shall
be threaded type with five full threads. Material shall conform to ANSI
C80.4.
2. Use: Provide conduit fittings and outlet bodies in all corrosive locations.
3. Manufacturer: Provide PVC coated conduit fittings and outlet bodies of one
of the following:
a. Robroy Industries.
b. Perma-Cote Industries.
c. OCAL Incorporated.
d. Or Approved Equal.
F. Non-metallic Conduit and Fittings:
1. PVC Plastic Conduit:
a. Material: Schedule 40 PVC plastic, 90°C rated, conforming to
NEMA TC-3 and UL No. 514 and 651.
b. Fittings: Form elbows, bodies, terminations, expansions and fasteners
of same material and manufacturer as base conduit. Provide cement
and primer by same manufacturer as base conduit.
c. Manufacturer: Provide conduit and fittings of one of the following:
1) Amoco Chemicals Corporation.
2) Carlon Electrical Products.
3) Or Approved Equal.
G. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) Conduit, Elbows, Fittings, and Couplings:
1. Material: Rigid-type mild steel, galvanized (zinc) exterior, organic lubricated
interior, threadless 3/4-inch NPS minimum size.
2. Couplings and connections: Compression or threaded type only. Set screw
type shall not be permitted.
3. Elbows: Factory formed of same material specified for EMT conduit.
4. Certifications: Material shall conform to UL-797, ANSI C80.3 Conduit
elbows, couplings etc. shall bear UL listing and manufacturer’s name.
5. Use of EMT type raceway systems shall only be permitted inside walls of
buildings.
6. Manufacturer: Provide EMT conuit, elbows, fittings and couplings of one of
the following:
a. Allied Tube and Conduit.
b. LTV Steel Tubular products Company
c. Weatland Tube company.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16131 – Page 5
d. Or Approved Equal.
H. Conduit Hubs:
1. Material: Threaded conduit hub, vibration proof, weather proof with captive
O-ring seal, zinc metal with insulated throat and bonding screw.
2. Use: Provide for all conduit terminations to boxes, cabinets and other
enclosures located in areas designated as wet locations.
3. Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a. Myers Electrical Products Company
b. Thomas and Betts.
c. Or Approved Equal.
I. PVC Coated Conduit Hubs:
1. Material: Threaded conduit hub, vibration proof, weatherproof with captive
O-ring seal, zinc metal with insulated throat and factory coating of 40-mil
thick polyvinyl chloride and smooth urethane interior coating.
2. Use: Provide for all PVC coated conduit terminations to boxes, cabinets and
other enclosures located in areas designated as corrosive location.
3. Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a. Robroy Industries.
b. Perma-Cote Industries.
c. OCAL Incorporated.
d. Or Approved Equal.
J. Conduit Bushings and Locknuts:
1. Insulated Bushings: Malleable iron body with plastic liner. Threaded type
with steel clamping screw. Provide with bronze grounding bushing, as
required.
2. Locknuts: Steel for sizes 3/4-inch thru 2-inch and malleable iron for sizes
2-1/2-inches through 4-inches.
3. Use: Provide for all conduit terminations to boxes, cabinets and other
enclosures, except threaded type located in areas designated as dusty
locations.
4. Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a. O-Z/Gedney.
b. Appleton Electric Company.
c. Or Approved Equal.
K. Conduit Tags:
1. Conduit tags shall be yellow, 1-1/2-inches round, aluminum tags. Print shall
be 1/4-inch Gothic. The conduit tags shall be manufactured by Brady, Catalog
No. 49900, Or Approved Equal.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16131 – Page 6
2. Each tag shall be attached with nylon-coated 48-mil stainless steel wire and
fasteners, as manufactured by Brady, Catalog No. 23310 Or Equal , and brass
wire clamps, double ferrule design, as manufactured by Brady Catalog No.
23312, Or Approved Equal.
L. Warning Ribbon:
1. Material: Three-inch wide, four-mil polyethylene or polyvinyl chloride tape,
permanently imprinted with "CAUTION BURIED ELECTRIC LINE
BELOW".
2. Use: Provide over buried conduits carrying cables of 120 volts and higher.
3. Manufacturers: Provide one of the following:
a. Seton.
b. Ideal Industries.
c. Or Approved Equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in conformance with National Electrical Code.
B. Supports:
1. Rigidly support conduits by clamps, hangers or Unistrut channels.
2. Support single conduits by means of one-hole pipe clamps in combination with
one-screw back plates, to raise conduits from the support surface. Support
multiple runs of conduits on trapeze type hangers with steel horizontal
members and threaded hanger rods, Kindorff or equal. Rods shall be not less
than 3/8-inch diameter, and shall be Type 316 stainless steel.
3. For PVC coated galvanized rigid steel conduit runs, supports and hardware
shall have a factory applied PVC coating or be stainless steel.
C. Fastenings: Fasten raceway systems rigidly and neatly to supporting structures by the
following methods:
1. To Wood: Wood screws.
2. To Hollow Masonry Units: Toggle bolts.
3. To Brick Masonry: Price expansion bolts, or equal.
4. To Concrete: Phillips; Hilti Corporation; or equal, anchors.
5. To Steel: Type 316 stainless steel welded threaded studs, beam clamps or
bolts with lock-washers or locknuts.
D. Exposed Conduit:
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16131 – Page 7
1. Install parallel or perpendicular to structural members or walls.
2. Wherever possible, run in groups. Provide conduit racks of suitable width,
length and height and arranged to suit field conditions. Provide support at
every ten feet minimum.
3. Install on structural members in protected locations.
4. Locate clear of interferences.
5. Maintain 6-inches from hot fluid lines and 1/4-inch from walls.
6. Install vertical runs plumb. Unsecured drop length not to exceed 12 feet.
7. Provide necessary reducers where equipment furnished cannot accept 3/4-inch
conduit.
E. Conduit Embedded in Structural Concrete:
1. Separation: Three times outer diameter of larger conduit center to center.
2. Minimum Slab Thickness: Confirm that concrete slab thickness is sufficient for
embedding conduits.
a. For embedding conduit sizes up to 1-1/2 inches, the minimum slab
thickness shall be 7-inches plus the outer diameter of the conduit or
conduits, where conduits cross.
b. For embedding conduits larger than 1-1/2 inches, the minimum slab
thickness shall be five times the outer diameter of the conduit where
conduits do not cross and six times the outer diameter of the larger
conduit where conduits do cross.
3. Run conduits in center of slab, where applicable.
4. Run conduits above waterstops.
5. Before concrete is placed, make the necessary location measurements of the
conduits to be embedded so that the information is available to prepare
Record Drawings.
6. All conduits entering or exiting concrete shall be PVC coated galvanized rigid
steel conduit, a minimum of 12-inches on each side of air/concrete interface.
F. Underground Conduits:
1. Use Schedule 40 PVC conduit for underground conduit runs.
2. Install individual underground conduits a minimum of 24-inches below grade,
unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or as required to avoid existing
obstructions.
3. Perform all excavation, bedding, backfilling and surface restoration including
pavement replacement, where required.
4. Install a warning ribbon 12-inches below finished grade over all conduits
carrying cables of 120 volts and higher.
5. Make conduit connections watertight.
6. Protect metallic conduits (where permitted for vertical risers in non-corrosive
areas) from damage by one of the following means:
a. Provide minimum 3-inches of red colored concrete all around
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16131 – Page 8
conduits.
b. Tape conduits with an all-weather polyvinyl chloride plastic tape with
a high tack adhesive formulated to resist corrosion, Scotchrap Brand
50, Or Equal.
c. Apply two coats of a bitumastic coating.
G. Empty Conduits:
1. Install nylon pull wire in each empty conduit and cap conduits not terminating
in boxes with permanent fittings designed for the purpose.
2. Identify each empty conduit with a conduit tag conforming to the
requirements of Paragraph 2.01.K, above, showing the conduit number shown
on the Drawings.
H. Field Bends: No indentations. Diameter of conduit shall not vary more than 15
percent at any bend. Maximum total amount of bends shall not exceed 270 .
I. Joints:
1. Apply conductive compound to all joints before assembly.
2. Make up joints tight and ground thoroughly.
3. Use standard tapered pipe threads for conduit and fittings.
4. Cut conduit ends square and ream to prevent damage to wire and cable.
5. Use full threaded couplings. Split couplings not permitted.
6. Use strap wrenches and vises to install conduit. Replace conduit with wrench
marks.
7. Apply zinc-rich paint to exposed threads and other areas of galvanized rigid
steel conduit system where the base metal is exposed.
J. Terminations:
1. Install insulated bushings on conduits entering boxes or cabinets, except when
threaded hubs are used.
2. Provide locknuts and grounding bushings on both inside and outside of
enclosure, except when threaded hubs are used.
3. Do not use bushings in lieu of locknuts.
4. Install conduit hubs on conduits entering boxes, enclosures or cabinets in wet
and corrosive areas.
K. Moisture Protection:
1. Plug or cap conduit ends at time of installation to prevent entrance of
moisture or foreign materials.
2. Make underground and embedded conduit connections water-tight.
3. Through Wall Seals and Conduit Sealing Bushings: Install for all conduits
passing through concrete slabs, floors, walls or concrete block walls.
a. For conduits and cables in new construction and passing through
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16131 – Page 9
exterior subsurface walls and exterior concrete walls, use Type WSK
and WSCS through wall seals as manufactured by O-Z/Gedney, Or
Approved Equal.
b. For conduits and cables in new construction and passing through
concrete floors and floor slabs, use Type FSK and FSCS floor seals,
as manufactured by O-Z/Gedney, Or Approved Equal.
c. For conduits passing through new exterior block walls or through
core-drilled holes in existing exterior subsurface walls, exterior
concrete walls, floor slabs and roof slabs, use Type CSMI sealing
bushing at the inside of the structure and Type CSMC sealing bushing
at the outside of the structure. Sealing bushings shall be as
manufactured by O-Z/Gedney, Or Approved Equal.
d. For conduits passing through existing interior concrete walls or floors
and interior block walls, provide CSMC or CSMI type sealing
bushings as manufactured by O-Z/Gedney, Or Approved Equal.
Drainage: Pay particular attention to drainage for conduit runs.
Wherever possible, install conduit runs so as to drain to one end and
away from buildings. Avoid pockets or depressions in conduit runs.
Where conduits enter buildings below grade, seal inside of conduit to
form a watertight seal around cables to prevent the entry of water into
building. Sealant shall be Silicone and shall form an elastomeric
compression seal. Sealant shall be Fire Barrier 2001 Silicone RTV
Foam, Or Approved Equal.
4. Seal all conduit openings within control and instrumentation panels and
distribution equipment with Type DUX - Duct Sealing Compound, as
manufactured by O-Z/Gedney, Or Approved Equal, to provide a
water/bug-tight seal.
L. Corrosion Protection:
1. Conduit Curb:
a. For conduits routed in concrete slabs or floors and stub-ups through
the floor, provide a 2-inch high concrete curb, extending 2-inches
from the outer surface of the conduit penetrating the floor, to prevent
corrosion. For floor-mounted equipment, the concrete equipment base
shall be in lieu of the concrete curb.
b. Conduit stub-ups shall be a 90 degree PVC coated galvanized rigid
steel conduit elbow. PVC coated elbow shall extend slightly above
the top of the concrete curb or equipment base. Should the elbow not
reach this height, provide PVC coated conduit extension to
accommodate requirements. Provide coupling/fitting for transition
from galvanized rigid steel conduit or PVC coated galvanized rigid
steel conduit in slab to PVC coated elbow.
c. For conduits stubbing up and terminating at equipment enclosure
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16131 – Page 10
mounted on a concrete equipment base, provide insulated grounding
bushing on the PVC coated elbow.
d. For conduits stubbing up and extending to boxes, cabinets and other
enclosures above the concrete curb in wet and dusty areas, provide
conduit coupling/fittings between the PVC coated elbow and
galvanized rigid steel conduit for transition between the two conduit
types.
e. For conduits stubbing up and extending to boxes, cabinets and other
enclosures above the concrete curb or equipment base in corrosive
areas, continue the conduit system with PVC coated galvanized rigid
steel conduit.
2. Dissimilar Metals:
a. Take every action to prevent the occurrence of electrolytic action
between dissimilar metals.
b. Do not use copper products in connection with aluminum work, and
do not use aluminum in locations subject to drainage of copper
compounds on the bare aluminum.
c. Back paint aluminum in contact with masonry or concrete with two
coats of aluminum-pigmented bituminous paint.
3. PVC Coating: Supports and fasteners for PVC coated galvanized rigid steel
conduit runs shall have factory applied 40-mil thick polyvinyl chloride coating.
M. Reused Existing Conduits:
1. Pull rag swab through conduits to remove water and to clean conduit prior to
installing new cable.
2. Repeat swabbing until all foreign material is removed.
3. Pull mandrel through conduit, if necessary, to remove obstructions.
N. Core drill for individual conduits passing through existing concrete slabs and walls.
Obtain authorization from OWNER prior to core drilling. Prior to core drilling, drill
sufficient number of small exploratory holes to establish that the area to be core
drilled is free of existing embedded conduits.
O. Non-metallic Conduit:
1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Join sections in accordance with manufacturer's installation procedures for
push fit, bell and spigot type joints, if applicable, or with manufacturer’s
recommended cement and primer.
3. During installation provide expansion fittings for expansion and contraction to
compensate for temperature variations. Expansion fittings shall be watertight
and of the type suitable for direct burial.
4. Make transition to PVC coated galvanized rigid steel conduit before making
turn up to enclosures.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16131 – Page 11
5. Provide watertight expansion/deflection fittings at all wall and floor
penetrations of all buildings and equipment concrete pads.
P. PVC Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit:
1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
2. During installation install with manufacturers’ installation tools so as not to
damage PVC coating.
3. Repair damaged PVC coating with manufacturers recommended touch-up
compound.
3.02 TESTING
A. Test conduits by pulling through each conduit a cylindrical mandrel not less than two
pipe inside diameters long, having an outside diameter equal to 90 percent of the
inside diameter of the conduit.
B. Maintain a record, by number, of all conduits testing clear.
3.03 IDENTIFICATION
A. Tag conduits in accordance with Paragraph 2.01.K, above. Tag all conduits at the
ends and in all intermediate boxes, chambers, handholes and other enclosures. Fasten
tags to conduits with nylon-coated 48-mil stainless steel wire. Where this method is
not practical, fasten to the adjacent masonry by means of expansion bolts.
B. Use numbers on all conduits and record the conduit numbers and the cable content by
cable designation, size, quantity, origin and termination of conductors, and name of
equipment served. Assign numbers to unidentified conduits such as home runs to
panelboards. This information shall be included with the Record Drawings described
in Section 01072, Record Documents.
3.04 RACEWAYS ALLOWANCES
A. CONTRACTOR shall include allowance of necessary raceways and supports to
provide any and all motorized equipment, electrical outlets, fixtures, communication
outlets, instruments, and devices within 10 linear feet of location shown on the
Drawings.
B. CONTRACTOR shall include allowance of necessary raceways, trench, excavation,
backfill, and related materials to provide any and all pull boxes, manholes, and
ductbanks within 30 linear feet of location shown on the Drawings.
C. Prior to installation of any raceway or related items identified in paragraphs A and B
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16131 – Page 12
above, the OWNER shall have the right to make changes related to preferred location,
at no additional cost.
D. CONTRACTOR shall include all necessary raceways for all equipment specified,
identified in wiring schedules, equipment schedules, panel boards schedules, electrical
single line diagrams, block diagrams, fixtures schedules, and devices. Said necessary
conduits may not be shown on the Drawings, but they shall be sized by
CONTRACTOR in accordance with requirements specified and the National
Electrical Code, and include in this allowance, the raceways necessary for the
installation of the conductors and for the complete operation of the included device or
equipment.
END OF SECTION
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16132– Page 1
SECTION 16132
FLEXIBLE CONDUITS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope:
1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals
as shown on the Drawings, specified and required to furnish and install flexible
metallic conduit and fittings.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the
following, except where otherwise shown or specified.
1. NEC Article 350, Liquid Tight Flexible Metal Conduit.
2. UL Standard No. 360, Liquid Tight Flexible Steel Conduit.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following:
1. Manufacturer's catalog cuts and technical information for flexible conduit and
fittings proposed for use.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Flexible Conduit (Non hazardous Areas):
1. Material: Flexible galvanized steel core with smooth, abrasion resistant, liquid
tight, polyvinyl chloride cover. Continuous copper ground built in for sizes
3/4 inch through 1 1/4-inch. Material shall be UL listed.
2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a. Sealtite UA by Anaconda Metal Hose Division, Anaconda American
Brass Company.
b. Liquatite Type L.A. by Electric Flex Company.
c. Or Approved Equal.
B. Flexible Conduit (Class 1, Group D, Division 1, Hazardous Areas):
1. Material: Flexible brass inner core with bronze outer braid. Steel, brass or
bronze end fittings. Minimum of 12-inches in length.
2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16132– Page 2
a. Type ECGJH or ECLK by Crouse Hinds Company.
b. Type EXGJH or EXLK by Appleton Electric Company.
c. Or Approved Equal.
C. Flexible Conduit Fittings:
1. Material and Construction: Malleable iron with cadmium finish. Fitting shall
adapt the conduit to standard threaded connections, shall have an inside
diameter not less than that of the corresponding standard conduit size and
shall be UL listed.
2. Use: Provide on flexible conduit in non-hazardous and Class 1, Division 2
hazardous areas.
3. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a. Crouse Hinds Company.
b. Appleton Electric Company.
c. Or Approved Equal.
D. PVC Coated Conduit Fittings:
1. Material and Construction: Malleable iron with standard finish and 40-mil
PVC exterior coating. Fittings shall adapt the conduit to standard threaded
connections, shall have an inside diameter not less than that of the
corresponding standard conduit size.
2. Use: Provide on flexible conduit in areas designated as corrosive locations.
3. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
a. Robroy Industries.
b. Permacote Industries.
c. OCAL Incorporated.
d. Or Approved Equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install at motors, transformers and equipment which are subject to vibration or require
movement for maintenance purposes. Provide necessary reducer where equipment
furnished cannot accept 3/4 inch size flexible conduit. Limit flexible conduit length to
three feet maximum.
B. Install in conformance with National Electrical Code.
END OF SECTION
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16135 – Page 1
SECTION 16135
PULL BOXES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope:
1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals
as shown on the Drawings, specified and required to furnish and install pull
boxes.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the
following, except where otherwise shown or specified:
1. NEC Article 370, Outlet, Switch and Junction Boxes, and Fittings.
2. UL Standard No. 50, Electrical Cabinets and Boxes.
3. UL Standard No. 886, Electrical Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in
Hazardous Locations.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following:
1. Manufacturer's technical information for pull boxes proposed for use.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Pull Boxes: Provide boxes based upon location in accordance with NEMA
requirements and as required for the area classification specified in Section 16050,
General Provisions.
1. Material and Construction:
a. Cast gray iron alloy with hot-dip galvanized finish or cast malleable
iron bodies and covers.
b. Neoprene gaskets. Gaskets shall be of an approved type designed for
the purpose. Improvised gaskets are not acceptable.
c. Stainless steel cover bolts.
d. External mounting lugs.
e. Drilled and tapped conduit holes.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16135 – Page 2
f. Boxes where conduits enter a building below grade shall have 1/4 inch
drain hole.
2. Product and Manufacturer: Provide pull boxes of one of the following:
a. Appleton Electric Company.
b. O-Z/Gedney Company.
c. Hoffman Engineering Company.
d. Or Approved Equal.
3. Large boxes not generally available in cast construction may be fabricated of
copper free aluminum alloy or Type 316 stainless steel as required by location.
4. Boxes for installation in areas classified as hazardous locations shall be
explosion-proof and shall comply with the requirements of UL Standard No.
886.
5. For flush-mounted pullboxes in slabs or pavement, provide vehicular
traffic-bearing covers, where shown on the Drawings.
6. Pull boxes embedded in concrete slabs shall be cast iron. Pull boxes located in
wet, corrosive or outdoor areas shall be NEMA 4X, Type 316 stainless steel.
All other areas shall be NEMA 12.
7. All boxes shall be identified in accordance with Section 16050, General
Provisions.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Mount boxes so that sufficient access and working space is provided and maintain a
minimum of 1/4-inch from walls.
B. Securely fasten boxes to walls or other structural surfaces on which they are mounted.
Provide independent stainless steel or FRP supports where no walls or other
structural surface exists.
C. Install pull boxes where shown on the Drawings. In addition, install pull boxes in
conduit runs containing more than three 90 degree bends and in runs exceeding 200
feet.
D. Provide removable, flame-retardant, insulating cable supports in all boxes with any
dimension exceeding three feet.
E. Field apply PVC touch up to scratched PVC boxes damaged as a result of installation.
All touch up work shall be in strict conformance with manufacturer's
recommendations and instructions.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16135 – Page 3
F. Size pull boxes in accordance with the National Electrical Code.
END OF SECTION
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16137 – Page 1
SECTION 16137
UNDERGROUND DUCT BANKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope:
1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as
shown on the Drawings, specified and required to furnish and install underground
duct banks.
B. Coordination: Duct bank routing on the Drawings is diagrammatic. Coordinate
installation with piping and other underground systems and structures and locate clear of
interferences.
C. Related Sections: CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the requirements of the Work in this
Section along with the requirements of the Sections listed below which includes, but is
not necessarily limited to, Work that is directly related to this Section.
1. Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete.
2. Section 16131, Rigid Conduit.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the
National Electrical Code and National Electrical Safety Code.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following:
1. Layouts showing the proposed routing of duct banks and the locations of manholes,
handholes and areas of reinforcement.
2. Profiles of duct banks showing crossings with piping and other underground
systems.
3. Typical cross sections.
4. Installation procedures.
B. Record Drawings: Include the actual routing of underground duct runs on Record
Drawings in accordance with Section 01072, Record Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16137 – Page 2
A. Duct: Schedule 40 PVC conduit and fittings in accordance with Section 16131, Rigid
Conduit.
B. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit: Galvanized rigid steel conduit and fittings in accordance
with Section 16131, Rigid Conduit, if required.
C. Concrete and Reinforcement: In accordance with Division 3, Section specifying Cast-In-
Place Concrete.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Provide excavation and backfilling required for duct bank installation.
B. Make duct bank installations and penetrations through foundation walls watertight.
C. Top of duct banks shall be a minimum of 24-inches below grade, unless otherwise
approved by the ENGINEER.
D. Firmly fix ducts in place during placing of concrete. Carefully place and vibrate the
concrete to ensure filling of all spaces between ducts.
E. Make bends with sweeps of not less than 48-inch radius or five degree angle couplings.
F. Make a transition from non-metallic to galvanized rigid steel conduit where duct banks
enter buildings, manholes, handholes and outdoor pads. Provide expansion/ deflection
fittings, coordinate with ENGINEER. Terminate ducts in insulated grounding bushings.
Continue ducts inside buildings with rigid steel conduit, use PVC coated RSC where
installed in corrosive envelopes.
G. Where ducts enter structures such as pullboxes, transformer and switchgear
compartments, or buildings, terminate the ducts in suitable end bells, insulated bushings
or couplings on steel conduits.
H. Do not backfill with material containing large rock, paving materials, cinders, large or
sharply angular substances, corrosive material or other materials which can damage or
contribute to corrosion of ducts or cables or prevent adequate compaction of fill.
I. Slope duct runs for drainage toward manholes and away from buildings with a slope of
approximately 3-inches per 100 feet.
J. Install a bare stranded copper duct bank ground cable in each duct bank envelope. Make
ground electrically continuous throughout the entire duct bank system. Connect ground
cable to building and station ground grid or to equipment ground buses. In addition,
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16137 – Page 3
connect ground cable to steel conduit extensions of the underground duct system.
Provide ground clamp and bonding of each steel conduit extension, where necessary to
maintain continuity of the ground system. Terminate ground cable at last manhole or
handhole for outlying structures.
K. After completion of the duct bank and prior to pulling cable, pull a mandrel, not less than
12-inches long and with a cross section approximately 1/4-inch less than the inside cross
section of the duct, through each duct. Then pull a rag swab or sponge through to make
certain that no particles of earth, sand or gravel have been left in the duct.
L. Install a warning ribbon approximately 12-inches below finished grade over all
underground duct banks carrying cables of 120 volts and higher. The identifying ribbon
shall be a PVC tape, 3-inches wide, yellow color, permanently imprinted with
"CAUTION BURIED ELECTRIC LINE BELOW" in black letters.
M. Plug and seal empty spare ducts entering buildings and structures. Seal watertight all
ducts in use entering buildings and structures with 0-Z/Gedney Type DUX duct sealing
compound Or Approved Equal.
N. Reused Existing Ducts:
1. Pull rag swab through duct to remove water and to clean duct prior to installing new
cable.
2. Repeat swabbing until all foreign material is removed.
3. Pull mandrel through duct to remove obstructions.
O. Install duct banks in conformance with National Electrical Code.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16143 – Page 1
SECTION 16143
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope:
1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals
as shown on the Drawings, specified and required to furnish and install
disconnect switches.
2. Disconnect Switches shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer as the
Switchboard and over current protective devices.
B. Related Sections: CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the requirements of the Work in
this Section along with the requirements of the Sections listed below which includes,
but is not necessarily limited to, Work that is directly related to this Section.
1. Section 16050, General Provisions.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the
following, except where otherwise shown or specified:
1. National Electrical Code.
2. UL Standard No. 98, Enclosed Switches.
3. NEMA KS 1, Enclosed Switches.
4. NEMA 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following:
1. Manufacturer's technical information for disconnect switches proposed for
use.
2. Listing of the switches to be furnished with an identification of their location,
rating and NEMA enclosure type.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Single Throw, Circuit Disconnect Switches:
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16143 – Page 2
1. Disconnect Switches shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer as the
Switchboard and over current protective devices.
2. Type: Fused or unfused, horsepower rated, heavy duty, single throw, quick
make, quick break mechanism, visible blades in the OFF position and safety
handle.
3. Rating: Voltage and current ratings and number of poles as required for
motor or equipment circuits being disconnected. Switches shall bear a UL
label.
B. Enclosures:
1. NEMA 12 for dry, indoor non corrosive areas.
2. NEMA 4X stainless steel for wet or corrosive locations and all outdoor
locations.
3. NEMA 7 for explosion proof areas.
C. Identification:
1. Identify all enclosures in accordance with Section 16050, General Provisions.
2. Nameplate identifying equipment, include identification of the equipment
served and source of power, for which switches serve as the disconnecting
means.
D. Product and Manufacturer: Disconnect switches shall be manufactured by the same
manufacturer as the power distribution equipment and overcurrent protection devices
(breakers). The intent is that the Disconnect Switches shall be manufactured by the
same manufacturer as the Switchboard and over current protective devices. Provide
one of the following:
1. Square D Company.
2. General Electric Company.
3. Cutler-Hammer.
4. Or Approved Equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Mount equipment so that sufficient access and working space is provided for ready
and safe operation and maintenance.
B. Securely fasten equipment to walls or other structural supports on which they are
mounted. Provide independent stainless steel supports where no wall or other
structural surface exists.
C. Furnish one set of spare fuses for each fused disconnect switch to be installed.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16143 – Page 3
END OF SECTION
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16231– Page 1
SECTION 16231
PERMANENT
DIESEL ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Convert the existing portable generator to a permanent standby generator. The
existing generator shall be removed from its existing trailer and mounted on concrete
foundation. Perform all structural required work in order to provide a self-
supporting generator structure and enclosure. Work shall be performed by an
Authorized Kohler vendor.
B. Section Includes: Packaged permanent diesel engine generator system to include the
following components:
1. Diesel engine.
2. Generator, with batteries and battery charger.
3. Liquid coolant system.
4. Fuel system and fuel storage tank.
5. Exhaust system.
6. Control system.
7. Skid system.
8. Accessories as specified.
9. Fuel tank.
10. All other equipment as required to provide a complete and operable power
generation system.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. La Paz County Building Safety
B. Buckskin Sanitary District Rules and Regulations.
C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. A 53 - Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated
Welded and Seamless.
2. A 106 - Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature
Service.
3. A 181 - Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for General Purpose Piping.
4. A 240 - Specification for Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel
Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip for Pressure Vessels.
5. A 536 - Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16231– Page 2
6. D 2310 - Standard Classification for Machine-Made Fiberglass (Glass-Fiber-
Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe.
D. International Building Code (IBC):
1. International Building Code.
E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum).
2. NEMA MG-1 - Motor and Generators.
F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. NFPA 30 - Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code.
2. NFPA 37 - Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas
Turbines.
3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
4. NFPA 110 - Emergency and Standby Power Systems.
G. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):
1. 142 - Steel Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Liquids.
2. 2200 - Stationary Engine Generator Assemblies
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Requirements: Provide packaged diesel generator system capable of
supplying power to the plant when the utility system is interrupted for short or
extended durations. Coordinate the generator control design with the switchgear or
transfer switches specified in DIVISION 16 and as indicated on the Drawings.
B. Electrical Equipment Requirements: As indicated on the Drawings and specified in
DIVISION 16 and the requirements specified in this Section.
C. Seismic and Wind Design: Perform all structural required work in order to provide a
self-supporting generator structure and enclosure to meet the seismic and wind
design criteria as required for Buckskin, Arizona.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit complete shop drawings of each component being added or modified at
the existing generator system package.
B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit a detailed recommended installation
procedure for the following:
1. Other system components.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Instruction manuals containing operation and
maintenance procedures.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16231– Page 3
D. Quality Control Submittals:
1. Field test report and certification.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications:
1. The major items of auxiliary equipment shall be manufactured by
manufacturers currently engaged in the production of such equipment.
2. Factory authorized parts and service facility located within 200 miles of the
Project site.
B. Supplier Qualifications:
1. Auxiliary equipment to be furnished by a factory authorized Kohler vender
who shall be responsible for furnishing, testing, installation supervising, and
guaranteeing the system.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following:
1. Regulations of the Fire Department having jurisdiction.
2. International Building Code (Latest Edition)
3. Uniform Fire Code - 2003 NFPA1.
4. Other applicable state and local codes.
5. CONTRACTOR shall not be relieved from complying with the Specifications
that may be in excess of, and not contrary to, the regulations.
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Elevation and ambient conditions as specified herein:
1. Minimum Ambient Temperature: 25°F.
2. Maximum Ambient Temperature: 122°F.
3. Altitude: 420 feet above sea level.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Generator Package: Covered by a manufacturer's standard warranty for a minimum
of 6 months from date of final acceptance or first beneficial use of the package.
B. Warrant, that when fuel tanks are specified, the fuel tanks will not fail or leak for a
period of 5 years from original purchase from either external corrosion, internal
corrosion, or structural failure.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 DIESEL ENGINE
A. Manufacturers:
1. Engine:
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16231– Page 4
a. Kohler (Existing generator), model 80REOZJ, Serial 0667375, Spec PA-
189543
2.02 GENERATOR
A. Modifications:
1. The existing Generator is equipped with two breakers. Replace the two
breakers with one breaker sized as indicated on single line diagram Drawing.
2. A separate 120V, 20A single-phase power feed shall be provided for the battery
charger.
3. A separate 120V, 20A single-phase power feed shall be provided for the block
heater.
4. A sub-base fuel storage system (see requirements below).
2.03 FUEL SYSTEM
A. General: Provide fuel system, accessories and fuel tank meeting the following
requirements.
B. Subbase Fuel Tank: Provide a subbase fuel tank meeting the following:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Pryco.
b. Tramont.
2. Operate generator’s full load capacity for 24 hours.
3. Provide UL listed tank with secondary containment rupture basin.
4. Construction: Reinforced steel channel system with minimum thickness of
7 gauge for channels and 12 gauge for tank construction.
5. Provide tank baffle to separate hot fuel return from cooler supply fuel.
6. Provide the following connections:
a. 1.25 inch minimum vent; CONTRACTOR to pipe vent to outside any
room or enclosure containing the generator set; use Schedule 40 black
steel pipe for vent.
b. 2 inch minimum fill connection.
c. 2 inch minimum main fuel storage level gauge.
d. 1.25 inch minimum low fuel level alarm; provide level switch and connect
to control panel.
e. 0.5 inch minimum fuel supply with dip tube.
f. 0.5 inch minimum fuel return with dip tube.
7. Provide rupture basin level switch and alarm.
8. Provide interior epoxy coating system.
9. Provide exterior epoxy coating with urethane top coat.
C. Above Ground Fuel Piping:
1. Supply and Return Piping: Provide Schedule 40 black steel supply and return
piping from storage tank to generator as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Flexible Connections: Provide 18-inch long flexible connections where off-skid
connects to the engine skid.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16231– Page 5
3. Provide a check valve located on the tank side of the flexible connection in the
return fuel line.
4. Provide a 24 volt direct current solenoid shutoff valve, wire, conduit, and
control interlock to close on engine shutdown; locate on the tank side of the
flexible connection in the fuel supply line.
D. Fuel Filters: Size filters for 10 percent above the engine fuel pump capacity.
1. Provide water/fuel separator.
2. Provide primary fuel filter.
3. Provide secondary fuel filter.
E. Engine Fuel Pump: Provide engine-driven fuel pump which transfers fuel from the
fuel tank; provide fuel pressure gauges on the pump suction and discharge.
2.04 ENGINE - GENERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Panel Type: Provide an engine skid mounted NEMA 12, vibration-isolated 14 gauge
steel control panel.
B. Switches, Alarms, and Monitors:
1. Type: Environmentally sealed, solid-state, microprocessor-based modules for
engine control and alternating current metering.
2. Provide for Automatic/Manual Start/Stop engine control and programmable
alarms with separate safety shutdowns and associated flashing LED indicators
for specified alarms and shutdowns in an alarm module meeting NFPA 110.
3. Alarms and Shutdowns: Provide alarms and shutdowns for:
a. Low Oil Pressure: Alarm and separate shutdown.
b. High Coolant Temperature: Alarm and separate shutdown.
c. Low Coolant Level: Alarm and separate shutdown.
d. Engine Overspeed: Alarm and separate shutdown.
e. Overcrank: Alarm and separate shutdown.
f. Low Main Fuel Tank Level: When belly tank specified, alarm and separate
shutdown.
g. Fuel Tank Secondary Containment Level: When secondary containment is
specified, provide each fuel tank with a secondary containment alarm
which on detection of fuel in the interstitial space between the secondary
containment of day tank, and main tank, annunciates an alarm.
h. Battery charger failure; alarm.
i. Generator on load; indicator.
j. Control switch not in AUTO; alarm.
4. Emergency Stop: Provide emergency stop pushbutton.
5. Start Cycle: Provide adjustable start cycle cranking times, 1-60 second
crank/reset periods; provide controls for a 30 second cranking cycle limit with
lockout; provide three 10 second cranks or a single 30 second crank.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16231– Page 6
6. Cooldown Timer: Adjustable to 0-30 minutes engine run time after load
disconnected for normal shutdowns.
7. Fuel Control: Provide an energized to run fuel control system operate the fuel
solenoid valve.
8. System Variable Indicator: Provide liquid crystal display digital readout for:
a. Engine oil pressure.
b. Engine coolant temperature.
c. Engine rpm.
d. System direct current volts.
e. Engine running hours.
f. Generator alternating current volts for each phase.
g. Generator alternating current amperes for each phase.
h. Generator frequency.
9. Control System Diagnostics: Provide liquid crystal display digital readout for
system diagnostic codes that include:
a. Loss of engine speed signal.
b. Invalid engine control switch signal.
c. Internal circuit fault.
d. Loss of coolant temperature signal.
e. Loss of data sending unit signal.
f. Unrequested engine shutdown.
g. Invalid programming switch position.
h. Loss of or failure to program settings.
10. Other Devices:
a. Display switch and hold button.
b. Engine control switch marked AUTO, MANUAL, OFF/RESET.
c. Indicator/display test switch.
d. Generator output voltage adjustment potentiometer.
e. Governor raise/lower speed adjust switch.
f. Panel illumination lights and switch.
g. Fault reset switch.
h. Audible alarm for alarms and shutdowns; provide audible alarm bypass
switch and alarm silence switch.
i. Battery charge rate ammeter if not furnished on separate charger.
j. Exciter cutout breaker, manual reset or exciter fuse; if fused, provide spare
fuse.
k. Dry contacts wired to terminal strips for connection to the plant control
system. Signals shall be:
1) Fuel Tank Leak.
2) Low Fuel Level.
3) High Temperature.
4) Low Battery.
l. Two dry single pole double throw contacts that switch when generator is
on for "Generator Running" indication and two dry alarm contacts that
open on "Generator Failure." Prewire the contacts to external terminal
strips at the panel for the purpose of remote alarm and status indication.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16231– Page 7
m. Provide for input signal for fully automatic operation of the engine-
generator set from the automatic transfer switch.
n. Provide panel mounted temperature scanner/indicator for generator
bearing and winding temperatures.
C. Generator Control Performance Requirements:
1. Maintain control and monitoring accuracy over the entire operating temperature
range.
2. Alternating current metering accuracy of 0.5 percent current volts and amperes.
3. Alternating current frequency metering accuracy of 0.3 hertz.
4. Other Accuracies:
a. Plus or minus 0.5 volt for direct current volts.
b. Plus or minus 1.0 revolutions per minute for engine speed.
c. Plus or minus 0.1 hour for hour meter.
D. Breakers: Install a generator main line fully rated molded case circuit breaker with
65 kiloamps interrupting capability as a load circuit interrupting and protection
device, as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.
1. Breaker to operate both manually for normal switching function and
automatically during overload and short circuit conditions and as specified for
generator breaker controls.
2. Generator exciter field circuit breakers do not meet the above electrical
standards and are unacceptable for line protection.
2.05 GENERATOR SYSTEM OPERATION
A. Provide control devices and logic to sequentially start, operate, control, test, and stop
the generator system as described. Coordinate control system design so that on loss
of utility power, power is automatically supplied by the generator and on return of
stable utility power, power is automatically switched back to utility power and the
engine shuts down.
B. Engine Start Sequence:
1. Engine shall not start if any of the safety shutdown circuits have been tripped
and not cleared and reset.
2. Automatic Engine Start Sequence:
a. Initiated by a signal from the switchgear control system.
b. Starter Motor: Automatically crank the engine for adjustable times.
C. Emergency Shutdown Sequence: Engine shall shutdown immediately if the
emergency stop button is activated, or any of the specified shutdowns activate.
D. Normal Shutdown Sequence: Local or remote Stop signal shall cause the engine to
run unloaded for an adjustable cool-down period and then stop.
1. Remote stop signal shall be based on sensing the return of utility power for an
adjustable 0 to 15 minute time period before the engine is stopped and return to
utility power is limited. If utility power is lost during the time delay period the
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16231– Page 8
timer shall be reset to zero and the engine shutdown not initiated until the set
delay time expires without an interruption of utility power.
2.06 SKID
A. Skid Requirements: Mount the engine, generator, radiator, fuel tank, and specified
accessories on a common heavy-duty fabricated steel skid.
B. Skid Construction: Fabricated steel skid to consist of a rigid welded frame of wide
flange members or rails on each side.
C. Vibration Isolators: Mount skid on spring isolators having telescopic top and bottom
housing with vertical stabilizers to resist lateral and vertical forces.
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. California Dynamics Corporation, Type RJSD.
b. Mason Industries, equivalent product.
2. Isolator Construction: Shatterproof ductile iron in accordance with
ASTM A 536, Grade CS-45-12.
3. Calculations: Submit to demonstrate proper isolator capacity, operation, and
vibration protection coupled with specified seismic design loading (Seismic
Category D) or International Building Code (IBC) classification; whichever is
more stringent.
D. Additional Requirements:
1. Provide for bolting skid to the concrete slab according to manufacturer's anchor
bolt layout.
2. Installation shall have a crankcase drain pipe at least 8 inches from the floor,
equipped with a readily accessible shutoff valve.
3. Provide front and rear engine mounts from the skid in addition to a generator
support mount.
4. Provide bracing from the engine skid diagonally to the top of the radiator
housing in addition to lower radiator supports on the skid.
5. Design skid components to limit deflection in any element to be low L/240 and
metal stresses to below one-half the allowable metal stress.
6. Submit calculations on skid elements.
7. All above work shall be sealed by an Arizona Licensed Structural Engineer.
2.07 ACCESSORIES
A. Starting System: Provide 24 volt direct current electric starting system with positive
engagement drive.
1. Batteries: Provide a 24 volt lead-acid storage battery set of the heavy-duty
diesel starting type; sufficient capacity for a minimum of 120 seconds total
cranking time without recharging.
2. Battery Rack: Provide a battery rack with necessary cables and clamps; provide
a cover constructed of aluminum angles and mesh to prevent dropped items
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16231– Page 9
from touching the battery poles; provide latches to allow quick removal of the
cover from the rack.
3. Battery Charger: Provide UL approved current limiting battery charger to
automatically recharge the batteries:
a. Charger to float at 2.17 volts per cell and equalize at 2.33 volts per cell.
b. Provide charger overload protection.
c. Charger to have silicon diode full wave rectifier, voltage surge
suppressors, direct current ammeter, direct current voltmeter, and fused
alternating current input.
d. Amperage Output: Not less than 10 amperes.
B. Guards: Provide equipment guard posts.
C. Steps: Provide steps at all generator enclosure doors.
D. Crankcase Breather Filter:
1. Provide crankcase ventilation system with coalescing filter/trap for blowby;
coalescing filter to be replaceable.
2. When engine manufacturer recommends an open crankcase breather system
route outlet of breather filter to outside at 3 inches above grade and away from
engine components; provide on breather outlet Nelson "EcoVent" or equal,
sized to match engine breather flow.
3. When engine manufacturer recommends a closed crankcase breather system
provide integral crankcase pressure regulator with an automatic internal filter
bypass and bypass indicator; unit to be Racor Model CCV 4500 or equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation of products as specified in
Division 1.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be by competent personnel experienced and regularly engaged in
field installation of power generation systems.
B. Mount fuel tank at the elevation relative to the engine as recommended by the engine
manufacturer to achieve proper engine fuel pump suction conditions while avoiding
fuel flooding in the engine return system.
C. In accordance with NFPA 110.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16231– Page 10
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Generating System:
1. Full-load test the generating system at the site in the presence of the
ENGINEER for a period of 8 hours, with the primary supplier providing
necessary resistive and reactive load banks to test at 0.8 power factor..
2. Prior to acceptance of the installation, subject equipment to process system
load tests, with available motor load, but not to exceed the generator's
nameplate rating, for a period of 4 hours.
3. Correct defects which become evident during testing.
4. Perform operational testing as specified in Section 16950.
5. Measure flows, pressures and temperatures of fuel, coolant, exhaust gas, and
radiator air at inlets and outlets to system components.
6. Provide test report as specified in Section 16950.
7. Measure radiator performance at full load including air flow, air inlet
temperature, and air outlet temperature.
B. Consumables: Primary supplier to provide lubricating oil, grease, ethylene glycol,
chemical water conditioner. CONTRACTOR to provide sufficient fuel for testing.
1. After testing, fuel tanks shall be filled by CONTRACTOR with Number 2
domestic burner fuel.
C. Manufacturer's Field Service:
1. Provide services of a factory-trained representative to inspect installation of the
equipment, make necessary adjustments, place it in initial trouble-free
operation, and instruct OWNER personnel on its operation and maintenance.
2. Upon completion of the installation, start-up to be performed by a factory-
trained dealer service representative.
3.04 TRAINING
A. Provide one organized training session totaling not less than 4 hours. Training is
required during evening or night shift times at the OWNER option.
B. Provide the OWNER with 2 weeks written notice regarding the date of the scheduled
training session.
C. Provide the training session after all required start-up and testing procedures have
been acceptably performed.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect products until acceptance by OWNER.
END OF SECTION
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16232 – Page 1
SECTION 16232
PORTABLE
DIESEL ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Packaged portable diesel engine generator system to include the
following components:
1. Diesel engine.
2. Generator, with batteries and battery charger.
3. Liquid coolant system.
4. Fuel system and fuel storage tank.
5. Exhaust system.
6. Control system.
7. Skid system.
8. Accessories as specified.
9. Fuel tank.
10. Trailer
11. All other equipment as required to provide a complete and operable power
generation system.
B. The KW size is after the derating for the elevation and temperature, and fan. The
actual required generator size may be larger than the size indicated herein.
C. Power to the Generator System: A single 120/240V, single-phase power source shall
be provided for the generator. The generator system supplier shall furnish and install
all panelboards, transformers, distribution equipment, and circuitry as required to
energize all devices. Furnish and install all inter- and intra-circuitries as required for
a complete functioning system.
1.02 REFERENCES
A. La Paz County Building Safety
B. Buckskin Sanitary District Rules and Regulations.
C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. A 53 - Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated
Welded and Seamless.
2. A 106 - Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature
Service.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16232 – Page 2
3. A 181 - Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for General Purpose Piping.
4. A 240 - Specification for Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel
Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip for Pressure Vessels.
5. A 536 - Specification for Ductile Iron Castings.
6. D 2310 - Standard Classification for Machine-Made Fiberglass (Glass-Fiber-
Reinforced Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe.
D. International Building Code (IBC):
1. International Building Code.
E. International Fire Code Institute (IFCI):
1. Uniform Fire Code (UFC).
F. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
1. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum).
2. NEMA MG-1 - Motor and Generators.
G. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. NFPA 30 - Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code.
2. NFPA 37 - Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas
Turbines.
3. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
4. NFPA 110 - Emergency and Standby Power Systems.
H. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):
1. 142 - Steel Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and Combustible Liquids.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Requirements: Provide packaged diesel generator system capable of
supplying power to various sites when the utility system is interrupted for short or
extended durations.
B. Generator System Performance Requirements:
1. Refer to PART 2, PRODUCTS below.
C. Electrical Equipment Requirements: As specified in DIVISION 16 and the
requirements specified in this Section.
D. Seismic and Wind Design: Meet the seismic and wind design criteria as required for
Buckskin, Arizona.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16232 – Page 3
1. Complete Package: Submit complete shop drawings of each component making
up the generator system package; review will not be made until all required
information is submitted.
2. Submit torsional analysis or torsiograph records.
3. Submit exhaust system silencer noise attenuation curves.
4. Submit vibration isolator calculations as specified.
5. Structural calculations to be signed and stamped by a licensed Civil or
Structural Professional Engineer, licensed in the state where the Project is
located.
6. Radiator Heat Transfer Calculations: Submit radiator heat transfer calculations
including:
a. Air flow.
b. Air inlet and outlet temperatures.
c. Liquid inlet and outlet temperatures from both cores.
d. Assumed U-values for each core.
e. Bare tube surface area.
f. Fin surface area.
7. Submit radiator fan blade type pitch tip speed and noise levels by octave band
from 63 hertz to 8,000 hertz.
8. Submit exhaust system pressure loss calculations; include piping, fittings,
silencer, and rain cap in loss calculations.
9. Submit exhaust silencer structural support calculations.
10. Submit wiring diagrams including interconnecting wire and conduit schedule
for control and power wiring to and from transfer switches, MCCs, switchgear
and plant control systems.
B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit a detailed recommended installation
procedure for the following:
1. Engine-generator set.
2. Other system components.
C. Test Reports:
1. Primary supplier to submit certified copies of the results of the factory tests.
2. Submit factory-certified test log of the generator set showing testing as
specified in this Section.
D. Certificates:
1. For the Complete Package: Upon completion of installation, manufacturer shall
issue a certification of compliance with the Specifications.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Instruction manuals containing operation and
maintenance procedures.
F. Quality Control Submittals:
1. Manufacturer's certificate of proper installation.
2. Factory test report.
3. Field test report and certification.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16232 – Page 4
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications:
1. The engine, generator, and all major items of auxiliary equipment shall be
manufactured by manufacturers currently engaged in the production of such
equipment.
2. Factory authorized parts and service facility located within 200 miles of the
Project site.
3. Materials, equipment, and parts comprising the units specified shall be new and
unused, of current manufacture, and of the highest grade.
4. System to have engine and generator unit factory-assembled and tested by the
engine manufacturer and shipped to the jobsite by an authorized dealer.
B. Supplier Qualifications:
1. System to be furnished by one factory authorized supplier who shall be
responsible for furnishing, testing, installation supervising, and guaranteeing
the system.
2. The factory authorized supplier for the diesel engine generator package will be
referred to as the Primary Supplier. The responsibility of the Primary Supplier
shall extend to the selection and furnishing of the specified components and
supervision of installation, testing and start-up.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following:
1. Regulations of the Fire Prevention Bureau of the fire department having
jurisdiction.
2. International Building Code (Latest Edition)
3. Uniform Fire Code - 2003 NFPA1.
4. Other applicable state and local codes.
5. CONTRACTOR shall not be relieved from complying with the Specifications
that may be in excess of, and not contrary to, the regulations.
1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Elevation and ambient conditions as specified herein:
1. Minimum Ambient Temperature: 25°F.
2. Maximum Ambient Temperature: 122°F.
3. Altitude: 420 feet above sea level.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Generator Package: Covered by a manufacturer's standard warranty for a minimum
of 2 years from date of final acceptance or first beneficial use of the package.
B. Warrant, that when fuel tanks are specified, the fuel tanks will not fail or leak for a
period of 5 years from original purchase from either external corrosion, internal
corrosion, or structural failure.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16232 – Page 5
1.08 MAINTENANCE
A. Spare Parts: Furnish the following spare parts for the engine/generator to the CITY
prior to acceptance of the Work:
1. 3 sets of lube oil filters, fuel filters, and gaskets.
2. 2 sets of air filters.
3. 2 sets of belts.
4. 12 spare lamps of each different lamp type.
5. 2 fuses (for each control circuit).
6. Provide a battery test hydrometer.
7. Provide a two-pronged battery test voltmeter.
8. 1 set of crankcase breather filters.
B. Special Tools: Furnish a set of specialty tools necessary for routine maintenance of
the equipment.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 DIESEL ENGINE
A. Manufacturers:
1. Engine: One of the following or Equal:
a. Kohler
b. Caterpillar
c. Cummins
2. Governor: One of the following or equal:
a. Woodward, digital type, Model 723, with EGP type actuator sized for the
engine.
b. Engine manufacturers equivalent digital governor.
B. General:
1. Power Output Rating: 20 Kilowatts, 120/240 volts, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 hertz
delivered at 0.8 power factor, without exceeding NEMA MG-1 temperature
rise limits.
2. Rating Basis: As scheduled based upon the following performance rating
classifications:
a. Standby Rating: Typical peak load of 80 percent of rating but able to
operate at 100 percent of rating for duration of the power outage.
b. Typical hours of operation: 300 per year.
3. Able to start without any outside power source.
C. Engine Requirements:
1. Engine Type: 4-Stroke Cycle. Provide in-line or V-type diesel engine with
compression ignition, meeting all requirements of NFPA 37 and NFPA 110.
2. Maximum Rotational Speed: 1,800 rpm.
3. Minimum Piston Displacement: As scheduled.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16232 – Page 6
4. Turbocharger: Turbocharged engine with an aftercooler cooled by the engine
coolant.
5. Main Bearings: Main bearings between each crank throw.
6. Cooling: Liquid cooled with engine driven coolant pump.
7. Fuel Type: Meet Specifications when operating on Number 2 diesel fuel oils
meeting the requirements of the Air Quality Management District or Air
Pollution Control Board; engines requiring premium fuels shall not be
considered.
8. Emissions: Meet the requirements of the Air Quality Management District or
Air Pollution Control Board, as applicable to the Project site.
9. Air filters: Replaceable dry element type with dirty condition differential
pressure indicator.
10. Lube oil filters: Dual spin-on type.
D. Governor: Electronic, digital type to regulate engine speed within 0.25 percent at any
constant load from no load to full load.
2.02 GENERATOR
A. Manufacturers:
1. Generator: One of the following:
a. Cummins Power Generation.
b. Caterpillar, model to match engine and required rating when Caterpillar
engine is supplied.
c. Or Equal
2. Voltage Regulator: One of the following or equal:
a. Basler, SR 4-F.
b. Similar by engine/generator manufacturer.
B. Generator:
1. Type: Synchronous revolving field type with brushless design full wave exciter
and solid-state voltage regulator.
2. Performance Requirements:
a. The generator will be used to supply a variety of loads, some of which are
non-linear in nature (variable frequency drives). Generator must be
suitable for this service.
b. BUS Voltage Distortion: At times the BUS voltage may have a total
harmonic voltage distortion factor of as scheduled and as defined in IEEE
Standard 519. Equipment and devices furnished must function without
derating, excessive heating, or false operation as a result of this distortion.
3. Standards: Meet requirements of NEMA MG-1.
4. Windings: Wye connected, braced to withstand a bolted, 3 phase short-circuit
at the machine terminals and treated for moisture resistance.
5. Insulation: Class H on the stator and rotor, and further protect both with
100 percent epoxy impregnation and an overcoat of resilient insulating material
to reduce possible fungus and abrasive deterioration.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16232 – Page 7
6. Enclosure: Open drip-proof enclosure and fully guarded construction for
horizontal mounting.
7. Stator:
a. Type: Welded frame construction; laminations thin segmental type of non-
aging, low-loss steel, finished in a manner to minimize eddy current core
losses and stacked for strength and quiet operation.
b. Connection: Directly connected to the engine flywheel housing.
c. Temperature Detectors: Provide 2 temperature detectors of the thermal
couple type per phase, installed, and wired in the stator; locate in the
center of the slot between coil sides; provide panel mounted readout of
temperatures.
8. Rotor:
a. Type: Laminated rotor pole piece construction with high magnetic
permeability, finished and arranged for low eddy current losses.
b. Drive: Rotor driven through a flexible coupling for permanent alignment.
c. Bracing: Braced for overspeed of 25 percent in either direction.
9. Bearings: Provide a thermal couple detector to measure each bearing's
temperature; provide panel mounted readout of temperatures.
10. Strip Heaters: Provide 120 volt strip heaters to prevent moisture condensation.
11. Terminal Boxes: Provide separate terminal boxes for low voltage leads and
generator leads.
C. Voltage Regulation:
1. Type: SCR, solid-state type with 3 phase sensing.
2. Performance: Maintain rated voltage within plus or minus of the scheduled
percentage rating; from no load to full load; instantaneous voltage dip of less
than the scheduled rated voltage percentage when the generator is the sole
system power source and the largest single inductive load as scheduled is
started with all other standby loads running at full rated load.
3. Adjustment: Provide rheostat for a minimum of plus or minus 5 percent voltage
adjustment from rated value.
D. Engine/Generator Recovery Time:
1. Achieve and maintain stable operation within the time (in seconds) as
scheduled; stable or steady-state operation is defined as operation with terminal
voltage remaining constant within plus or minus of the scheduled rated voltage.
2.03 LIQUID COOLANT SYSTEM
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Radiator:
a. Young Radiator, Model MWC-Q.
b. Equivalent product by engine manufacturer.
2. Jacket Water Heaters:
a. Kim Hot Start with adjustable thermostat.
b. Wattlow.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16232 – Page 8
B. Radiator Type: Engine-driven and mounted on the engine skid; complete with
special low noise pusher fan, drive belts, fan guard, fan shroud, thermostats, and
quick warm-up bypass line.
C. Radiator Features:
1. Capacity: Cool the engine and turbocharge aftercooler with a 0.5 inch water
column external air flow restriction when engine is delivering 10 percent over
the maximum rated horsepower of the engine with ambient conditions as
specified herein and radiator inlet air temperature 10 degrees above the ambient
temperature specified herein.
2. Load Banks: Provide additional capacity for cooling specified generator load
banks to be mounted with the radiator as specified and scheduled.
3. Radiator Fan: Air foil type blades; radiator fan rpm and hp not to exceed those
for Young Model MWC-Q at required Btu/hr capacity. When acoustical
enclosure is required, manufacturer may offer its standard fan type meeting
specified requirements.
4. Fan Belt Tensioner:
a. Mounted on slack side of belts.
b. Provide tension adjusting screws, or hydraulic tensioner; provide slotted
guides to maintain proper tensioner alignment while adjusting belt tension.
5. Adjustable Pitch Fan Blades: Provide for generator sets above 600 kW rated
output.
6. Radiator Housing:
a. Provide radiator housing with a flange suitable for connection to a duct.
b. Provide bracing from top of radiator housing to engine skid to prevent
rocking of the radiator.
7. Radiator Core: Heavy-duty model radiator with removable cores and welded
steel tanks bolted into place.
8. Radiator Drain: Provide drain with a manual shut-off valve and a drain pipe to
the outside of the skid.
D. Coolant Solution: Provide solution of 50 percent ethylene glycol and softened water;
add chemical water conditioner as recommended by the engine manufacturer.
E. Flexible Connections: Provide duct work with a fabric reinforced elastomer flexible
connection section between radiator duct flange and ducting connected to the
radiator exhaust louver.
F. Coolant Expansion Tank: Provide radiator top mounted separate expansion tank
sized for entire jacket water system.
G. Jacket Water Heater:
1. Provide jacket water heaters sized to maintain engine jacket water to
90 degrees Fahrenheit at the minimum ambient temperature specified herein.
2. The heater shall be 120V, single-phase.
3. For V-type engines, provide heater for each side.
4. Power Voltage and Phases: As scheduled.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16232 – Page 9
5. Provide adjustable thermostat, Kim Hot-Start Part AT6525 or equal.
6. Provide heater circulation pump; Grundfos or equal.
7. Coolant Connection Hoses: Provide braided metal coolant connection hoses
with silicone rubber carcass rated for a minimum of 300 degrees Fahrenheit
operating temperature.
8. Shut-Off Valves: Provide gate type shut-off valves on heater inlet and outlet to
jacket water circulation loop to allow maintenance of heater and pump without
having to drain engine coolant system.
H. Low Coolant Level Detector: Provide radiator with low coolant level detector
mounted in radiator expansion tank; tie detector to the engine shutdown system.
I. Radiator Hoses: Provide premium, oil resistant hoses of Viton or silicone rubber
carcass with reinforcing fabric; assembly to be suitable for a minimum service
temperature of 250 degrees Fahrenheit. When manufacturer cannot offer hoses
meeting the material requirements specified, provide two spare sets of radiator
hoses.
2.04 FUEL SYSTEM
A. General: Provide fuel system, accessories and fuel tanks meeting the following
requirements.
B. Subbase Fuel Tank: Provide a subbase fuel tank meeting the following:
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. Pryco.
b. Tramont.
2. Operate generator’s full load capacity for 24 hours.
3. Provide UL listed tank with secondary containment rupture basin.
4. Construction: Reinforced steel channel system with minimum thickness of
7 gauge for channels and 12 gauge for tank construction.
5. Provide tank baffle to separate hot fuel return from cooler supply fuel.
6. Provide the following connections:
a. 1.25 inch minimum vent; CONTRACTOR to pipe vent to outside any
room or enclosure containing the generator set; use Schedule 40 black
steel pipe for vent.
b. 2 inch minimum fill connection.
c. 2 inch minimum main fuel storage level gauge.
d. 1.25 inch minimum low fuel level alarm; provide level switch and connect
to control panel.
e. 0.5 inch minimum fuel supply with dip tube.
f. 0.5 inch minimum fuel return with dip tube.
7. Provide rupture basin level switch and alarm.
8. Provide interior epoxy coating system.
9. Provide exterior epoxy coating with urethane top coat.
C. Above Ground Fuel Piping:
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16232 – Page 10
1. Flexible Connections: Provide 18-inch long flexible connections where off-skid
connects to the engine skid.
2. Provide a check valve located on the tank side of the flexible connection in the
return fuel line.
3. Provide a 24 volt direct current solenoid shutoff valve, wire, conduit, and
control interlock to close on engine shutdown; locate on the tank side of the
flexible connection in the fuel supply line.
D. Fuel Filters: Size filters for 10 percent above the engine fuel pump capacity.
1. Provide water/fuel separator.
2. Provide primary fuel filter.
3. Provide secondary fuel filter.
E. Engine Fuel Pump: Provide engine-driven fuel pump which transfers fuel from the
fuel tank; provide fuel pressure gauges on the pump suction and discharge.
2.05 EXHAUST SYSTEM
A. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
1. Silencer:
a. Maxim.
b. Nelson.
2. Expansion Joint:
a. DME.
3. Exhaust Pipe Insulation:
a. As required for Flagstaff environment.
4. Expansion Joint Insulation:
a. Pittsburg-Corning, Temp-Mat.
B. System: Provide a complete exhaust system following the general scheme as
specified.
C. Back Pressure:
1. Provide components such that the maximum back-pressure in the exhaust
system including piping and silencer is 15 inches water column, measured at
the exhaust manifold header; reduce allowable back-pressure when
recommended by the engine manufacturer.
2. Provide each exhaust manifold header with a lugged, tapped connection for the
attachment of a test manometer; test actual back-pressure during acceptance
testing of the system.
D. Exhaust Piping:
1. Type: Schedule 40 high temperature black steel pipe conforming to ASTM
A106.
2. Drainage: Slope piping to a drain point and provide drain plug.
3. Finishes: Sand blast and coat outside of exhaust piping with not less than 6 mils
of inorganic zinc primer; finish coat in the field.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16232 – Page 11
4. Insulation: As required for Buckskin environment for engine exhaust piping.
E. Exhaust Expansion Joints:
1. Type: Metal with convoluted portion of 0.038 inch thick Type 321 stainless
steel; non-convoluted portions of expansion joint to be Type 304 stainless steel,
Schedule 10S pipe; provide flanged ends with ASME B16.5, Class 150 bolt
hole drilling.
2. Length: Minimum of 18 inches in length.
3. Movement: Rated for a minimum of 1 inch lateral movement, and 1/2 inch
axial movement; rated movement defined as plus or minus travel from neutral
or free position.
4. Design Life: Infinite cycle life with 1,200 degrees Fahrenheit exhaust, no
insulation over the expansion joint, and continuous duty service.
5. Insulation: Insulate expansion joints with custom fitted, removable with
reusable fastening system, ceramic fiber insulation blankets enclosed between
inner and outer high temperature fabric cover rated for 1,200 degrees
Fahrenheit continuous duty; do not insulate expansion joints directly connected
to turbocharger outlet.
F. Exhaust Silencer:
1. Type: Heavy duty industrial type fabricated of welded steel with ported tubes
and snubbing chambers, and a rating meeting the specified sound attenuation.
2. Mounting: As required by the generator manufacturer.
3. End Connections: Steel flanges with Class 150 pound drilling pattern.
4. Shell: Sufficiently heavy and reinforced to eliminate excessive vibration, stress
or deflection and to support all operating loads with the silencer at elevated
temperatures and insulated as specified; loads include insulation weight and
connecting piping; provide calculations signed by Registered Professional
Engineer for silencer supports.
5. Drain: Provide threaded, plugged condensate drain.
6. Sound Attenuation: Attain the following minimum sound attenuation at the
listed octave band center frequencies with the engine at full load:
Frequency (Hz) 63 125 250 500 1,000 2,000 4,000 8,000
Attenuation (dB) 39 42 42 40 38 38 38 38
7. Supports: Provide shell lug supports suitable for supporting and mounting the
silencer; support design to account for elevated temperatures under insulated
shell.
8. Insulation: Insulate as required for engine exhaust piping.
9. Pressure drop not to exceed 7 inch water column at maximum engine rating.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16232 – Page 12
2.06 WEATHERPROOF ACOUSTICAL HOUSING
A. Type: Provide engine enclosure to protect engine, generator, starting system,
batteries, and other specified accessories from weather exposure; meet seismic and
wind design requirements (Seismic Category C) or International Building Code
(IBC) classification; whichever is more stringent.
B. Wind and Seismic Requirements: As required for Buckskin (Seismic Category C) or
International Building Code (IBC) classification; whichever is more stringent.
C. Structural requirements: To meet or exceed 100 year snow loading.
D. Construction: Not less than 14 gauge steel panel thickness; all panels and members
hot dip galvanized after fabrication; enclosure readily removable to allow easy
maintenance and fitted with lockable latches; latches and hinges to be stainless steel.
E. Finishing: Factory or shop finished in epoxy and urethane coating system.
F. Noise Reduction: Provide acoustical insulation and acoustical enclosure ventilation
louvers and fan discharge silencers as necessary to achieve a measured sound
pressure level (dBA) as scheduled when measured at 23 feet from the enclosure;
protect acoustical insulation with perforated metal covers and plastic bagging to
prevent damage from abrasion or weather elements.
2.07 ENGINE - GENERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Panel Type: Provide an engine skid mounted NEMA 12, vibration-isolated 14 gauge
steel control panel.
B. Switches, Alarms, and Monitors:
1. Type: Environmentally sealed, solid-state, microprocessor-based modules for
engine control and alternating current metering.
2. Provide for Automatic/Manual Start/Stop engine control and programmable
alarms with separate safety shutdowns and associated flashing LED indicators
for specified alarms and shutdowns in an alarm module meeting NFPA 110.
3. Alarms and Shutdowns: Provide alarms and shutdowns for:
a. Low Oil Pressure: Alarm and separate shutdown.
b. High Coolant Temperature: Alarm and separate shutdown.
c. Low Coolant Level: Alarm and separate shutdown.
d. Engine Overspeed: Alarm and separate shutdown.
e. Overcrank: Alarm and separate shutdown.
f. Low Main Fuel Tank Level: When belly tank specified, alarm and separate
shutdown.
g. Fuel Tank Secondary Containment Level: When secondary containment is
specified, provide each fuel tank with a secondary containment alarm
which on detection of fuel in the interstitial space between the secondary
containment of day tank, and main tank, annunciates an alarm.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16232 – Page 13
h. Battery charger failure; alarm.
i. Generator on load; indicator.
j. Control switch not in AUTO; alarm.
4. Emergency Stop: Provide emergency stop pushbutton.
5. Start Cycle: Provide adjustable start cycle cranking times, 1-60 second
crank/reset periods; provide controls for a 30 second cranking cycle limit with
lockout; provide three 10 second cranks or a single 30 second crank.
6. Cooldown Timer: Adjustable to 0-30 minutes engine run time after load
disconnected for normal shutdowns.
7. Fuel Control: Provide an energized to run fuel control system operate the fuel
solenoid valve.
8. System Variable Indicator: Provide liquid crystal display digital readout for:
a. Engine oil pressure.
b. Engine coolant temperature.
c. Engine rpm.
d. System direct current volts.
e. Engine running hours.
f. Generator alternating current volts for each phase.
g. Generator alternating current amperes for each phase.
h. Generator frequency.
9. Control System Diagnostics: Provide liquid crystal display digital readout for
system diagnostic codes that include:
a. Loss of engine speed signal.
b. Invalid engine control switch signal.
c. Internal circuit fault.
d. Loss of coolant temperature signal.
e. Loss of data sending unit signal.
f. Unrequested engine shutdown.
g. Invalid programming switch position.
h. Loss of or failure to program settings.
10. Other Devices:
a. Display switch and hold button.
b. Engine control switch marked AUTO, MANUAL, OFF/RESET.
c. Indicator/display test switch.
d. Generator output voltage adjustment potentiometer.
e. Governor raise/lower speed adjust switch.
f. Panel illumination lights and switch.
g. Fault reset switch.
h. Audible alarm for alarms and shutdowns; provide audible alarm bypass
switch and alarm silence switch.
i. Battery charge rate ammeter if not furnished on separate charger.
j. Exciter cutout breaker, manual reset or exciter fuse; if fused, provide spare
fuse.
k. Dry contacts wired to terminal strips for connection to the plant control
system. Signals shall be:
1) Fuel Tank Leak.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16232 – Page 14
2) Low Fuel Level.
3) High Temperature.
4) Low Battery.
l. Two dry single pole double throw contacts that switch when generator is
on for "Generator Running" indication and two dry alarm contacts that
open on "Generator Failure." Prewire the contacts to external terminal
strips at the panel for the purpose of remote alarm and status indication.
m. Provide panel mounted temperature scanner/indicator for generator
bearing and winding temperatures.
C. Generator Control Performance Requirements:
1. Maintain control and monitoring accuracy over the entire operating temperature
range.
2. Alternating current metering accuracy of 0.5 percent current volts and amperes.
3. Alternating current frequency metering accuracy of 0.3 hertz.
4. Other Accuracies:
a. Plus or minus 0.5 volt for direct current volts.
b. Plus or minus 1.0 revolutions per minute for engine speed.
c. Plus or minus 0.1 hour for hour meter.
D. Breakers: Install a generator main line fully rated molded case circuit breaker with
22 kiloamps interrupting capability as a load circuit interrupting and protection
device, as specified herein.
1. Breaker to operate both manually for normal switching function and
automatically during overload and short circuit conditions and as specified for
generator breaker controls.
2. Generator exciter field circuit breakers do not meet the above electrical
standards and are unacceptable for line protection.
2.08 GENERATOR SYSTEM OPERATION
A. Provide control devices and logic to sequentially start, operate, control, test, and stop
the generator system as described. Coordinate control system design so that on loss
of utility power, power is automatically supplied by the generator and on return of
stable utility power, power is automatically switched back to utility power and the
engine shuts down.
B. Engine Start Sequence:
1. Engine shall not start if any of the safety shutdown circuits have been tripped
and not cleared and reset.
2. Automatic Engine Start Sequence:
a. Initiated by a signal from the switchgear control system.
b. Starter Motor: Automatically crank the engine for adjustable times.
C. Emergency Shutdown Sequence: Engine shall shutdown immediately if the
emergency stop button is activated, or any of the specified shutdowns activate.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16232 – Page 15
D. Normal Shutdown Sequence: Local or remote Stop signal shall cause the engine to
run unloaded for an adjustable cool-down period and then stop.
1. Remote stop signal shall be based on sensing the return of utility power for an
adjustable 0 to 15 minute time period before the engine is stopped and return to
utility power is limited. If utility power is lost during the time delay period the
timer shall be reset to zero and the engine shutdown not initiated until the set
delay time expires without an interruption of utility power.
2.09 SKID
A. Skid Requirements: Mount the engine, generator, radiator, and specified accessories
on a common heavy-duty fabricated steel skid, with its associated trailer, suitable for
portable functionality.
B. Skid Construction: Fabricated steel skid to consist of a rigid welded frame of wide
flange members or rails on each side.
C. Vibration Isolators: Mount skid on spring isolators having telescopic top and bottom
housing with vertical stabilizers to resist lateral and vertical forces.
1. Manufacturers: One of the following or equal:
a. California Dynamics Corporation, Type RJSD.
b. Mason Industries, equivalent product.
2. Isolator Construction: Shatterproof ductile iron in accordance with
ASTM A 536, Grade CS-45-12.
3. Calculations: Submit to demonstrate proper isolator capacity, operation, and
vibration protection.
D. Additional Requirements:
1. Acquire all licenses (including but not limited to Arizona Motor Vehicle
Department) for the trailer (with generator) and pay all fees and cost.
2. Design skid components to limit deflection in any element to be low L/240 and
metal stresses to below one-half the allowable metal stress.
3. Submit calculations on skid elements.
2.10 ACCESSORIES
A. Starting System: Provide 24 volt direct current electric starting system with positive
engagement drive.
1. Batteries: Provide a 24 volt lead-acid storage battery set of the heavy-duty
diesel starting type; sufficient capacity for a minimum of 120 seconds total
cranking time without recharging.
2. Battery Rack: Provide a battery rack with necessary cables and clamps; provide
a cover constructed of aluminum angles and mesh to prevent dropped items
from touching the battery poles; provide latches to allow quick removal of the
cover from the rack.
3. Battery Charger: Provide UL approved current limiting battery charger to
automatically recharge the batteries:
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16232 – Page 16
a. Charger to float at 2.17 volts per cell and equalize at 2.33 volts per cell.
b. Provide charger overload protection.
c. Charger to have silicon diode full wave rectifier, voltage surge
suppressors, direct current ammeter, direct current voltmeter, and fused
alternating current input.
d. Amperage Output: Not less than 10 amperes.
B. Crankcase Breather Filter:
1. Provide crankcase ventilation system with coalescing filter/trap for blowby;
coalescing filter to be replaceable.
2. When engine manufacturer recommends an open crankcase breather system
route outlet of breather filter to outside at 3 inches above grade and away from
engine components; provide on breather outlet Nelson "EcoVent" or equal,
sized to match engine breather flow.
3. When engine manufacturer recommends a closed crankcase breather system
provide integral crankcase pressure regulator with an automatic internal filter
bypass and bypass indicator; unit to be Racor Model CCV 4500 or equal.
2.11 POWER DISTRIBUTION
A. The generator system is a stand alone system. The generator system shall be
equipped with all power sources as required to be a standalone and fully functioning
system. All internal power distribution shall be part of this generator system
package. The power distribution system shall include the following as a minimum:
1. 100-amp, 120/240-volt, single-phase panel, rated for 10k AIC with a 50-amp
main circuit breaker. Branch circuit breakers shall be as required to feed the
jacket water heater, battery charger, outlets, light fixtures, and other loads as
required.
2. All circuitry as required including conduits and conductors.
2.12 FINISHES
A. Engine, Generator, Tanks, Other Equipment and Accessories: Unless otherwise
specified for individual components, shop-finished with manufacturer's premium
corrosion resistant coating system suitable for corrosive or marine environments;
field touch up with same or compatible coating.
2.13 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Shop Testing: Test equipment as a complete unit together with subsystems. The test
program shall include the following functions:
1. Verification that all set-mounted components are correctly installed and
interconnected. Perform tests with submitted cooling and exhaust system.
2. Verification that each subsystem is complete and functions according to design
criteria; include measurements of temperatures, pressures, and flows for all
components.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16232 – Page 17
3. Individual testing of each protective device and verification of the accuracy of
instrumentation setpoints.
4. Operation of the generator unit from 0 to 100 percent load, starting at no load
and increasing in increments of 25 percent; check at each load point to verify
stable operation, fuel consumption (measure fuel consumption approximately
by measuring supply tank drawdown), engine performance, and generator
performance. Perform load test at 0.8 power factor; provide resistive and
reactive load banks to achieve this. Load test units for 2 hours at each load
prior to shipment.
5. Performance of full load transient tests to verify that voltage and frequency
transient characteristics are within the requirements of this Section.
6. Verification that equipment is free of all vibrations throughout operating range.
7. Provide written report including raw test data, calculated values, and a
certification that all values are normal and within Specifications prior to
shipment of the package.
8. Measure radiator performance at full load including air flow, air inlet
temperature, and air outlet temperature.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation of products as specified in
Division 1.
B. Factory prototype and factory production tests in accordance with NFPA 110 to be
complete before the equipment is installed.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Installation shall be by competent personnel experienced and regularly engaged in
field installation of power generation systems.
B. Mount fuel tank at the elevation relative to the engine as recommended by the engine
manufacturer to achieve proper engine fuel pump suction conditions while avoiding
fuel flooding in the engine return system.
C. In accordance with NFPA 110.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Generating System:
1. Full-load test the generating system at the site in the presence of the
ENGINEER for a period of 8 hours, with the primary supplier providing
necessary resistive and reactive load banks to test at 0.8 power factor..
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16232 – Page 18
2. Prior to acceptance of the installation, subject equipment to process system
load tests, with available motor load, but not to exceed the generator's
nameplate rating, for a period of 4 hours.
3. Correct defects which become evident during testing.
4. Perform operational testing as specified in Section 16950.
5. Measure flows, pressures and temperatures of fuel, coolant, exhaust gas, and
radiator air at inlets and outlets to system components.
6. Provide test report as specified in Section 16950.
7. Measure radiator performance at full load including air flow, air inlet
temperature, and air outlet temperature.
B. Consumables: Primary supplier to provide lubricating oil, grease, ethylene glycol,
chemical water conditioner. CONTRACTOR to provide sufficient fuel for testing.
1. After testing, fuel tanks shall be filled by CONTRACTOR with Number 2
domestic burner fuel.
C. Manufacturer's Field Service:
1. Provide services of a factory-trained representative to inspect installation of the
equipment, make necessary adjustments, place it in initial trouble-free
operation, and instruct OWNER personnel on its operation and maintenance.
2. Upon completion of the installation, start-up to be performed by a factory-
trained dealer service representative.
3.04 TRAINING
A. Provide one organized training session totaling not less than 4 hours. Training is
required during evening or night shift times at the OWNER option.
B. Provide the OWNER with 2 weeks written notice regarding the date of the scheduled
training session.
C. Provide the training session after all required start-up and testing procedures have
been acceptably performed.
3.05 PROTECTION
A. Protect products until acceptance by OWNER.
END OF SECTION
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16401 – Page 1
SECTION 16401
EXISTING SERVICE METER AND POWER DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Scope:
1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, testing,
certification, and incidentals as required to modify the existing service
entrance section to a receive the conductors from the automatic transfer
switch as indicated in the single line diagram Drawings and as specified
herein.
B. Related Sections: CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the requirements of the Work
in this Section along with the requirements of the Sections listed below which
includes, but is not necessarily limited to, Work that is directly related to this
Section.
1. Section 16050, General provisions.
2. Section 16100, Demolition.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. International Building Code (IBC): 1. International Building Code.
B. La Paz County Building Safety
C. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations
of the following, except where otherwise shown or specified:
1. Independent testing and labeling by a UL certified entity.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following:
1. Manufacturer's sketches and technical information for modifying the existing
service entrance section and power distribution equipment to receive power
conductors.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Company to perform modifications: One of the following:
1. Eaton.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16401 – Page 2
2. The Engineer does not know of any other entity that meets this
Specification.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Busses:
1. To match the existing Eaton Pow-R-Line switchboard, G.O. No. SPX0362859.
2. A field investigation (prior to the bid) is required to determine all work
required to perform this modification.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Perform the following:
1. Remove the existing feeder distribution breakers
2. Intercept the bus and modify as required to install automatic transfer switch
conductors.
3. Install and connect as indicated in single line diagram and as required for a
properly functioning system.
4. Replace cover and patch unnecessary opening.
5. Include all associated material and labor as required for a complete system.
6. All work shall be performed per UL standards.
B. Install equipment in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and as
required per National Electric Code.
C. Hire the services of an independent UL certified entity for testing and labeling the
service entrance section and power distribution equipment after all modifications
have been completed.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16412 – Page 1
SECTION 16412
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope:
1. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown on the
Drawings, specified and required to furnish and install automatic transfer
switches complete and operational.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications:
1. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of five years of experience of producing
substantially similar equipment, and shall be able to show evidence of at least five
installations in satisfactory operation for at least five years.
B. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the
following, except where otherwise shown or specified.
1. UL Standard No. 1008, Automatic Transfer Switches.
2. NEMA 1CS2-447, AC Automatic Transfer Switches.
3. NEMA 1CS1-109, Tests and Procedures.
4. IEEE Standard 472-1974, Guide for Surge Withstand Capability Tests.
5. National Electrical Code (NEC) current adoption.
6. International Building Code (IBC).
7. Buckskin Sanitary District Rules and Regulations.
8. La Paz County Building Safety.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following:
1. Manufacturer's technical information for automatic transfer switches proposed
for use.
2. Listing of the transfer switches to be furnished with ratings.
B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
1. Submit complete installation, operation and maintenance manuals including test
reports, maintenance data and schedules, description of operation and spare parts
information.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16412 – Page 2
A. Rating:
1. Switches shall be capable of switching all classes of loads and shall be rated for
continuous duty when installed in a non-ventilated enclosure.
2. Switches shall be three pole with overlapping neutral, 240 volts with ampere
rating as shown on the Drawings.
3. Switches shall have a withstand rating of 65,000 amps at 240 volts.
4. All control wiring shall be Type SIS, rated for 600 volts. All control wire
terminations shall be identified with tubular, sleeve-type markers.
5. Switches shall be enclosed in a freestanding, NEMA 3R. Enclosures shall have a
hinged and latched, gasketed door.
B. Operation:
1. Switches shall be double throw and operated by one, non-fused, momentarily
energized operating mechanism with a minimum transfer time of 400 milli-
seconds.
2. Operating mechanism shall prevent a sustained neutral position.
3. Normal and standby contacts mechanically and electrically interlocked to prevent
simultaneous closing.
4. Mechanical locking of main contacts in each direction shall be accomplished
without the aid of latching solenoids, toggle mechanisms or gear arrangements.
5. An overload or short-circuit shall not cause the switch to go to a neutral
position.
6. Inspection of all movable and stationary contacts shall be possible from the front
of the switch without disassembly of operating linkages and without
disconnection of power conductors. A manual operating handle shall be
provided for maintenance purposes. The maintenance handle shall permit the
operator to stop the contacts at any point throughout the entire travel to properly
inspect and service the contacts when required.
C. Accessories: An integrally mounted control panel with adjustable solid-state or
programmable microprocessor sensing and timing functions shall provide the
following operational characteristics:
1. Time delay on momentary dips in normal source (0.5 to 60 seconds), factory set
at fifteen (15) seconds.
2. Time delay on transfer to emergency for controlled loading of generator (0 to 1
minute), factory set at 0 minutes.
3. Time delay on retransfer to normal (0 to 60 minutes), factory set at 60 minutes.
4. Time delay on engine shutdown after retransfer to normal (0 to 30 minutes),
factory set at twenty (20) minutes.
5. Close differential voltage sensing of all normal source phases (pickup adjustable
from 85 to 100 percent of nominal and dropout adjustable from 75 to 98 percent
of pickup), factory set to pickup at 90 percent and dropout at 85 percent of
nominal.
6. Independent voltage (85 to 100 percent pickup) and frequency (90 to 100
percent pickup), sensing of the emergency source to prevent premature transfer,
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16412 – Page 3
factory set to pickup at 90 percent of nominal voltage and 95 percent of nominal
frequency.
7. Test switch (momentary type) to simulate failure of normal source.
8. Two sets of gold-plated single pole, double throw contacts, which operate when
the normal source fails. One set to be used for engine starting and the second set
to be spare.
9. Pilot lights to indicate switch position.
10. Auxiliary contacts (two closed on "NORMAL" and two closed on "EMER-
GENCY") rated ten amps, 120 VAC.
11. All time delay and sensing functions shall be field adjustable over the ranges
indicated and shall operate with minimum drift (not to exceed ± one percent of
set frequency, ± two percent of set voltage, and ± ten percent of set time delay)
over the temperature range of -20°C to +70°C. The control panel shall be
provided with a protective cover and an isolation plug in the wiring harness to
disconnect all the control wires between the control panel and the main transfer
panel.
12. Plant exerciser to automatically exercise generator. Exerciser shall be adjustable
type with minimum of 15-minute increments with switch to select "NO LOAD"
(switch will not transfer) "LOAD" (switch will transfer) exercise period.
13. Two position selector switch to select either automatic or manual retransfer to
normal operation.
14. Pushbutton retransfer to normal, operable only when two position selector switch
(Refer to Paragraph 2.1.C.13., above) is in the "MANUAL" position.
15. Time delay transfer to emergency, adjustable from 0 to 5 minutes, factory set at
one minute.
16. Retransfer to normal time delay, adjustable from 0 to 30 minutes, factory set at
five minutes.
17. An inphase monitor to control transfer and retransfer operations between live
sources so that closure on the alternate source will occur only when the two
sources are approaching or near synchronism (within 15 electrical degrees
maximum) so that inrush currents do not exceed normal starting currents. The
monitor shall function over a frequency difference range of up to ± two Hz with
a maximum operating transfer time of one-sixth of a second. If the voltage of the
load-carrying source drops below 70 percent, the inphase function shall be
automatically bypassed. The monitor shall not require interwiring with the
generator controls or active control of the governor.
18. Overlapping neutral.
D. Electrical and Mechanical Performance: Comply with UL Standard No. 1008 and
NEMA Standard ICS2-447. In addition, performance must meet or exceed the
following requirements and, if so requested, be verified by certified laboratory test
data:
1. Temperature Rise: Measurements shall be made after the overload and endurance
tests.
2. Dielectric: Measurements shall be made at 1960 VAC RMS minimum following
the withstand current rating test.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16412 – Page 4
3. Transient Withstand: Control panel shall pass the voltage surge withstand test in
accordance with IEEE Standard 472-1974 and the voltage impulse withstand test
in accordance with NEMA ICS-1-109.
4. Withstand: UL listed to withstand the magnitude of fault current available at the
switch terminals when coordinated with respective protective devices as shown
on the Drawings at an X/R ratio of 6.6 or less. The main contacts shall not trip
open or weld when subjected to fault currents.
E. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
1. Automatic Switch Co.
2. Russelectric.
3. Zenith Controls, Inc.
4. Or Approved Equal
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine the conditions under which the Work is to be installed and notify the
OWNER, in writing, of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of
the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Mount equipment so that sufficient access and working space is provided for ready
and safe operation and maintenance.
B. Securely fasten equipment to walls or other surfaces on which they are mounted.
C. Install in conformance with National Electrical Code.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16442 – Page 1
SECTION 16442
LIGHTING, INSTRUMENTATION AND DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope:
1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as
shown on the Drawings, specified and required to furnish and install lighting,
instrumentation and distribution panelboards.
B. Related Sections: CONTRACTOR shall coordinate the requirements of the Work in
this Section along with the requirements of the Sections listed below which includes, but
is not necessarily limited to, Work that is directly related to this Section.
1. Section 16050, General Provisions.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the
following, except where otherwise shown or specified:
1. NEC Article 408, Switchboards and Panelboards.
2. NEMA PB1, Panelboards.
3. NEMA 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum).
4. UL Standard 50, Electrical Cabinets and Boxes.
5. UL Standard 67, Electric Panelboards.
6. UL Standard 698, Circuit Breaker Panelboard Assembly.
7. UL Standard 943, Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following:
1. Manufacturer's technical information for panelboards proposed for use.
2. Listing of the panelboards to be furnished with an identification of their
proposed location, and number and rating of branch circuit breakers.
3. Lighting, instrumentation and distribution panelboards load calculations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Panelboards:
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16442 – Page 2
1. Rating: Voltage rating, current rating, number of phases, number of wires and
number of poles shall be as shown on the Drawings. Series rated panelboards are not
acceptable.
2. Circuit Breakers: Molded case, bolt-in thermal magnetic type with number of poles
and trip ratings as shown on the Drawings. Series rated breakers are not acceptable.
3. Main and branch circuit breakers shall be fully rated with interrupting capacities as
follows:
a. 65,000 amps for 120/240 volt circuit breakers
4. Bus Bars: 98 percent conductivity copper, tin plated. All panelboards shall have a
solid neutral bar. All panels shall have ground bus.
5. Main: All panelboards shall have a main circuit breaker, unless Drawings specifically
call for main lugs only.
6. Branch circuit breakers connected for sequence phasing.
7. Construction: Code grade steel, NEMA 12, ample gutter space, flush door, flush
snaplatch and lock for dry indoor locations. NEMA 4X stainless steel for outdoor or
damp indoor locations.
8. Trim: Surface or flush, as required.
9. Directory: White card, minimum card stack 90 lb., maximum size 8” x 5”, placed in
a 9” x 5 ½” self adhesive vinyl pocket. Directory information to be a copy of the as-
built panel schedule as provided on the contract drawings.
10. Identification: Nameplate identifying the panel number and voltage.
11. Product and Manufacturer: Provide panelboards of one of the following or equal:
a. Square D Company.
b. General Electric Company.
c. Cutler-Hammer.
d. Or approved equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Mounting: Install panelboards at locations shown on Drawings. Set cabinets so that top
branch circuit breaker is not over six feet above the floor.
B. Arrange circuits to balance the loads on the panelboards.
+ + END OF SECTION + +
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16970 – Page 1
SECTION 16970
PANELS AND ENCLOSURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Scope:
1. The CONTRACTOR/Supplier shall provide all labor, materials, equipment
and incidentals as shown on the Drawings, specified and required to furnish,
install, calibrate, test, start-up, commission and place into satisfactory
operation all control panels and/or enclosures.
B. Related works specified elsewhere:
1. The CONTRACTOR /Supplier shall review all Contract Documents to verify
complete electrical and control requirements, including but not limited to the
following:
a. Mechanical and civil drawings and specifications
b. Electrical and instrumentation specifications including but not limited
to the following:
1) Section 16940, Panel Instruments and Devices
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards: Construction of panels and the installation and interconnection
of all equipment and devices mounted within shall comply with applicable provisions
of the following, except where otherwise shown or specified.
1. National Fire Protection Association 79, Annex "D" Standards.
2. National Electrical Code.
3. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association Standards (NEMA).
4. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
5. Operational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Regulations.
7. State and local code requirements.
8. Where any conflict arises between codes or standards, the more stringent
requirement shall apply.
9. All electrical materials and equipment shall be new and shall bear the label of
the Underwriters' Laboratory (UL), Inc., Factory Mutual (FM) or equivalent
where standards have been established and label service regularly applies.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16970 – Page 2
A. Refer to Section 16050, General Provisions.
B. Shop Drawing, product data, and etc.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide all electrical and/or pneumatic components and devices, support hardware,
fasteners, interconnecting wiring and/or piping required to make the control panels
and/or enclosures complete and operational.
B. Locate and install all devices and components so that connections can be easily made
and that there is ample room for servicing each item.
C. Components for installation on panel exterior shall be located generally as shown on
the Drawings. Layouts shall be submitted for approval.
D. Where permitted by location and layout as shown on the Drawings, panels and
enclosures shall have full height rear access doors. Where rear doors are not possible,
panels shall have full or half height front access doors.
E. Adequately support and restrain all devices and components mounted on or within the
panel to prevent any movement.
F. Provide sub-panels for installation of all relays and other internally mounted
components.
G. All wiring to panel connections from field instruments, devices, and other panels shall
be terminated at master numbered terminal strips, unless otherwise specified.
H. Provide copper grounding studs for all panel equipment and panel doors.
I. Provide the following convenience accessories inside of each control panel:
1. One 120 VAC, 20A duplex, grounding type receptacle.
2. One 120 VAC fluorescent light fixtures with 40 watt lamp and protective
plastic shield to span across the width of the panel (but not less than
two-thirds).
3. One 120 VAC, 20A, snap switch, to turn on the light, mounted in an outlet
box with a cover and located so that it is easily accessible from access door.
4. Service light with switch and duplex receptacle shall have its own circuit
breaker and separate power feed.
5. All receptacles shall be GFCI type.
6. All devices shall be powered from the enclosure's power system.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16970 – Page 3
J. The bottom 12-inches of free standing panels shall be free of all devices, including
terminal strips, to provide ease of installation and testing.
K. No device on the front shall be mounted less than 36-inches above the operating floor
level, unless otherwise specified.
2.02 IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for identification of panels and components
mounted thereon as follows:
1. Nameplates shall be of 3/32-inch thick laminated phenolic type with white
matte finish surface and black letter engraving.
2. Panel identification nameplates to have 1/2 inch high engravings.
3. Panel mounted component (e.g., control devices, indicating lights, selector
switches, etc.) identification nameplates to have 1/4 inch high, engravings.
4. Nameplates shall be attached to the panel face with two stainless steel
self-tapping screws.
5. Nameplate engravings shall include the instrument or equipment tag number
and descriptive title as shown on the Drawings and specified.
B. Tag all internally mounted instruments in accordance with the following requirements:
1. Tag numbers shall be as shown on the Drawings.
2. The identifying tag number shall be provided on a permanent sticker or
permanently etched or embossed onto a stainless steel tag which shall be
fastened to the device housing with stainless steel rivets or self tapping screws
of appropriate size.
3. Where neither of the above fastenings can be accomplished, tags shall be
permanently attached to the device by a circlet of nylon-coated 1/16-inch
diameter stainless steel wire rope.
4. Identification tag shall be installed so that the numbers are easily visible to
service personnel.
5. Front of panel-mounted instruments shall have the tag attached to rear of
device.
C. Tagging of the following items shall be accomplished with the use of adhesive plastic
Brady USA, Inc. labels, RayChem labels, Or Approved Equal.
1. Tag all electrical devices (e.g., relays, timers, power supplies) mounted within
control panels and enclosures.
2. Tag all pneumatic lines.
3. Numerically tag all terminal blocks.
4. Color code and numerically tag wiring at each end.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16970 – Page 4
D. Numerically code terminals on terminal strips using a Brady LS2000 Labeling System,
RayChem labels, Or Approved Equal
E. Color code and/or numerically code wiring as required by applicable standards. Wires
shall be identified at each end with permanent number codes using a Brady LS2000
Labeling System, RayChem labels, Or Approved Equal.
2.03 PANELS AND ENCLOSURES
A. General:
1. Panels and enclosures shall meet the NEMA requirements for the type
specified.
2. The CONTRACTOR/Supplier shall furnish panels and enclosures amply sized
to house all equipment, instruments, front panel mounted devices, power
supplies, power distribution panels, wiring, tubing and other components
installed within. Enclosures shall not be larger than those indicated on the
drawings.
B. Construction Features:
1. Control panels shall be NEMA 4X Stainless Steel 316 for corrosive areas;
indoor or outdoors.
Control panels shall be NEMA 12 for interior non-corrosive areas.
Control panels shall be NEMA 3R for exterior non-corrosive areas.
Panels shall be metallic.
a. Metallic Panels:
1) Panels shall be metallic type construction with a minimum
thickness of 12 gage for all surfaces (except those areas
requiring reinforcement) having a smooth brushed finish.
2) Fast-operating clamp assemblies on three sides of each door.
Outdoor panels shall be pad lockable.
3) Rolled lip around three sides of door and along top of
enclosure opening.
4) Three point latching door handles. Hasp and staples shall not
be provided.
5) Provide a clear plastic, gasketed lockable hinged door to
encompass all non-NEMA 4 front of panel instruments.
6) Provide 3-inch high channel base assembly, with solid bottom,
drilled to mate the panel to its floor pad for free-standing
panel.
7) Floor Pad: Refer to Part 3 of this Section.
C. Electrical Systems:
1. Wiring:
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16970 – Page 5
a. Internal wiring shall be Type MTW stranded copper wire with
thermo-plastic insulation rated for 600 V at 90°C for single
conductors, color coded, conforming to the requirements of NFPA
79, and labeled with wire identification.
b. For DC panel signal wiring, use No. 14 minimum AWG shielded.
c. For AC power wiring, use No. 16 minimum AWG. For AC signal and
control wiring, use No. 16 minimum AWG. For wiring carrying more
than 15 amps, use sizes required by NEC and NFPA "79" Standards.
d. Separate and shield low voltage signal wiring from power and control
wiring by a minimum of 6-inches.
e. Group or bundle parallel runs of wire using covered troughs, ensuring
that the separation of high and low voltage wire is maintained.
Maximum bundle size to be 1-inch. Troughs shall have 40 percent
spare capacity.
f Install wire troughs along horizontal or vertical routes to present a
neat appearance. Angled runs are not acceptable.
g. Adequately support and restrain all wiring runs to prevent sagging or
other movement.
h. Terminate all field wiring using forked, insulated, crimp-on connectors
(soldered type not acceptable) at 600 V rated barrier type terminal
strips with screwed connections and permanently affixed numeric
identifiers beside each connection. Identifiers to be heat-shrink labels,
as manufactured by Brady, permanent type, machine printed numbers.
For DC field signal wiring, terminal strips shall be capable of handling
No. 12 wiring (minimum). Provide Phoenix Contact, Entrelec, Allen
Bradley, Or Equal.
i. All wiring shall be installed such that if wires are removed from any
one device, power will not be disrupted to any other device.
j. For internal component-to-component wiring only, compression type
terminal blocks are acceptable.
k. Provide spare terminals equal in number to 20 percent of the terminals
used for each type of wiring (e.g., DC signal and AC power).
l. Provide a separate terminal for grounding each shielded cable.
m. Use separate 5/16 inch diameter copper grounding studs for isolated
instrument signal cable shields and AC power.
n. Where wires pass through panel walls, provide suitable bushings to
prevent cutting or abrading of insulation.
o. When DC power and/or low voltage AC power is required, provide
and install the necessary power supplies and transformers in the panel.
p. All field 4-wire instruments shall be powered from an instrument
lighting panel as shown on the Drawings. Provide circuit breakers to
protect each circuit, with no more than six instruments on a single
circuit. Provide lockable circuit breakers for metering pump circuits.
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16970 – Page 6
q. Provide complete wiring diagram showing "as built" circuitry.
Diagram shall be enclosed in transparent plastic and placed in easily
accessible pocket built into panel door.
2. Surge Protection:
a. General: Surge protection shall be provided to protect the electronic
instrumentation system from surges propagating along the signal and
power supply lines. The protection systems shall be such that the
protection level shall not interfere with normal operation, but shall be
lower than the instrument surge withstand level, and be maintenance
free and self-restoring. Instruments shall be housed in suitable metallic
cases, properly grounded. Ground wires for all surge protectors shall
be connected to a good earth ground and where practical each ground
wire run individually and insulated from each other. These protectors
shall be mounted within the instrument enclosure.
b. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following:
1) Phoenix Contact.
2) Advanced Protection Technologies.
3) Comm-Omni International.
4) Or Equal.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Unless otherwise noted, install indoor NEMA 12 panels on 4-inch concrete pad.
Extend pad 4-inches beyond outside dimensions of base, all sides.
B. Unless otherwise noted, install outdoor free standing NEMA 4 panels on a reinforced
concrete equipment pad.
END OF SECTION
Buckskin Sanitary District 2015
Phase 4 Wastewater Conveyance System and WWTP Improvements Specifications
Division 16: Electrical Section 16980 – Page 1
SECTION 16980
START-UP, COMMISSIONING AND FIELD TESTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SYSTEM START-UP, COMMISSIONING AND FIELD TESTING
RESPONSIBILITIES
A. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as
shown on the Drawings, specified and required to furnish and install all equipment
and coordinate all activities required to perform start-up, commissioning and field
testing of all equipment. Field testing shall include an integrated system field test
and operational availability demonstration.
1.02 SYSTEM CHECK-OUT AND START-UP
A. CONTRACTOR shall perform the following:
1. Conduct a complete system checkout and adjustment, including calibration of
all instruments, tuning of control loops, checking operation functions, and
testing of final control actions. When there are future operational functions
included in this Work, they should be included in the system checkout. All
problems encountered shall be promptly corrected to prevent any delays in
start-up of the various unit processes.
B. CONTRACTOR shall provide all test equipment required to perform the testing
during system checkout and start-up.
PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED)
+ + END OF SECTION + +
APPENDICES
AppendicesBuckskin Sanitary DistrictWastewater Treatment Plant Improvements